Leica Photogrammetry Suite Project Manager

Leica Photogrammetry
Suite
Project Manager
Copyright © 2006 Leica Geosystems Geospatial Imaging, LLC
All rights reserved.
Printed in the United States of America.
The information contained in this document is the exclusive property of Leica Geosystems Geospatial Imaging, LLC.
This work is protected under United States copyright law and other international copyright treaties and conventions.
No part of this work may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical,
including photocopying and recording, or by any information storage or retrieval system, except as expressly
permitted in writing by Leica Geosystems Geospatial Imaging, LLC. All requests should be sent to the attention of:
Manager, Technical Documentation
Leica Geosystems Geospatial Imaging, LLC.
5051 Peachtree Corners Circle
Suite 100
Norcross, GA 30092-2500 USA.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Government Reserved Rights. MrSID technology incorporated in the Software was developed in part through a
project at the Los Alamos National Laboratory, funded by the U.S. Government, managed under contract by the
University of California (University), and is under exclusive commercial license to LizardTech, Inc. It is used under
license from LizardTech. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign patents pending. The U.S.
Government and the University have reserved rights in MrSID technology, including without limitation: (a) The U.S.
Government has a non-exclusive, nontransferable, irrevocable, paid-up license to practice or have practiced
throughout the world, for or on behalf of the United States, inventions covered by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835 and has
other rights under 35 U.S.C. § 200-212 and applicable implementing regulations; (b) If LizardTech's rights in the
MrSID Technology terminate during the term of this Agreement, you may continue to use the Software. Any
provisions of this license which could reasonably be deemed to do so would then protect the University and/or the
U.S. Government; and (c) The University has no obligation to furnish any know-how, technical assistance, or technical
data to users of MrSID software and makes no warranty or representation as to the validity of U.S. Patent 5,710,835
nor that the MrSID Software will not infringe any patent or other proprietary right. For further information about these
provisions, contact LizardTech, 1008 Western Ave., Suite 200, Seattle, WA 98104.
ERDAS, ERDAS IMAGINE, IMAGINE OrthoBASE, Stereo Analyst and IMAGINE VirtualGIS are registered trademarks;
IMAGINE OrthoBASE Pro is a trademark of Leica Geosystems Geospatial Imaging, LLC.
SOCET SET is a registered trademark of BAE Systems Mission Solutions.
Other companies and products mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Example Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Conventions Used in This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Introduction to LPS Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using LPS Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
LPS Project Manager Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Triangulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Tour Guide Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Frame Camera Tour Guide . . . . . . . . . . ........ . ... 6
Digital Camera Tour Guide . . . . . . . . . . ........ . ... 6
SPOT Pushbroom Sensor Tour Guide . . . ........ . ... 7
Appendix Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Batch Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
About LPS Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . ... 8
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . ... 9
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . . 10
Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Photogrammetric Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Introduction to Photogrammetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
What is Photogrammetry? . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . . 13
Types of Photographs and Images . . . . . ........ . . . 15
Why use Photogrammetry? . . . . . . . . . ........ . . . 16
LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / iii

Photogrammetry vs. Conventional Geometric Correction . 17
Single Frame Orthorectification vs. Block Triangulation . . 18
Image and Data Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Photogrammetric Scanners . . . ........ . ........ . 22
Desktop Scanners . . . . . . . . . ........ . ........ . 22
Scanning Resolutions . . . . . . . ........ . ........ . 23
Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . ........ . ........ . 25
Terrestrial Photography . . . . . . ........ . ........ . 27
Interior Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Principal Point and Focal Length ........ . ........ . 29
Fiducial Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . ........ . 29
Lens Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . ........ . 31
Exterior Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Rotation Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
The Collinearity Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Photogrammetric Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Space Resection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . 38
Space Forward Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . 39
Bundle Block Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . 40
Least Squares Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . 43
Self-calibrating Bundle Adjustment . . . . . . . ........ . 46
Automatic Gross Error Detection . . . . . . . . ........ . 46
GCPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
GCP Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Processing Multiple Strips of Imagery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Tie Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Automatic Tie Point Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Image Matching Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Area-based Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . 52
Feature-based Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . 54
Relation-based Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . 55
Image Pyramid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . 55
LPS Project Manager Pyramid Layers . . . . . ........ . 56
Satellite Photogrammetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
SPOT Interior Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
SPOT Exterior Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Collinearity Equations and Satellite Block Triangulation . . 63
Orthorectification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Cell Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
LPS Project Manager Tour Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Frame Camera Tour Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Create a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / iv

Prepare the Block File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Select Geometric Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Define Block Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Add Imagery to the Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Add Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Compute Pyramid Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Define the Camera Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Enter Specific Camera Information . . . . ........ . . . 79
Add Fiducial Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . . 81
Measure Fiducials of the Images . . . . . . ........ . . . 81
Enter Exterior Orientation Information . . ........ . . . 87
Edit the Remaining Images in the Project ........ . . . 88
Measure GCPs and Check Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Collect Point ID 1002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . . 92
Collect Point ID 1003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . . 96
Set Automatic (x, y) Drive Function . . . . ........ . . . 98
Collect Point ID 1004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . . 99
Collect Point ID 1005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . .101
Collect Point ID 1006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . .102
Input Check Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Collect Point ID 2001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Collect Point ID 2002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Perform Automatic Tie Point Generation . . . . . . . 109
Check Tie Point Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Perform Aerial Triangulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Find Information in the Triangulation Report . . . . . . . .114
Save the Triangulation Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Update the Exterior Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Ortho Resample the Imagery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
View the Orthoimages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Display Graphic View . . . . . ........ . ........ . . .122
Use the Viewer . . . . . . . . . ........ . ........ . . .124
Magnify Areas of Overlap . . ........ . ........ . . .125
Use the Swipe Utility . . . . . ........ . ........ . . .126
Save and Close the Block File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Reference Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Digital Camera Tour Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Create a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Prepare the Block File . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . .134
Select Geometric Model . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . .136
Define Block Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . .136
Import Exterior Orientation Parameters . ........ . . .138
Add Imagery to the Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Compute Pyramid Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / v

Define the Camera Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Enter Specific Camera Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Save the Camera Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Check Camera Information of the Other Images . . . . . 146
Enter Interior Orientation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Enter Exterior Orientation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Perform Automatic Tie Point Collection . . . . . . . .148
Check Tie Point Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Perform Aerial Triangulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Check Project Graphic Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Ortho Resample the Imagery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
View the Orthoimages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Use LPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 162
Use a Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 163
Magnify Areas of Overlap . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 164
Use the Swipe Utility . . . . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 165
Save and Close the Block File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
SPOT Pushbroom Sensor Tour Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Create a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Prepare the Block File . . . . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 170
Choose Camera Model . . . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 172
Add Imagery to the Block . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 174
Generate Pyramid Layers . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 175
Define the Sensor Model . . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 175
Start the Point Measurement Tool . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Specify the Horizontal Reference Source . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Collect GCPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Collect Point ID 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Collect Point ID 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Set Automatic (x, y) Drive Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Collect Point ID 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Collect Point ID 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Collect Point ID 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Collect Point ID 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Collect Point ID 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Collect Point ID 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Collect Point ID 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Collect the Last Two Control Points . . . . . . . . . . .191
Set the Horizontal Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Collect Point ID 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Collect Point ID 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Set the Vertical Reference Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Set Type and Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Save the Block File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Add a Second Image to the Block . . . . . . . . . . . .200
LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / vi

Generate Pyramid Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Define the Sensor Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Start the Point Measurement Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Collect Ground Control Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Collect Point ID 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . .203
Collect Point ID 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . .204
Collect Point ID 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . .204
Collect Point ID 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . .205
Collect Point ID 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . .205
Collect Point ID 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . .206
Collect Point ID 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . .206
Perform Automatic Tie Point Collection . . . . . . . . 207
Check Tie Point Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Perform Triangulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Ortho Resample the Imagery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
View the Orthoimages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Use LPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . ........ . . .216
Use a Viewer . . . . . . . . . . ........ . ........ . . .217
Magnify Areas of Overlap . . ........ . ........ . . .218
Use the Swipe Utility . . . . . ........ . ........ . . .219
Save and Close the Block File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
SPOT Example Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Project Location . . . . . . . . ........ . ........ . . .222
Imagery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . ........ . . .222
DEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . ........ . . .222
Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . ........ . . .222
Spheroid . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . ........ . . .222
Zone Number . . . . . . . . . . ........ . ........ . . .222
Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . ........ . . .222
Horizontal Units . . . . . . . . ........ . ........ . . .222
Vertical Units . . . . . . . . . . ........ . ........ . . .222
Sensor Information . . . . . . ........ . ........ . . .222
GCP Map Coordinates . . . . ........ . ........ . . .223
GCP Pixel Coordinates . . . . ........ . ........ . . .223
Stereo Point Measurement Tool Tour Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Open a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Image Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Check Device Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Select Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Point ID 1001 ........ . . ........ . ........ . . .231
Point ID 1002 ........ . . ........ . ........ . . .233
Point ID 1003 ........ . . ........ . ........ . . .236
Point ID 1004 ........ . . ........ . ........ . . .238
Point ID 1005 ........ . . ........ . ........ . . .239
LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / vii

Next Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Practical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Getting Started with LPS Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . .245

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
What is a Block? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Geometric Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 249
Pushbroom Sensors . . . . . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 250
RPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 251
Mixed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 251
Reference Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Defining Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Defining Frame-specific Information . . . . . . . . . .254
Rotation System Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Photographic Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Average Flying Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Importing Exterior Orientation Parameters . . . . . . . . . 258
Why Import Exterior Orientation Parameters? . . . . . . . 259
Project Setup for Sensor Models . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
The LPS Project Manager Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Adding Images to the Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Adding Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Add Multiple Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
LPS CellArray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Creating Pyramid Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Defining the Camera or Sensor Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Interior and Exterior Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Attaching One Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Attaching Multiple Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Defining or Editing Camera Information . . . . . . .273
Interior Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Frame Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 279
Fiducial Orientation . . . . . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 280
Interior Orientation CellArray . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 283
Image Enhancement . . . . . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 283
Fiducial Mark Residuals . . . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . 285
Defining Exterior Information of an Image . . . . .286
LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / viii

Editing Exterior Information for Multiple Images . . . . . .288
Editing Statistical and Status Information . . . . . . . . . .290
Measuring GCPs, Check Points, and Tie Points . . . . . . . . . . 297

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Point Measurement Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Image Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Defining the Usage of GCPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Importing Ground Coordinates Using the CellArray . . . .301
Exporting Ground Coordinates Using the CellArray . . . .302
Defining the Statistical Quality of GCPs . . . . . . . 303
Collecting Horizontal Reference GCPs .... ...... . . .304
Collecting Vertical Reference GCPs . ..... ...... . . .305
Collecting GCPs on Multiple Images . ..... ...... . . .306
Collecting GCPs on Multiple Strips . . ..... ...... . . .307
Automatic Tie Point Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Minimum Input Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Performing Automatic Tie Point Collection: An Alternative
Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Optimizing Automatic Tie Point Collection . . . . . . . . . . .314
Performing Automatic Tie Point Collection on Color Imagery
317
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Block Triangulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Aerial Triangulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Convergence Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Accuracy Estimates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Optimizing Aerial Triangulation Using Statistical In-
formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Assigning Statistical Weights to Image/Photo-coordinates .
323
Assigning Statistical Weights to GCPs . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Assigning Statistical Weights to Exterior Orientation . . .325
SCBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Fixed For All Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Same Weighted Corrections For All . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Different Weighted Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Same Unweighted Corrections For All . . . . . . . . . . 328
Different Unweighted Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Optimizing the SCBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Estimating AP for SCBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Automated Gross Error Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Understanding the Aerial Triangulation Report . . . . . . .334
Update Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Accept Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / ix

Aerial Triangulation Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Triangulation Report Unit Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Image Coordinates and Interior Orientation Results . . . 336
Aerial Triangulation Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Optimizing the Aerial Triangulation Results . . . . . . . . . 346
Graphically Analyzing Aerial Triangulation Results . . . . 347
Using LPS for Camera Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Calibration Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
No Calibration Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Locating k1 and k2 in the Triangulation Report . . . . . . 351
Using Lens Distortion Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Triangulation of SPOT, IRS-1C, and Generic Pushb-
room Imagery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Assigning Statistical Weights to GCPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Triangulation Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Triangulation Report Unit Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Automated Error Checking Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Iterative Triangulation Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Exterior Orientation Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
GCP Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Image Coordinate Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Optimizing the Triangulation Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Refinement Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Adjustment Report Unit Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Calculated Point Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Point Residuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Image Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Summary RMSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Orthorectification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Ortho Resampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
General Tab . . . . . ........ . ........ . . . . . . . . . 366
Adding Images . . . ........ . ........ . . . . . . . . . 366
Advanced Tab . . . ........ . ........ . . . . . . . . . 367
Ortho Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Batch Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Set Up/Start the Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Execute Multiple Files/Single Command . . . . . . .375
Other Batch Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / x

References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Works Cited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Photogrammetric Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Abbreviations and Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / xi

LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / xii
List of Figures
Figure 1: Topography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 2: Analog Stereo Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Figure 3: LPS Project Manager Point Measurement Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Figure 4: Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Figure 5: Exposure Stations Along a Flight Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 6: Exposure Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 7: A Regular Rectangular Block of Aerial Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 8: Overlapping Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 9: Pixel Coordinates vs. Image Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 10: Image Space and Ground Space Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 11: Terrestrial Photography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Figure 12: Internal Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 13: Pixel Coordinate System vs. Image Space Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 14: Radial vs. Tangential Lens Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 15: Elements of Exterior Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 16: Omega, Phi, and Kappa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 17: Primary Rotation Omega About the X-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 18: Secondary Rotation Phi about the Y Omega-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 19: Tertiary Rotation Kappa About the Z Omega Phi-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 20: Space Forward Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 21: Photogrammetric Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 22: Photogrammetric Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 23: GCP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 24: GCPs in a Block of Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 25: Tie Point Distribution for Triangulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 26: Tie Points in a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 27: Image Pyramid for Matching at Coarse to Full Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Figure 28: Perspective Centers of SPOT Scan Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 29: Image Coordinates in a Satellite Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 30: Interior Orientation of a SPOT Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 31: Inclination of a Satellite Stereo Scene (View from North to South) . . . . . . . 61
Figure 32: Nadir and Off-nadir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 33: Velocity Vector and Orientation Angle of a Single Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 34: Ideal Point Distribution Over a Satellite Scene for Triangulation . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 35: Orthorectification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 36: Digital Orthoimage - Finding Gray Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 37: Geometric Relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Figure 38: Reference Sketch and Detail View of Point ID 1002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 41: Reference Sketch and Detail View of Point ID 1005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Figure 45: Reference Image of col90p1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 48: Imported Orientation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Figure 49: Reference Images: xs_ortho.img and NAPP_2m-ortho.img . . . . . . . . . . . 169
LPS Project Manager / xiii

Figure 50: Location of Point ID 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Figure 59: Location of Point ID 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 60: Location of Point ID 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 61: A Block Containing a Strip of Imagery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Figure 62: A Block Containing Several Strips of Imagery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Figure 63: The Leica Photogrammetry Suite Project Manager Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Figure 64: LPS CellArray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Figure 65: Model Setup Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Figure 66: Projection, Spheroid, and Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Figure 67: The Projection Chooser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Figure 68: The Projection Chooser—Unique Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Figure 69: Block Property Setup Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Figure 70: Photogrammetric Information in Block Property Setup Dialog . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 71: Photographic Directions Used for Aerial and Terrestrial Imagery . . . . . . . . 256
Figure 72: Average Flying Height of an Aircraft Above Ground Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figure 73: Examples that Specify Average Flying Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Figure 74: Import Parameters for Exterior Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Figure 75: Import Options for Exterior Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 76: Preview the Contents of the Input ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Figure 77: The LPS Project Manager CellArray with Imported Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Figure 78: LPS Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Figure 79: Image File Name Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Figure 80: The LPS CellArray with Added Imagery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Figure 81: Compute Pyramid Layers Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Figure 82: Frame Editor Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Figure 83: LPS CellArray with Off-line Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Figure 84: Image File in the Image File Name Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 85: Camera Information Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Figure 86: Fiducials Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Figure 87: Radial Lens Distortion Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Figure 88: Interior Orientation Tab of the Frame Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Figure 89: Fiducial Marks within the Frame Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Figure 90: Fiducial Orientation of an Aerial Photograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Figure 91: Fiducial Orientation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Figure 92: Data Strip on a Photograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Figure 93: Set Resampling Method Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Figure 94: Data Scaling Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Figure 95: Contrast Adjust Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Figure 96: Interior Orientation Tab for Nonmetric Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Figure 97: Exterior Information Tab for the Frame Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Figure 98: Exterior Orientation Parameter Editor Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Figure 99: CellArray Formula Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 100: Frame Editor for Pushbroom Sensor Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 101: Sensor Information Dialog for Pushbroom Sensor Models . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Figure 102: Model Parameters Tab of the Sensor Information Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Figure 103: Frame Attributes Tab for Pushbroom Sensor Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
LPS Project Manager / xiv

Figure 104: Sensor Tab for IKONOS Sensor Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Figure 105: Chipping Tab for IKONOS Sensor Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Figure 106: Point Measurement Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Figure 107: Set Resampling Method Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Figure 108: Set Data Scaling Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Figure 109: Contrast Adjustment Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Figure 110: Set Band Combinations Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Figure 111: Viewing Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Figure 112: Formula Dialog of the LPS CellArray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Figure 113: GCP Reference Source Dialog from the Point Measurement Tool . . . . . . . 304
Figure 114: A Configuration of GCPs Located on Three Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Figure 115: A Configuration of GCPs Located on Six Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 116: Automatic Tie Point Generation Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Figure 117: GCP Configuration for Six Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 118: Location of the Perspective Center for Six Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Figure 119: Kappa as a Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Figure 120: General Tab of the Aerial Triangulation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Figure 121: Point Tab of the Aerial Triangulation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Figure 122: Exterior Tab of the Aerial Triangulation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Figure 123: Interior Tab of the Aerial Triangulation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Figure 124: Advanced Options Tab of the Aerial Triangulation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Figure 125: A GCP Configuration for a Large Block of Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Figure 126: Project Graphic Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Figure 127: General Tab of the Triangulation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Figure 128: Point Tab of the Triangulation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Figure 129: Advanced Options Tab of the Triangulation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Figure 130: Tie Points Contained within a GCP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Figure 131: Ortho Resampling Dialog—General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Figure 132: Add Single Output to Ortho Resampling CellArray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Figure 133: Add Multiple Outputs to Ortho Resampling CellArray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Figure 134: Ortho Resampling Dialog—Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Figure 135: Ortho Calibration Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
LPS Project Manager / xv

LPS Project Manager / xvi
List of Tables
Table 1: LPS Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

Table 2: LPS Project Manager Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Table 3: Scanning Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Table 4: GCP Map Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Table 5: GCP Pixel Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Table 6: LPS Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Table 7: Perspective Center Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Table 8: Photography Scale and Associated Data (Feet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Table 9: Photography Scale and Associated Data (Meters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
LPS Project Manager / xvii

LPS Project Manager / xviii
Preface
About This Manual The Leica Photogrammetry Suite Project Manager User’s Guide
contains theory that explains the photogrammetric applications of
the core module of Leica Photogrammetry Suite (LPS), LPS Project
Manager; tour guides that help you begin to use the program;
practical applications of the software; and appendices that give you
additional information.
This manual serves as a handy reference while using LPS Project
Manager. A comprehensive index is included so that you can easily
locate specific information as needed.
Example Data Data sets are provided with the LPS Project Manager and LPS
Automatic Terrain Extraction software so that your results match
those in the tour guides. This data is loaded, optionally, during the
software installation process into /examples/orthobase. The
example data sets are further divided by the example they pertain
to: /frame, /digital, /spot, and /laguna_beach.
Documentation This manual is part of a suite of on-line documentation that you

receive with ERDAS IMAGINE software. There are two basic types of
documents, digital hardcopy documents which are delivered as PDF
files suitable for printing or on-line viewing, and On-Line Help
Documentation, delivered as HTML files.
The PDF documents are found in <IMAGINE_HOME>\help\hardcopy.
Many of these documents are available from the Leica Geosystems
Start menu. The on-line help system is accessed by clicking on the
Help button in a dialog or by selecting an item from a Help menu.
Conventions Used In ERDAS IMAGINE, the names of menus, menu options, buttons,
and other components of the interface are shown in bold type. For
in This Book
example:
“In the Select Layer To Add dialog, select the Fit to Frame option.”
When asked to use the mouse, you are directed to click, double-click,
Shift-click, middle-click, right-click, hold, drag, etc.
• click — designates clicking with the left mouse button.
• double-click — designates clicking twice with the left mouse

button.
LPS Project Manager Conventions Used in This Book / xix

• Shift-click — designates holding the Shift key down on your
keyboard and simultaneously clicking with the left mouse button.
• middle-click — designates clicking with the middle mouse button.
• right-click — designates clicking with the right mouse button.
• hold — designates holding down the left (or right, as noted)

mouse button.
• drag — designates dragging the mouse while holding down the

left mouse button.
The following paragraphs are used throughout the ERDAS IMAGINE documentation:
These paragraphs contain strong warnings or important tips.
These paragraphs give you software-specific information.
These paragraphs provide information about Leica Geosystems

products.
These paragraphs lead you to other areas of this book or other

manuals for additional information.
NOTE: Notes give additional instruction.
Blue Box
These boxes contain supplemental technical information.
LPS Project Manager Conventions Used in This Book / xx

Introduction
LPS Project Manager /1

LPS Project Manager /2
Introduction to LPS Project Manager
Introduction Welcome to LPS Project Manager, which is the primary component of

LPS. Provided in one easy-to-use environment is a comprehensive
digital photogrammetry package that allows for the fast and accurate
triangulation and orthorectification of images collected from various
types of cameras and satellite sensors.
LPS Project Manager drastically reduces the cost and time associated
with triangulating and orthorectifying aerial photography, satellite
imagery, digital, and video camera imagery when collecting
geographic information. The product addresses issues and problems
related to:
• Collecting ground control points (GCPs) in the field or office.
• Measuring GCPs and tie points on multiple images.
• Performing quality control in order to verify the overall accuracy

of the final product.
• Accommodating photography and satellite imagery from various

camera and satellite sensor types, including standard aerial,
digital, video, amateur 35 mm cameras (including terrestrial and
oblique photography), and SPOT pushbroom sensors.
• Integrating data from airborne global positioning system (GPS)

and other photogrammetric sources.
• Using photography scanned from desktop scanners.
• Triangulating multiple images automatically.
• Extracting DTMs automatically from imagery.
Using LPS Project Due to the large geometric distortion associated with raw aerial
photography and satellite imagery, measurements made on data
Manager
sources that have not been rectified for the purpose of collecting
geographic information are not reliable. Generally, the geometric
distortion is caused by various systematic and nonsystematic errors
such as camera and sensor orientation, terrain relief, Earth
curvature, film and scanning distortion, and measurement errors
(Wolf 1983, Konecny and Lehmann 1984, Kraus 1984, Wang, Z.
1990, Jensen 1996).
LGGI Template Document Using LPS Project Manager / 3

To rectify image data, various geometric modeling methods such as
polynomial transformation, multisurface (radial basis) functions,
finite element analysis (rubber sheeting), and collinearity equations
can be applied (Yang 1997). While the choice of the proper modeling
method depends on data sources and data availability, the
collinearity equation based orthorectification produces the most
reliable solution for raw image data by incorporating the sensor or
camera orientation, relief displacement, and the Earth’s curvature in
its modeling process.
Orthorectification in LPS Project Manager generates planimetrically
true orthoimages in which the displacement of objects due to sensor
or camera orientation, terrain relief, and other errors associated with
image acquisition and processing has been removed. The
orthoimage has the geometric characteristics of a map and the
image qualities of a photograph. The objects on an orthoimage are
in their true orthographic positions. Therefore, orthoimages are
geometrically equivalent to conventional line and symbol planimetric
maps. Any measurement taken on an orthoimage reflects a
measurement taken on the ground.
Orthoimages serve as the ideal information building blocks for
collecting geographic information required for a geographic
information system (GIS). They can be used as reference image
backdrops to maintain or update an existing GIS. Using the IMAGINE
Vector™ module, ground features can be collected and subsequently
attributed to reflect the spatial and nonspatial characteristics
associated with a feature. Using ERDAS IMAGINE, multiple
orthoimages can be mosaicked to form seamless orthoimage base
maps.
LPS Project Manager uses the self-calibrating bundle block
adjustment method in its triangulation process. By doing so, the
internal geometry of each image and the relationships between
overlapping images are determined. When multiple images are
involved in a data block, such a modeling method can significantly
ease the need of acquiring many GCPs.
Image tie points are the common points in overlapping areas of two
or more images. They connect the images in the block to each other
and are necessary input for the triangulation. LPS Project Manager
automates the identification and measurement of tie points so that
your work and time for manual measurement are drastically
reduced.
In addition to orthoimages, digital elevation models (DEMs) and
topographic features are two other major geographic information
components of a GIS. In order to extract a DEM and topographic
features from imagery, the image orientations need to be known.
The triangulation results of LPS Project Manager determine the
image position and orientations required for the purpose of DEM
extraction and stereo feature collection.
LGGI Template Document Using LPS Project Manager / 4

LPS Project First, LPS Project Manager allows you to easily model various camera
and sensor types, referred to as sensor modeling. LPS Project
Manager
Manager’s sensor modeling capabilities establish the internal
Functionality characteristics (that is, geometry) associated with a specific camera
or sensor, and correct for systematic error.
Second, LPS Project Manager allows you to model the position and
orientation of a camera or sensor at the time of data collection, which
dramatically improves the accuracy of the resulting orthoimages.
Third, LPS Project Manager automatically measures the image
positions of ground feature points appearing on multiple images,
which is referred to as automatic tie point collection. Once the image
positions of the tie points are established, the corresponding ground
coordinates can be determined using aerial triangulation techniques.
(If many tie points were automatically collected, a rough DEM can be
interpolated using the tie points as mass points.)
Fourth, LPS Project Manager gives you the flexibility to orthorectify
images from a variety of camera and satellite sensor types.
Additionally, it allows you to process multiple orthos sequentially.
Triangulation Triangulation, or block triangulation, is the process of establishing a

mathematical relationship between the images contained in a
project, the camera or sensor model, and the ground. The
information resulting from triangulation is required as input for the
orthorectification process.
Classical aerial triangulation using optical-mechanical analog and
analytical stereo plotters was primarily used for collection of ground
points using the control point extension technique. This involved the
manual measurement of tie points for the subsequent determination
of their corresponding ground coordinates. These points were then
identified as being GCPs for other applications. With the advent of
digital photogrammetry, classical aerial triangulation has been
extended to provide greater functionality.
LPS Project Manager uses a technique known as bundle block
adjustment for aerial triangulation. Bundle block adjustment
provides three primary functions:
• The ability to determine the position and orientation of each

image in a project as they existed at the time of photographic or
image exposure. The resulting parameters are referred to as
exterior orientation parameters.
• The ability to determine the ground coordinates of any tie points

measured on the overlap areas of multiple images. The highly
precise ground point determination of tie points is useful for
generating GCPs from imagery in lieu of ground surveying
techniques.
LGGI Template Document LPS Project Manager Functionality / 5

• The ability to distribute and minimize the errors associated with
the imagery, image measurements, GCPs, and so forth. The
bundle block adjustment processes information from an entire
block of imagery in one simultaneous solution (that is, a bundle)
using statistical techniques to automatically identify, distribute,
and remove error.
Tour Guide The following tour guide examples are used to highlight the unique
capabilities available within LPS Project Manager. Each example
Examples provides a representative workflow of a real-world scenario that may
be encountered for jobs associated with triangulation and
orthorectification. Of particular significance is the ability of LPS
Project Manager to accommodate data from various sources
including different types of cameras and satellite sensors, airborne
GPS, and various reference sources for collecting GCPs. Each tour
guide example exemplifies the data flexibility provided by LPS
Project Manager.
Frame Camera Tour Guide This example involves performing aerial triangulation and
orthorectification on three overlapping aerial photographs that have
a photo scale of 1:40000. A calibration report is provided that
defines the internal geometry of the camera as it existed when the
photographs were captured.
Several GCPs are measured on the overlapping images in order to
better establish the relationship between the images, the camera,
and the ground. Once the GCPs have been measured, automatic tie
point collection tools are used to measure the corresponding image
positions of tie points on overlapping images.
Additionally, a United States Geological Survey (USGS) DEM is
provided to account for the effect of topographic relief during the
orthorectification process. Orthorectification is performed for each
image sequentially.
See the tour guide “Frame Camera Tour Guide”
Digital Camera Tour This example involves performing aerial triangulation and
Guide orthorectification on three overlapping digital camera images that
have an image scale of 1:45000. The images were taken using a
Kodak DCS 420 digital camera. The ground resolution of the imagery
is approximately 0.40 meters. The only camera calibration
information provided is the focal length and the pixel size of the
Charge Coupled Device (CCD).
LGGI Template Document Tour Guide Examples / 6

Airborne GPS and inertial navigation system (INS) data is available
for each image. This information defines the position and orientation
associated with each image as they existed during capture. This
information can be referred to as exterior orientation. For this
reason, GCPs are not required for this data set. In scenarios where
exterior orientation is available, GCPs are not required. Additionally,
since digital camera imagery does not have fiducial marks, the
interior orientation is done automatically.
Automatic tie point collection tools are used to measure the
corresponding image positions of tie points on overlapping images.
Aerial triangulation is performed to adjust the exterior orientation
parameters and determine the XYZ coordinates of the tie points. If
so desired, the tie points can be converted to GCPs. This is referred
to as control point extension. Lastly, orthorectification is performed
for each image sequentially using a constant elevation value.
See the tour guide “Digital Camera Tour Guide”.
SPOT Pushbroom Sensor This example involves performing triangulation and

Tour Guide orthorectification on two overlapping SPOT panchromatic images.
The images are captured using a pushbroom sensor. The ground
resolution of the images is 10 meters. LPS Project Manager
automatically uses the ephemeris information associated with the
image to define the geometry of the sensor as it existed when the
imagery was captured.
Using an existing SPOT XS orthorectified image (20-meter
resolution), a 2-meter orthophoto, and a DEM, GCPs are measured.
The SPOT ortho and aerial orthophoto are used for the collection of
horizontal GCPs. A DEM is used for the vertical component (Z) of a
GCP. This is done automatically once the horizontal components of
the GCPs have been measured.
Automatic tie point collection tools are used to measure the
corresponding image positions of tie points on overlapping images.
Triangulation is performed to define the position and orientation of
the sensor as they existed when the imagery was captured, and to
determine the XYZ coordinates of the tie points. Using a DEM, the
two SPOT images are sequentially orthorectified.
See the tour guide “SPOT Pushbroom Sensor Tour Guide”.
Appendix An appendix is provided to detail the batch process.

Example
LGGI Template Document Appendix Example / 7

Batch Processing This appendix explains how you can set up your system for Batch
processing. You can then set parameters for multiple output DTMs
and load them into the Batch Wizard for execution at a later time.
The Batch Wizard works in conjunction with the Microsoft Scheduler,
which is located in the Services category of the Control Panel.
See “Batch Processing” for more information.
About LPS Project Before you begin working with LPS Project Manager, it may be
helpful to go over some of the icons and menu options located on the
Manager
interface. You use these menus and icons throughout the tour
guides.
Menu Bar The menu bar across the top of the main Leica Photogrammetry
Suite dialog has the following options, most of which are associated
with LPS Project Manager and LPS Automatic Terrain Extraction:
Table 1: LPS Menu Bar
File Edit Process Help
New... Add Frame... Automatic Tie Point Help for Leica

Generation Photogrammetry
Open... Frame Editor... Suite...
Triangulate
Save Compute Pyramid Layers... Help for LPS Project
Block Triangulation Manager...
Save As... Update Pyramid Layer Status
Triangulation Report... About Leica
Configure SOCET Delete Selected Image(s) Photogrammetry
SET Access... Project Graphic Status... Suite...
Point Measurement...
Import SOCET SET DTM Extraction...
Project... Block Properties...
DTM Extraction Report...
Export To SOCET Auto. Tie Point Generation
SET Project... Properties... Interactive Terrain
Editing...
Register SOCET SET Triangulation Properties...
Project(s)... Ortho Rectification
DTM Extraction Properties...
Close Resampling...
<Recent Files> Calibration...
Exit Mosaic...
Feature Collection
Stereo Analyst for

IMAGINE
Stereo Analyst for

ArcGIS
PRO600 for LPS
LGGI Template Document About LPS Project Manager / 8

Toolbar The following icons are located in the Leica Photogrammetry Suite
dialog toolbar:
Table 2: LPS Project Manager Toolbar
New Block File Click to start creating a new block file. A File
Selector opens.
Open Existing Click to open a block file that already exists. A

Block File File Selector dialog opens.
Save Block Click to save any changes you have made to the
Information block file.
Add Frame Click to add a new image to the project file. A

File Selector dialog opens.
Frame Editor Click to specify interior orientation, exterior

orientation, and fiducial coordinates for each
image in the Frame Editor dialog.
Point Measurement Click to measure check and GCPs in your block

images. Views, a tool palette, and two
CellArrays™ open within a single dialog.
Click to run automatic tie point generation,

Auto Tie which includes the following tasks: block
configuration, tie point extraction, point
transfer, gross error detection, and tie point
selection.
Click to perform triangulation on your block

images, which estimates the position of each
Triangulation image in a block at the time of image capture,
the coordinates of tie points, the interior
orientation parameters, and additional
parameters.
This icon starts the LPS Automatic Terrain

Extraction application. Click to extract a single
DTM or multiple DTMs from images in the block
file. You can choose from the following types of
output DTMs: DEM, ASCII, TerraModel TIN, 3D
Shape file, or SOCET SET TIN.
DTM Extraction
For more information, please refer to the Leica
Photogrammetry Suite Automatic Terrain
Extraction User’s Guide.
NOTE: You must have a licensed version of

SOCET SET on your system to generate
SOCET SET TIN files.
LGGI Template Document About LPS Project Manager / 9

Table 2: LPS Project Manager Toolbar (Continued)
DTM Editing This icon starts the Terrain Editor application.

Click to edit the elevation of various kinds of
DTMs including: DEMs and TINs.
Click to resample your triangulated images and

Ortho Resampling create orthoimages, which are planimetrically
true images that represent ground objects in
their real world X and Y positions.
This icon starts the Mosaic Tool application.

Ortho Mosaicking Click to join orthophotos or DTMs using the
Mosaic Tool. For more information, see the
Mosaic Tour Guide in ERDAS IMAGINE Tour
Guides and the On-Line Help.
This icon starts the feature collection application

of your choice: Stereo Analyst for IMAGINE,
Stereo Analyst for ArcGIS, or PRO600. You must
have licenses to run these applications. Click to
Feature Collection collect features from the orthoimages you
create in LPS.
For more information, see the Stereo Analyst for

IMAGINE User’s Guide and On-Line Help, Using
Stereo Analyst for ArcGIS, or the PRO600 user’s
guide.
Keyboard Shortcuts You can access some LPS Project Manager and LPS Automatic
Terrain Extraction options using the keyboard.
• Display the File menu by typing Alt-f.
• Display the Edit menu by typing Alt-e.
• Display the Process menu by typing Alt-p.
• Display the Help menu by typing Alt-h.
Next In the next section of this document, you can learn about
photogrammetric theory.
LGGI Template Document Next / 10

Photogrammetric Theory
LPS Project Manager / 11

Introduction to Photogrammetry
Introduction
What is Photogrammetry is the “art, science and technology of obtaining
Photogrammetry? reliable information about physical objects and the environment
through the process of recording, measuring and interpreting
photographic images and patterns of electromagnetic radiant
imagery and other phenomena” (American Society of
Photogrammetry 1980).
Photogrammetry was invented in 1851 by Colonel Aimé Laussedat,
and has continued to develop over the last 150 years. Over time, the
development of photogrammetry has passed through the phases of
plane table photogrammetry, analog photogrammetry, analytical
photogrammetry, and has now entered the phase of digital
photogrammetry (Konecny 1994).
The traditional, and largest, application of photogrammetry is to
extract topographic information (e.g., terrain models) from aerial
images. Figure 1 illustrates rugged topography. Photogrammetric
techniques have also been applied to process satellite images and
close-range images in order to acquire topographic or
nontopographic information of photographed objects. Topographic
information includes spot height information, contour lines, and
elevation data. Planimetric information includes the geographic
location of buildings, roads, rivers, and so forth.
Figure 1: Topography
Prior to the invention of the airplane, photographs taken on the

ground were used to extract the relationships between objects using
geometric principles. This was during the phase of plane table
photogrammetry.
LPS Project Manager Introduction / 13

In analog photogrammetry, starting with stereo measurement in
1901, optical or mechanical instruments were used to reconstruct
three-dimensional geometry from two overlapping photographs.
Figure 2 depicts a typical analog stereo plotter. The main product
during this phase was topographic maps.
Figure 2: Analog Stereo Plotter
In analytical photogrammetry, the computer replaced some

expensive optical and mechanical components. The resulting devices
were analog/digital hybrids. Analytical aerotriangulation, analytical
plotters, and orthophoto projectors were the main developments
during this phase. Outputs of analytical photogrammetry can be
topographic maps, but also can be digital products, such as digital
maps and DEMs.
Digital photogrammetry is photogrammetry applied to digital images
that are stored and processed on a computer. Digital images can be
scanned from photographs or directly captured by digital cameras.
Many photogrammetric tasks can be highly automated in digital
photogrammetry (e.g., automatic DEM extraction and digital
orthophoto generation). Digital photogrammetry is sometimes called
softcopy photogrammetry. The output products are in digital form,
such as digital maps, DEMs, and digital orthoimages saved on
computer storage media. Therefore, they can be easily stored and
managed by you. With the development of digital photogrammetry,
photogrammetric techniques are more closely integrated into
remote sensing and GIS.
Digital photogrammetric systems employ sophisticated software to
automate the tasks associated with conventional photogrammetry,
thereby minimizing the extent of manual interaction required to
perform photogrammetric operations. LPS Project Manager (Figure
3), which is part of the Leica Photogrammetry Suite, is such a
photogrammetric system.

Figure 3: LPS Project Manager Point Measurement Interface
Photogrammetry can be used to measure and interpret information

from hardcopy photographs or images. Sometimes the process of
measuring information from photography and satellite imagery is
considered metric photogrammetry, such as creating DEMs.
Interpreting information from photography and imagery is
considered interpretative photogrammetry, such as identifying and
discriminating between various tree types (Wolf 1983).
Types of Photographs and The types of photographs and images that can be processed with LPS
Images Project Manager include aerial, terrestrial, close-range, and oblique.
Aerial or vertical (near vertical) photographs and images are taken
from a high vantage point above the Earth’s surface. In those
photographs, the camera axis is commonly directed vertically (or
near vertically) down. Aerial photographs and images are commonly
used for topographic and planimetric mapping projects, and are
commonly captured from an aircraft or satellite. Figure 4 illustrates
a satellite. Satellites use onboard sensors to collect high resolution
images of the Earth’s surface.

Figure 4: Satellite
Terrestrial or ground-based photographs and images are taken with

the camera stationed on or close to the Earth’s surface. Terrestrial
and close-range photographs and images are commonly used for
applications involved with archeology, geomorphology, civil
engineering, architecture, and industry.
Oblique photographs and images are similar to aerial photographs
and images, except the camera axis is intentionally inclined at an
angle with the vertical. Oblique photographs and images are
commonly used for reconnaissance and corridor mapping
applications.
Digital photogrammetric systems use digitized photographs or digital
images as the primary source of input. Digital imagery can be
obtained in various ways, including:
• digitizing existing hardcopy photographs
• using digital cameras to record imagery
• using sensors onboard satellites such as Landsat, SPOT, and IRS

to record imagery
NOTE: This document uses the term imagery in reference to

photography and imagery obtained from various sources. This
includes aerial and terrestrial photography, digital and video camera
imagery, 35 mm photography, medium to large format photography,
scanned photography, and satellite imagery.
Why use Raw aerial photography and satellite imagery have large geometric
Photogrammetry? distortion that is caused by various systematic and nonsystematic
factors. The photogrammetric modeling based on collinearity
equations eliminates these errors most efficiently, and creates the
most reliable orthoimages from raw imagery. Photogrammetry is
unique in terms of considering the image-forming geometry, utilizing
information between overlapping images, and explicitly dealing with
the third dimension: elevation.

See “The Collinearity Equation” for information about the
collinearity equation.
In addition to orthoimages, photogrammetry can also reliably and

efficiently provide other geographic information such as a DEM,
topographic features, and line maps. In essence, photogrammetry
produces accurate and precise geographic information from a wide
range of photographs and images. Any measurement taken on a
photogrammetrically processed photograph or image reflects a
measurement taken on the ground. Rather than constantly go to the
field to measure distances, areas, angles, and point positions on the
Earth’s surface, photogrammetric tools allow for the accurate
collection of information from imagery. Photogrammetric
approaches for collecting geographic information save time and
money, and maintain the highest accuracy.
Photogrammetry vs. Conventional techniques of geometric correction such as polynomial

Conventional Geometric transformation are based on general functions not directly related to
Correction the specific distortion or error sources. They have been successful in
the field of remote sensing and GIS applications, especially when
dealing with low resolution and narrow field of view satellite imagery
such as Landsat and SPOT data (Yang 1997). General functions have
the advantage of simplicity. They can provide a reasonable
geometric modeling alternative when little is known about the
geometric nature of the image data.
Because conventional techniques generally process the images one
at a time, they cannot provide an integrated solution for multiple
images or photographs simultaneously and efficiently. It is very
difficult, if not impossible, for conventional techniques to achieve a
reasonable accuracy without a great number of GCPs when dealing
with large-scale imagery, images having severe systematic and/or
nonsystematic errors, and images covering rough terrain.
Misalignment is more likely to occur when mosaicking separately
rectified images. This misalignment could result in inaccurate
geographic information being collected from the rectified images.
Furthermore, it is impossible for a conventional technique to create
a 3D stereo model or to extract the elevation information from two
overlapping images. There is no way for conventional techniques to
accurately derive geometric information about the sensor that
captured the imagery.
The photogrammetric techniques applied in LPS Project Manager
overcome all the problems of conventional geometric correction by
using least squares bundle block adjustment. This solution is
integrated and accurate.
For more information, see “Bundle Block Adjustment”.

LPS Project Manager can process hundreds of images or photographs
with very few GCPs, while at the same time eliminating the
misalignment problem associated with creating image mosaics. In
short: less time, less money, less manual effort, and more
geographic fidelity can be obtained using the photogrammetric
solution.
Single Frame
Orthorectification vs.
Block Triangulation
Single Frame Orthorectification

Single frame orthorectification techniques orthorectify one image at
a time using a technique known as space resection. In this respect,
a minimum of three GCPs is required for each image. For example,
in order to orthorectify 50 aerial photographs, a minimum of 150
GCPs is required. This includes manually identifying and measuring
each GCP for each image individually. Once the GCPs are measured,
space resection techniques compute the camera/sensor position and
orientation as it existed at the time of data capture. This information,
along with a DEM, is used to account for the negative impacts
associated with geometric errors. Additional variables associated
with systematic error are not considered.
Single frame orthorectification techniques do not use the internal
relationship between adjacent images in a block to minimize and
distribute the errors commonly associated with GCPs, image
measurements, DEMs, and camera/sensor information. Therefore,
during the mosaic procedure, misalignment between adjacent
images is common since error has not been minimized and
distributed throughout the block.
Block Triangulation
Block (or aerial) triangulation is the process of establishing a
mathematical relationship between the images contained in a
project, the camera or sensor model, and the ground. The
information resulting from aerial triangulation is required as input for
the orthorectification, DEM creation, and stereopair creation
processes. The term aerial triangulation is commonly used when
processing aerial photography and imagery. The term block
triangulation, or simply triangulation, is used when processing
satellite imagery. The techniques differ slightly as a function of the
type of imagery being processed.

Classic aerial triangulation using optical-mechanical analog and
analytical stereo plotters is primarily used for the collection of GCPs
using a technique known as control point extension. Since collecting
GCPs is time consuming, photogrammetric techniques are accepted
as the ideal approach for collecting GCPs over large areas using
photography rather than conventional ground surveying techniques.
Control point extension involves the manual photo measurement of
ground points appearing on overlapping images. These ground
points are commonly referred to as tie points. Once the points are
measured, the ground coordinates associated with the tie points can
be determined using photogrammetric techniques employed by
analog or analytical stereo plotters. These points are then referred
to as ground control points (GCPs).
With the advent of digital photogrammetry, classic aerial
triangulation has been extended to provide greater functionality. LPS
Project Manager uses a mathematical technique known as bundle
block adjustment for aerial triangulation. Bundle block adjustment
provides three primary functions:
• Bundle block adjustment determines the position and orientation

for each image in a project as they existed at the time of
photographic or image exposure. The resulting parameters are
referred to as exterior orientation parameters. In order to
estimate the exterior orientation parameters, a minimum of
three GCPs is required for the entire block, regardless of how
many images are contained within the project.
• Bundle block adjustment determines the ground coordinates of

any tie points manually or automatically measured on the
overlap areas of multiple images. The highly precise ground point
determination of tie points is useful for generating control points
from imagery in lieu of ground surveying techniques.
Additionally, if a large number of ground points is generated,
then a DEM can be interpolated using the 3D surfacing tool in
ERDAS IMAGINE.
• Bundle block adjustment minimizes and distributes the errors

associated with the imagery, image measurements, GCPs, and so
forth. The bundle block adjustment processes information from
an entire block of imagery in one simultaneous solution (i.e., a
bundle) using statistical techniques (i.e., adjustment
component) to automatically identify, distribute, and remove
error.
Because the images are processed in one step, the misalignment

issues associated with creating mosaics are resolved.

Image and Data During photographic or image collection, overlapping images are
exposed along a direction of flight. Most photogrammetric
Acquisition
applications involve the use of overlapping images. By using more
than one image, the geometry associated with the camera/sensor,
image, and ground can be defined to greater accuracies and
precision.
During the collection of imagery, each point in the flight path at
which the camera exposes the film, or the sensor captures the
imagery, is called an exposure station (see Figure 5 and Figure 6).
Figure 5: Exposure Stations Along a Flight Path
Flight path
Flight Line 3 of airplane
Flight Line 2
Flight Line 1
Exposure station
Figure 6: Exposure Station
The photographic
exposure station
is located where
the image is
exposed
(i.e., the lens)
LPS Project Manager Image and Data Acquisition / 20

Each photograph or image that is exposed has a corresponding
image scale (SI) associated with it. The SI expresses the average
ratio between a distance in the image and the same distance on the
ground. It is computed as focal length divided by the flying height
above the mean ground elevation. For example, with a flying height
of 1000 m and a focal length of 15 cm, the SI would be 1:6667.
NOTE: The flying height above ground is used to determine SI,

versus the altitude above sea level.
A strip of photographs consists of images captured along a flight line,

normally with an overlap of 60%. All photos in the strip are assumed
to be taken at approximately the same flying height and with a
constant distance between exposure stations. Camera tilt relative to
the vertical is assumed to be minimal.
The photographs from several flight paths can be combined to form
a block of photographs. A block of photographs consists of a number
of parallel strips, normally with a sidelap of 20-30%. Block
triangulation techniques are used to transform all of the images in a
block and their associated ground points into a homologous
coordinate system.
A regular block of photos is commonly a rectangular block in which
the number of photos in each strip is the same. Figure 7 shows a
block of 4 × 2 photographs. Figure 8 illustrates two overlapping
images.
Figure 7: A Regular Rectangular Block of Aerial Photos

60% overlap
Strip 2
20-30%
sidelap
Flying
direction
Strip 1

Figure 8: Overlapping Images
{
Area of
overlap
}
Photogrammetric Photogrammetric scanners are special devices capable of producing
Scanners high image quality and excellent positional accuracy. Use of this type
of scanner results in geometric accuracies similar to traditional
analog and analytical photogrammetric instruments. These scanners
are necessary for digital photogrammetric applications that have
high accuracy requirements.
Photogrammetric scanners usually scan only film because film is
superior to paper, both in terms of image detail and geometry. These
scanners usually have a Root Mean Square Error (RMSE) positional
accuracy of 4 microns or less, and are capable of scanning at a
maximum resolution of 5 to 10 microns (5 microns is equivalent to
approximately 5,000 pixels per inch).
The required pixel resolution varies depending on the application.
Aerial triangulation and feature collection applications often scan in
the 10- to 15-micron range. Orthophoto applications often use 15-
to 30-micron pixels. Color film is less sharp than panchromatic;
therefore, color ortho applications often use 20- to 40-micron pixels.
The optimum scanning resolution also depends on the desired
photogrammetric output accuracy. Scanning at higher resolutions
provides data with higher accuracy.
Desktop Scanners Desktop scanners are general-purpose devices. They lack the image
detail and geometric accuracy of photogrammetric quality units, but
they are much less expensive. When using a desktop scanner, you
should make sure that the active area is at least 9 × 9 inches, which
enables you to capture the entire photo frame.
Desktop scanners are appropriate for less rigorous uses, such as
digital photogrammetry in support of GIS or remote sensing
applications. Calibrating these units improves geometric accuracy,
but the results are still inferior to photogrammetric units. The image
correlation techniques that are necessary for automatic tie point
collection and elevation extraction are often sensitive to scan quality.
Therefore, errors attributable to scanning errors can be introduced
into GIS data that is photogrammetrically derived.

Scanning Resolutions One of the primary factors contributing to the overall accuracy of
block triangulation and orthorectification is the resolution of the
imagery being used. Image resolution is commonly determined by
the scanning resolution (if film photography is being used), or by the
pixel resolution of the sensor.
In order to optimize the attainable accuracy of a solution, the
scanning resolution must be considered. The appropriate scanning
resolution is determined by balancing the accuracy requirements
versus the size of the mapping project and the time required to
process the project.
Table 3 lists the scanning resolutions associated with various scales
of photography and image file size.

Table 3: Scanning Resolutions
12 microns 16 microns 25 microns 50 microns 85 microns

(2117 dpi) (1588 dpi) (1016 dpi) (508 dpi) (300 dpi)
Photo Scale
1 to Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground
Coverage Coverage Coverage Coverage Coverage
(meters) (meters) (meters) (meters) (meters)
1800 0.0216 0.0288 0.045 0.09 0.153
2400 0.0288 0.0384 0.060 0.12 0.204
3000 0.0360 0.0480 0.075 0.15 0.255
3600 0.0432 0.0576 0.090 0.18 0.306
4200 0.0504 0.0672 0.105 0.21 0.357
4800 0.0576 0.0768 0.120 0.24 0.408
5400 0.0648 0.0864 0.135 0.27 0.459
6000 0.0720 0.0960 0.150 0.30 0.510
6600 0.0792 0.1056 0.165 0.33 0.561
7200 0.0864 0.1152 0.180 0.36 0.612
7800 0.0936 0.1248 0.195 0.39 0.663
8400 0.1008 0.1344 0.210 0.42 0.714
9000 0.1080 0.1440 0.225 0.45 0.765
9600 0.1152 0.1536 0.240 0.48 0.816
10800 0.1296 0.1728 0.270 0.54 0.918
12000 0.1440 0.1920 0.300 0.60 1.020
15000 0.1800 0.2400 0.375 0.75 1.275
18000 0.2160 0.2880 0.450 0.90 1.530
24000 0.2880 0.3840 0.600 1.20 2.040
30000 0.3600 0.4800 0.750 1.50 2.550
40000 0.4800 0.6400 1.000 2.00 3.400
50000 0.6000 0.8000 1.250 2.50 4.250
60000 0.7200 0.9600 1.500 3.00 5.100
B/W File Size 363 204 84 21 7
(MB)
Color File Size 1089 612 252 63 21
(MB)
The Ground Coverage column refers to the ground coverage per

pixel. Thus, a 1:40,000 scale black and white photograph scanned at
25 microns (1016 dpi) has a ground coverage per pixel of 1 m × 1 m.
The resulting file size is approximately 85 MB, assuming a square 9
× 9 inch photograph.

Coordinate Systems Conceptually, photogrammetry involves establishing the relationship
between the camera or sensor used to capture the imagery, the
imagery itself, and the ground. In order to understand and define
this relationship, each of the three variables associated with the
relationship must be defined with respect to a coordinate space and
coordinate system.
Pixel Coordinate System

The file coordinates of a digital image are defined in a pixel
coordinate system. A pixel coordinate system is usually a coordinate
system with its origin in the upper-left corner of the image, the x-
axis pointing to the right, the y-axis pointing downward, and the
units in pixels, as shown by axes c and r in Figure 9. These file
coordinates (c, r) can also be thought of as the pixel column and row
number, respectively.
Figure 9: Pixel Coordinates vs. Image Coordinates

y
origin of pixel
coordinate
system
origin of image
coordinate
system
Image Coordinate System

An image coordinate system or an image plane coordinate system is
usually defined as a two-dimensional (2D) coordinate system
occurring on the image plane with its origin at the image center. The
origin of the image coordinate system is also referred to as the
principal point. On aerial photographs, the principal point is defined
as the intersection of opposite fiducial marks as illustrated by axes x
and y in Figure 9. Image coordinates are used to describe positions
on the film plane. Image coordinate units are usually millimeters or
microns.

Image Space Coordinate System
An image space coordinate system is identical to an image
coordinate system, except that it adds a third axis (z) to indicate
elevation. The origin of the image space coordinate system is defined
at the perspective center S as shown in Figure 10. The perspective
center is commonly the lens of the camera as it existed when the
photograph was captured. Its x-axis and y-axis are parallel to the x-
axis and y-axis in the image plane coordinate system. The z-axis is
the optical axis, therefore the z value of an image point in the image
space coordinate system is usually equal to -f (the focal length of the
camera). Image space coordinates are used to describe positions
inside the camera and usually use units in millimeters or microns.
This coordinate system is referenced as image space coordinates (x,
y, z) in this chapter.
Figure 10: Image Space and Ground Space Coordinate System

z
Image
y coordinate
system
S x
Z
Height
A
Y
Ground
coordinate
system X
Ground Coordinate System

A ground coordinate system is usually defined as a 3D coordinate
system that utilizes a known geographic map projection. Ground
coordinates (X,Y,Z) are usually expressed in feet or meters. The Z
value is elevation above mean sea level for a given vertical datum.
This coordinate system is referenced as ground coordinates (X,Y,Z)
in this chapter.

Geocentric and Topocentric Coordinate System
Most photogrammetric applications account for the Earth’s curvature
in their calculations. This is done by adding a correction value or by
computing geometry in a coordinate system that includes curvature.
Two such systems are geocentric and topocentric.
A geocentric coordinate system has its origin at the center of the
Earth ellipsoid. The Z-axis equals the rotational axis of the Earth, and
the X-axis passes through the Greenwich meridian. The Y-axis is
perpendicular to both the Z-axis and X-axis, so as to create a three-
dimensional coordinate system that follows the right hand rule.
A topocentric coordinate system has its origin at the center of the
image projected on the Earth ellipsoid. The three perpendicular
coordinate axes are defined on a tangential plane at this center
point. The plane is called the reference plane or the local datum. The
x-axis is oriented eastward, the y-axis northward, and the z-axis is
vertical to the reference plane (up).
For simplicity of presentation, the remainder of this chapter does not
explicitly reference geocentric or topocentric coordinates. Basic
photogrammetric principles can be presented without adding this
additional level of complexity.
Terrestrial Photography Photogrammetric applications associated with terrestrial or ground-

based images utilize slightly different image and ground space
coordinate systems. Figure 11 illustrates the two coordinate systems
associated with image space and ground space.
Figure 11: Terrestrial Photography

YG
ϕ Ground Point A
Ground space
ZA
ω
XG
YA
κ
XA
ZG
xa’ a’
ya’
Image space x
Z z
ZL
ϕ' Y Perspective Center
XL
κ'
YL
X
ω’

The image and ground space coordinate systems are right-handed
coordinate systems. Most terrestrial applications use a ground space
coordinate system that was defined using a localized Cartesian
coordinate system.
The image space coordinate system directs the z-axis toward the
imaged object and the y-axis directed north up. The image x-axis is
similar to that used in aerial applications. The XL, YL, and ZL
coordinates define the position of the perspective center as it existed
at the time of image capture. The ground coordinates of Ground
Point A (XA, YA, and ZA) are defined within the ground space
coordinate system (XG, YG, and ZG).
With this definition, the rotation angles ω (Omega), ϕ (Phi), and κ
(Kappa) are still defined as in the aerial photography conventions. In
LPS Project Manager, you can also use the ground (X, Y, Z)
coordinate system to directly define GCPs. Thus, GCPs do not need
to be transformed. Then the definition of rotation angles ω', ϕ', and κ'
is different, as shown in Figure 11.
Interior Interior orientation defines the internal geometry of a camera or

sensor as it existed at the time of image capture. The variables
Orientation
associated with image space are defined during the process of
defining interior orientation. Interior orientation is primarily used to
transform the image pixel coordinate system or other image
coordinate measurement system to the image space coordinate
system.
Figure 12 illustrates the variables associated with the internal
geometry of an image captured from an aerial camera, where o
represents the principal point and a represents an image point.
Figure 12: Internal Geometry

Perspective Center
Focal Length
Fiducial
Marks
yo
ya’
Image plane xo o
xa’ a
The internal geometry of a camera is defined by specifying the

following variables:
LPS Project Manager Interior Orientation / 28

• principal point
• focal length
• fiducial marks
• lens distortion
Principal Point and Focal The principal point is mathematically defined as the intersection of
Length the perpendicular line through the perspective center of the image
plane. The length from the principal point to the perspective center
is called the focal length (Wang, Z. 1990).
The image plane is commonly referred to as the focal plane. For
wide-angle aerial cameras, the focal length is approximately 152
mm, or 6 in. For some digital cameras, the focal length is 28 mm.
Prior to conducting photogrammetric projects, the focal length of a
metric camera is accurately determined or calibrated in a laboratory
environment.
This mathematical definition is the basis of triangulation, but difficult
to determine optically. The optical definition of principal point is the
image position where the optical axis intersects the image plane. In
the laboratory, this is calibrated in two forms: principal point of
autocollimation and principal point of symmetry, which can be seen
from the camera calibration report. Most applications prefer to use
the principal point of symmetry since it can best compensate for any
lens distortion.
Fiducial Marks One of the steps associated with calculating interior orientation
involves determining the image position of the principal point for
each image in the project. Therefore, the image positions of the
fiducial marks are measured on the image, and then compared to the
calibrated coordinates of each fiducial mark.
Since the image space coordinate system has not yet been defined
for each image, the measured image coordinates of the fiducial
marks are referenced to a pixel or file coordinate system. The pixel
coordinate system has an x coordinate (column) and a y coordinate
(row). The origin of the pixel coordinate system is the upper left
corner of the image having a row and column value of 0 and 0,
respectively. Figure 13 illustrates the difference between the pixel
and image space coordinate system.

Figure 13: Pixel Coordinate System vs. Image Space
Coordinate System
Ya-file Yo-file
xa Θ
a
Xa-file
Xo-file ya
fiducial mark
Using a 2D affine transformation, the relationship between the pixel

coordinate system and the image space coordinate system is
defined. The following 2D affine transformation equations can be
used to determine the coefficients required to transform pixel
coordinate measurements to the corresponding image coordinate
values:
x = a1 + a2 X + a3 Y
y = b1 + b2 X + b3 Y
The x and y image coordinates associated with the calibrated fiducial

marks and the X and Y pixel coordinates of the measured fiducial
marks are used to determine six affine transformation coefficients.
The resulting six coefficients can then be used to transform each set
of row (y) and column (x) pixel coordinates to image coordinates.
The quality of the 2D affine transformation is represented using a
root mean square (RMS) error. The RMS error represents the degree
of correspondence between the calibrated fiducial mark coordinates
and their respective measured image coordinate values. Large RMS
errors indicate poor correspondence. This can be attributed to film
deformation, poor scanning quality, out-of-date calibration
information, or image mismeasurement.
The affine transformation also defines the translation between the
origin of the pixel coordinate system (xa-file and ya-file) and the image
coordinate system (xo-file and yo-file). Additionally, the affine
transformation takes into consideration rotation of the image
coordinate system by considering angle Θ (theta). A scanned image
of an aerial photograph is normally rotated due to the scanning
procedure.
The degree of variation between the x- and y-axis is referred to as
nonorthogonality. The 2D affine transformation also considers the
extent of nonorthogonality. The scale difference between the x-axis
and the y-axis is also considered using the affine transformation.

For more information, see “Fiducial Orientation”.
Lens Distortion Lens distortion deteriorates the positional accuracy of image points
located on the image plane. Two types of lens distortion exist: radial
and tangential lens distortion. Lens distortion occurs when light rays
passing through the lens are bent, thereby changing directions and
intersecting the image plane at positions deviant from the norm.
Figure 14 illustrates the difference between radial and tangential
lens distortion.
Figure 14: Radial vs. Tangential Lens Distortion

y
∆r ∆t
o x
Radial lens distortion causes imaged points to be distorted along

radial lines from the principal point o. The effect of radial lens
distortion is represented as ∆r. Radial lens distortion is also
commonly referred to as symmetric lens distortion.
Tangential lens distortion occurs at right angles to the radial lines
from the principal point. The effect of tangential lens distortion is
represented as ∆t. Because tangential lens distortion is much smaller
in magnitude than radial lens distortion, it is considered negligible.
The effects of lens distortion are commonly determined in a
laboratory during the camera calibration procedure.
The effects of radial lens distortion throughout an image can be
approximated using a polynomial. The following polynomial is used
to determine coefficients associated with radial lens distortion:
3 5
∆r = k 0 r + k 1 r + k 2 r
where ∆r represents the radial distortion along a radial distance r

from the principal point (Wolf 1983). In most camera calibration
reports, the lens distortion value is provided as a function of radial
distance from the principal point or field angle. LPS Project Manager
accommodates radial lens distortion parameters in both scenarios.
Three coefficients—k0, k1, and k2—are computed using statistical
techniques. Once the coefficients are computed, each measurement
taken on an image is corrected for radial lens distortion.

Exterior Exterior orientation defines the position and angular orientation of
the camera that captured an image. The variables defining the
Orientation
position and orientation of an image are referred to as the elements
of exterior orientation. The elements of exterior orientation define
the characteristics associated with an image at the time of exposure
or capture. The positional elements of exterior orientation include
Xo, Yo, and Zo. They define the position of the perspective center (O)
with respect to the ground space coordinate system (X, Y, and Z).
Zo is commonly referred to as the height of the camera above sea
level, which is commonly defined by a datum.
The angular or rotational elements of exterior orientation describe
the relationship between the ground space coordinate system (X, Y,
and Z) and the image space coordinate system (x, y, and z). Three
rotation angles are commonly used to define angular orientation.
They are omega (ω), phi (ϕ), and kappa (κ). Figure 15 illustrates the
elements of exterior orientation. Figure 16 illustrates the individual
angles (ω, ϕ, and κ) of exterior orientation.
Figure 15: Elements of Exterior Orientation

z´
z
y y´
ϕ
κ ω
x
O x´
f
o p yp
xp
Zo
Ground Point P
Z
Zp
Y
Xp
Xo
Yp
Yo
X
LPS Project Manager Exterior Orientation / 32

Figure 16: Omega, Phi, and Kappa
z z z
y y y
x x x
ω ϕ κ
omega phi kappa
Omega is a rotation about the photographic x-axis, phi is a rotation

about the photographic y-axis, and kappa is a rotation about the
photographic z-axis. Rotations are defined as being positive if they
are counterclockwise when viewed from the positive end of their
respective axis. Different conventions are used to define the order
and direction of the three rotation angles (Wang, Z. 1990). The
ISPRS recommends the use of the ω, ϕ, κ convention. The
photographic z-axis is equivalent to the optical axis (focal length).
The x’, y’, and z’ coordinates are parallel to the ground space
coordinate system.
Rotation Matrix Using the three rotation angles, the relationship between the image
space coordinate system (x, y, and z) and ground space coordinate
system (X, Y, and Z; or x’, y’, and z’) can be determined. A 3 × 3
matrix defining the relationship between the two systems is used.
This is referred to as the orientation or rotation matrix, M. The
rotation matrix can be defined as follows:
m 11 m 12 m 13
M = m 21 m 22 m 23
m 31 m 32 m 33
The rotation matrix is derived by applying a sequential rotation of

omega about the x-axis, phi about the y-axis, and kappa about the
z-axis.
For more information, see “Rotation System Support”.
Derivation of the Rotation Matrix

To derive the rotation matrix M, three rotations are performed
sequentially: a primary rotation ω around the x-axis, followed by a
secondary rotation ϕ around the y-axis, and a tertiary rotation κ
around the z-axis.
Figure 17 illustrates the primary rotation ω about the x-axis.

Figure 17: Primary Rotation Omega About the X-axis
Z
Zω
Y P
Yω Zω Yω
Z
ω
ω
Y
ω
X = Xω
From Figure 17 above,
Equation 1
x 1 0 0 Xω Xω
y = 0 cos ω – sin ω Y ω = M ω Y ω
z 0 sin ω cos ω Z ω Zω
Secondary rotation ϕ about the Yω-axis is depicted in Figure 18.
Figure 18: Secondary Rotation Phi about the Y Omega-axis

Zωϕ
Zω
Xωϕ
ϕ
P
Xω
Zω
Zωϕ
Xω
ϕ
ϕ
Xωϕ
Yω = Yωϕ
Equation 2
Xω cos ϕ 0 sin ϕ X ωϕ X ωϕ
Yω = 0 1 0 Y ωϕ = M ϕ Y ωϕ
Zω – sin ϕ 0 cos ϕ Z ωϕ Z ωϕ
Figure 19 shows tertiary rotation κ around the Zωϕ -axis:

Figure 19: Tertiary Rotation Kappa About the Z Omega Phi-
axis
Zωϕ = Zωϕκ
κ Yωϕκ
κ Yωϕ
Xωϕκ Xωϕ
κ
P
Yωϕ
Yωϕκ
Xωϕκ
Xωϕ
Equation 3
X ωϕ cos κ – sin κ 0 X ωϕκ X ωϕκ
Y ωϕ = sin κ cos κ 0 Y ωϕκ = M κ Y ωϕκ
Z ωϕ 0 0 1 Z ωϕκ Z ωϕκ
By combining Equation 1, Equation 2, and Equation 3, a relationship

can be defined between the coordinates of an object point (P)
relative to the (X, Y, Z) and (Xωϕκ , Yωϕκ , Zωϕκ ) coordinate systems:
P = M ω × M ϕ × M κ × P ωϕκ Equation 4
In Equation 4, replace
Mω × Mϕ × Mκ
with M, which is a 3 × 3 matrix:
m 11 m 12 m 13
M = m 21 m 22 m 23
m 31 m 32 m 33
where each entry of the matrix can be computed by:

M 11 = cos ϕ × cos κ
M 12 = – cos ϕ × sin κ
M 13 = sin ϕ
M 21 = cos ω × sin κ + sin ω × sin ϕ × cos κ
M 22 = cos ω × cos κ – sin ω × sin ϕ × sin κ
M 23 = – sin ω × cos ϕ
M 31 = sin ω × sin κ – cos ω × sin ϕ × cos κ
M 32 = sin ω × cos κ + cos ω × sin ϕ × sin κ
M 33 = cos ω × cos ϕ
The Collinearity Equation The following section defines the relationship between the
camera/sensor, the image, and the ground. Most photogrammetric
tools utilize the following formulas in one form or another.
With reference to Figure 15, an image vector a can be defined as the
vector from the exposure station O to the Image Point p. A ground
space or object space vector A can be defined as the vector from the
exposure station O to the Ground Point P. The image vector and
ground vector are collinear, inferring that a line extending from the
exposure station to the image point and to the ground is linear.
The image vector and ground vector are only collinear if one is a
scalar multiple of the other. Therefore, the following statement can
be made:
a = kA
In this equation, k is a scalar multiple. The image and ground vectors

must be within the same coordinate system. Therefore, image vector
a is comprised of the following components:
xp – xo
a = y –y
p o
–f
Here, xo and yo represent the image coordinates of the principal

point.
Similarly, the ground vector can be formulated as follows:
Xp – Xo
A = Yp – Yo
Zp – Zo

In order for the image and ground vectors to be within the same
coordinate system, the ground vector must be multiplied by the
rotation matrix M. The following equation can be formulated:
a = kMA
where,
xp – xo Xp – Xo
y p – y o = kM Y p – Y o
–f Zp – Zo
The above equation defines the relationship between the perspective

center of the camera/sensor exposure station and ground point P
appearing on an image with an image point location of p. This
equation forms the basis of the collinearity condition that is used in
most photogrammetric operations.
The collinearity condition specifies that the exposure station, ground
point, and its corresponding image point location must all lie along a
straight line, thereby being collinear. Two equations comprise the
collinearity condition:
m 11 ( X p – X o 1 ) + m 12 ( Y p – Y o1 ) + m 13 ( Z p – Z o1 )
x p – x o = – f ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
m 31 ( X p – X o1 ) + m 32 ( Y p – Y o 1 ) + m 33 ( Z p – Z o1 )
m 21 ( X p – X o 1 ) + m 22 ( Y p – Y o1 ) + m 23 ( Z p – Z o1 )
y p – y o = – f ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
m 31 ( X p – X o1 ) + m 32 ( Y p – Y o 1 ) + m 33 ( Z p – Z o1 )
One set of equations can be formulated for each ground point

appearing on an image. The collinearity condition is commonly used
to define the relationship between the camera/sensor, the image,
and the ground.
Photogrammetric As stated previously, digital photogrammetry is used for many

applications, ranging from orthorectification, automated elevation
Solutions
extraction, stereopair creation, feature collection, highly accurate
point determination, and control point extension.
For any of the aforementioned tasks to be undertaken, a relationship
between the camera/sensor, the image(s) in a project, and the
ground must be defined. The following variables are used to define
the relationship:
LPS Project Manager Photogrammetric Solutions / 37

• exterior orientation parameters for each image
• interior orientation parameters for each image
• accurate representation of the ground
Well-known obstacles in photogrammetry include defining the

interior and exterior orientation parameters for each image in a
project using a minimum number of GCPs. Due to the
time-consuming and labor intensive procedures associated with
collecting ground control, most photogrammetric applications do not
have an abundant number3 of GCPs. Additionally, the exterior
orientation parameters associated with an image are normally
unknown.
Depending on the input data provided, photogrammetric techniques
such as space resection, space forward intersection, and bundle
block adjustment are used to define the variables required to
perform orthorectification, automated DEM extraction, stereopair
creation, highly accurate point determination, and control point
extension.
Space Resection Space resection is a technique that is commonly used to determine

the exterior orientation parameters associated with one image or
many images based on known GCPs. Space resection uses the
collinearity condition. Space resection using the collinearity condition
specifies that, for any image, the exposure station, the ground point,
and its corresponding image point must lie along a straight line.
If a minimum of three GCPs is known in the X, Y, and Z direction,
space resection techniques can be used to determine the six exterior
orientation parameters associated with an image. Space resection
assumes that camera information is available.
Space resection is commonly used to perform single frame
orthorectification, where one image is processed at a time. If
multiple images are being used, space resection techniques require
that a minimum of three GCPs be located on each image being
processed.
Using the collinearity condition, the positions of the exterior
orientation parameters are computed. Light rays originating from at
least three GCPs intersect through the image plane, through the
image positions of the GCPs, and resect at the perspective center of
the camera or sensor. Using least squares adjustment techniques,
the most probable positions of exterior orientation can be computed.
Space resection techniques can be applied to one image or multiple
images.

Space Forward Space forward intersection is a technique that is commonly used to
Intersection determine the ground coordinates X, Y, and Z of points that appear
in the overlapping areas of two or more images based on known
interior and exterior orientation parameters. The collinearity
condition is enforced, stating that the corresponding light rays from
the two exposure stations pass through the corresponding image
points on the two images, and intersect at the same ground point.
Figure 20 illustrates the concept associated with space forward
intersection.
Figure 20: Space Forward Intersection

O1
O2
o1
p2 o2
p1
Zo1 Ground Point P Zo2
Z
Zp
Y
Xo2
Xp
Xo1 Yo2
Yp
Yo1
X
Space forward intersection techniques assume that the exterior

orientation parameters associated with the images are known. Using
the collinearity equations, the exterior orientation parameters along
with the image coordinate measurements of point p1 on Image 1 and
point p2 on Image 2 are input to compute the Xp, Yp, and Zp
coordinates of ground point P.
Space forward intersection techniques can also be used for
applications associated with collecting GCPs, cadastral mapping
using airborne surveying techniques, and highly accurate point
determination.

Bundle Block Adjustment For mapping projects having more than two images, the use of space
intersection and space resection techniques is limited. This can be
attributed to the lack of information required to perform these tasks.
For example, it is fairly uncommon for the exterior orientation
parameters to be highly accurate for each photograph or image in a
project, since these values are generated photogrammetrically.
Airborne GPS and INS techniques normally provide initial
approximations to exterior orientation, but the final values for these
parameters must be adjusted to attain higher accuracies.
Similarly, rarely are there enough accurate GCPs for a project of 30
or more images to perform space resection (i.e., a minimum of 90 is
required). In the case that there are enough GCPs, the time required
to identify and measure all of the points would be lengthy.
The costs associated with block triangulation and subsequent
orthorectification are largely dependent on the number of GCPs
used. To minimize the costs of a mapping project, fewer GCPs are
collected and used. To ensure that high accuracies are attained, an
approach known as bundle block adjustment is used.
A bundle block adjustment is best defined by examining the
individual words in the term. A bundled solution is computed
including the exterior orientation parameters of each image in a
block and the X, Y, and Z coordinates of tie points and adjusted
GCPs. A block of images contained in a project is simultaneously
processed in one solution. A statistical technique known as least
squares adjustment is used to estimate the bundled solution for the
entire block while also minimizing and distributing error.
Block triangulation is the process of defining the mathematical
relationship between the images contained within a block, the
camera or sensor model, and the ground. Once the relationship has
been defined, accurate imagery and geographic information
concerning the Earth’s surface can be created.
When processing frame camera, digital camera, videography, and
nonmetric camera imagery, block triangulation is commonly referred
to as aerial triangulation (AT). When processing imagery collected
with a pushbroom sensor, block triangulation is commonly referred
to as triangulation.
There are several models for block triangulation. The common
models used in photogrammetry are block triangulation with the
strip method, the independent model method, and the bundle
method. Among them, the bundle block adjustment is the most
rigorous of the above methods, considering the minimization and
distribution of errors. Bundle block adjustment uses the collinearity
condition as the basis for formulating the relationship between image
space and ground space. LPS Project Manager uses bundle block
adjustment techniques.
In order to understand the concepts associated with bundle block
adjustment, an example comprising two images with three GCPs
whose X, Y, and Z coordinates are known is used. Additionally, six
tie points are available. Figure 21 illustrates the photogrammetric
configuration. Figure 22 illustrates the photogrammetric
configuration in the LPS Project Graphic Status window.

Figure 21: Photogrammetric Configuration
Tie point
GCP
Figure 22: Photogrammetric Configuration

Forming the Collinearity Equations
For each measured GCP, there are two corresponding image
coordinates (x and y). Thus, two collinearity equations can be
formulated to represent the relationship between the ground point
and the corresponding image measurements. In the context of
bundle block adjustment, these equations are known as observation
equations.
If a GCP has been measured on the overlap area of two images, four
equations can be written: two for image measurements on the left
image comprising the pair and two for the image measurements
made on the right image comprising the pair. Thus, GCP A measured
on the overlap area of image left and image right has four collinearity
formulas:
m 11 ( X A – X o 1 ) + m 12 ( Y A – Y o1 ) + m 13 ( Z A – Z o 1 )
x a1 – x o = – f ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
m 31 ( X A – X o1 ) + m 32 ( Y A – Y o1 ) + m 33 ( Z A – Z o1 )
m 21 ( X A – X o 1 ) + m 22 ( Y A – Y o1 ) + m 23 ( Z A – Z o 1 )
y a1 – y o = – f ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
m 31 ( X A – X o1 ) + m 32 ( Y A – Y o1 ) + m 33 ( Z A – Z o1 )
m′ 11 ( X A – X o2 ) + m′ 12 ( Y A – Y o 2 ) + m′ 13 ( Z A – Z o2 )
x a2 – x o = – f ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
m′ 31 ( X A – X o2 ) + m′ 32 ( Y A – Y o2 ) + m′ 33 ( Z A – Z o2 )
m′ 21 ( X A – X o2 ) + m′ 22 ( Y A – Y o 2 ) + m′ 23 ( Z A – Z o2 )
y a2 – y o = – f ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
m′ 31 ( X A – X o2 ) + m′ 32 ( Y A – Y o2 ) + m′ 33 ( Z A – Z o2 )
One image measurement of GCP A on Image 1:
x a1, y a1
One image measurement of GCP A on Image 2:
x a2, y a2
Positional elements of exterior orientation on Image 1:
X o1, Y o 1, Z o
1
Positional elements of exterior orientation on Image 2:

X o2, Y o 2, Z o
2
If three GCPs have been measured on the overlap area of two

images, twelve equations can be formulated (four equations for each
GCP).
Additionally, if six tie points have been measured on the overlap
areas of the two images, twenty-four equations can be formulated
(four for each tie point). This is a total of 36 observation equations.
The previous scenario has the following unknowns:
• six exterior orientation parameters for the left image (that is, X,
Y, Z, omega, phi, kappa)
• six exterior orientation parameters for the right image (that is,
X, Y, Z, omega, phi, kappa)
• X, Y, and Z coordinates of the tie points. Thus, for six tie points,
this includes eighteen unknowns (six tie points times three X, Y,
Z coordinates)
The total number of unknowns is 30. The overall quality of a bundle

block adjustment is largely a function of the quality and redundancy
in the input data. In this scenario, the redundancy in the project can
be computed by subtracting the number of unknowns, 30, from the
number of knowns, 36. The resulting redundancy is six. This term is
commonly referred to as the degrees of freedom in a solution.
Once each observation equation is formulated, the collinearity
condition can be solved using an approach referred to as least
squares adjustment.
Least Squares Least squares adjustment is a statistical technique that is used to

Adjustment estimate the unknown parameters associated with a solution while
also minimizing error within the solution. With respect to block
triangulation, least squares adjustment techniques are used to:
• estimate or adjust the values associated with exterior orientation
• estimate the X, Y, and Z coordinates associated with tie points
• estimate or adjust the values associated with interior orientation
• minimize and distribute data error through the network of

observations
Data error is attributed to the inaccuracy associated with the input

GCP coordinates, measured tie point and GCP image positions,
camera information, and systematic errors.
The least squares approach requires iterative processing until a
solution is attained. A solution is obtained when the residuals, or
errors, associated with the input data are minimized.

The least squares approach involves determining the corrections to
the unknown parameters based on the criteria of minimizing input
measurement residuals. The residuals are derived from the
difference between the measured (i.e., user input) and computed
value for any particular measurement in a project. In the block
triangulation process, a functional model can be formed based upon
the collinearity equations.
The functional model refers to the specification of an equation that
can be used to relate measurements to parameters. In the context
of photogrammetry, measurements include the image locations of
GCPs and GCP coordinates, while the exterior orientations of all the
images are important parameters estimated by the block
triangulation process.
The residuals, which are minimized, include the image coordinates of
the GCPs and tie points along with the known ground coordinates of
the GCPs. A simplified version of the least squares condition can be
broken down into a formula that includes a weight matrix P, as
follows:
V = AX – L
In this equation,
V = the matrix containing the image coordinate residuals
A = the matrix containing the partial derivatives with
respect to
the unknown parameters, including exterior
orientation,
interior orientation, XYZ tie point, and GCP
coordinates
X = the matrix containing the corrections to the unknown
parameters
L = the matrix containing the input observations (i.e.,
image
coordinates and GCP coordinates)
The components of the least squares condition are directly related to
the functional model based on collinearity equations. The A matrix is
formed by differentiating the functional model, which is based on
collinearity equations, with respect to the unknown parameters such
as exterior orientation, etc. The L matrix is formed by subtracting the
initial results obtained from the functional model with newly
estimated results determined from a new iteration of processing. The
X matrix contains the corrections to the unknown exterior orientation
parameters. The X matrix is calculated in the following manner:
t –1 t
X = ( A PA ) A PL
In this equation,
X = the matrix containing the corrections to the unknown
parameters t

A = the matrix containing the partial derivatives with
respect to
the unknown parameters
t
= the matrix transposed
P = the matrix containing the weights of the observations
L = the matrix containing the observations
Once a least squares iteration of processing is completed, the
corrections to the unknown parameters are added to the initial
estimates. For example, if initial approximations to exterior
orientation are provided from airborne GPS and INS information, the
estimated corrections computed from the least squares adjustment
are added to the initial value to compute the updated exterior
orientation values. This iterative process of least squares adjustment
continues until the corrections to the unknown parameters are less
than a user-specified threshold (commonly referred to as a
convergence value).
The V residual matrix is computed at the end of each iteration of
processing. Once an iteration is complete, the new estimates for the
unknown parameters are used to recompute the input observations
such as the image coordinate values. The difference between the
initial measurements and the new estimates is obtained to provide
the residuals. Residuals provide preliminary indications of the
accuracy of a solution. The residual values indicate the degree to
which a particular observation (input) fits with the functional model.
For example, the image residuals have the capability of reflecting
GCP collection in the field. After each successive iteration of
processing, the residuals become smaller until they are satisfactorily
minimized.
Once the least squares adjustment is completed, the block
triangulation results include:
• final exterior orientation parameters of each image in a block and

their accuracy
• final interior orientation parameters of each image in a block and

their accuracy
• X, Y, and Z tie point coordinates and their accuracy
• adjusted GCP coordinates and their residuals
• image coordinate residuals
The results from the block triangulation are then used as the primary
input for the following tasks:
• stereopair creation
• feature collection
• highly accurate point determination

• DEM extraction
• orthorectification
Self-calibrating Bundle Normally, there are more or less systematic errors related to the
Adjustment imaging and processing system, such as lens distortion, film
distortion, atmosphere refraction, scanner errors, and so on. These
errors reduce the accuracy of triangulation results, especially in
dealing with large-scale imagery and high accuracy triangulation.
There are several ways to reduce the influences of the systematic
errors, like a posteriori compensation, test-field calibration, and the
most common approach—self-calibration (Konecny 1994; Wang, Z.
1990).
The self-calibrating methods use additional parameters in the
triangulation process to eliminate the systematic errors. How well it
works depends on many factors such as the strength of the block
(overlap amount, crossing flight lines), the GCP and tie point
distribution and amount, the size of systematic errors versus random
errors, the significance of the additional parameters, the correlation
between additional parameters, and other unknowns.
There was intensive research and development for additional
parameter models in photogrammetry in the ‘70s and the ‘80s, and
many research results are available (e.g., Bauer and Müller 1972;
Ebner 1976; Grün 1978; Jacobsen 1980 and Jacobsen 1982; Li
1985; Wang, Y. 1988; and Stojic, Chandler, Ashmore, and Luce
1998). Based on these scientific reports, LPS Project Manager
provides four groups of additional parameters for you to choose in
different triangulation circumstances. In addition, LPS Project
Manager allows the interior orientation parameters to be analytically
calibrated with its self-calibrating bundle block adjustment.
Automatic Gross Error Normal random errors are subject to statistical normal distribution.
Detection In contrast, gross errors refer to errors that are large and are not
subject to normal distribution. The gross errors among the input data
for triangulation can lead to unreliable results. Research during the
′80s in the photogrammetric community resulted in significant
achievements in automatic gross error detection in the triangulation
process (e.g., Kubik 1982; Li 1983 and Li 1985; Jacobsen 1984;
El-Hakim and Ziemann 1984; Wang, Y. 1988).
Methods for gross error detection began with residual checking using
data-snooping and were later extended to robust estimation (Wang,
Z. 1990). The most common robust estimation method is the
iteration with selective weight functions. Based on the scientific
research results from the photogrammetric community, LPS Project
Manager offers two robust error detection methods within the
For more information, see “Automated Gross Error Checking”.

The effect of the automatic error detection depends not only on the
mathematical model, but also depends on the redundancy in the
block. Therefore, more tie points in more overlap areas contribute
better gross error detection. In addition, inaccurate GCPs can
distribute their errors to correct tie points; therefore, the ground and
image coordinates of GCPs should have better accuracy than tie
points when comparing them within the same scale space.
GCPs The instrumental component of establishing an accurate relationship

between the images in a project, the camera/sensor, and the ground
is GCPs. GCPs are identifiable features located on the Earth’s surface
whose ground coordinates in X, Y, and Z are known. A full GCP has
associated with it X, Y, and Z (elevation of the point) coordinates. A
horizontal GCP only specifies the X, Y coordinates, while a vertical
GCP only specifies the Z coordinate.
The following features on the Earth’s surface are commonly used as
GCPs:
• intersection of roads
• utility infrastructure (e.g., fire hydrants and manhole covers)
• intersection of agricultural plots of land
• survey benchmarks
Depending on the type of mapping project, GCPs can be collected

from the following sources:
• theodolite survey (millimeter to centimeter accuracy)
• total station survey (millimeter to centimeter accuracy)
• ground GPS (centimeter to meter accuracy)
• planimetric and topographic maps (accuracy varies as a function

of map scale, approximate accuracy between several meters to
40 meters or more)
• digital orthorectified images (X and Y coordinates can be

collected to an accuracy dependent on the resolution of the
orthorectified image)
• DEMs (for the collection of vertical GCPs having Z coordinates

associated with them, where accuracy is dependent on the
resolution of the DEM and the accuracy of the input DEM)
LPS Project Manager GCPs / 47

When imagery or photography is exposed, GCPs are recorded and
subsequently displayed on the photograph or image. During GCP
measurement in LPS Project Manager, the image positions of GCPs
appearing on an image, or on the overlap area of the images, are
collected.
It is highly recommended that a greater number of GCPs be available
than are actually used in the block triangulation. Additional GCPs can
be used as check points to independently verify the overall quality
and accuracy of the block triangulation solution. A check point
analysis compares the photogrammetrically computed ground
coordinates of the check points to the original values. The result of
the analysis is an RMSE that defines the degree of correspondence
between the computed values and the original values. Lower RMSE
values indicate better results.
GCP Requirements The minimum GCP requirements for an accurate mapping project
vary with respect to the size of the project. With respect to
establishing a relationship between image space and ground space,
the theoretical minimum number of GCPs is two GCPs having X, Y,
and Z coordinates (six observations) and one GCP having a Z
coordinate (one observation). This is a total of seven observations.
In establishing the mathematical relationship between image space
and object space, seven parameters defining the relationship must
be determined. The seven parameters include a scale factor
(describing the scale difference between image space and ground
space); X, Y, and Z (defining the positional differences between
image space and object space); and three rotation angles (omega,
phi, and kappa) defining the rotational relationship between image
space and ground space.
In order to compute a unique solution, at least seven known
parameters must be available. In using the two XYZ GCPs and one
vertical (Z) GCP, the relationship can be defined. However, to
increase the accuracy of a mapping project, using more GCPs is
highly recommended.
The following descriptions are provided for various projects:
Processing One Image

When processing one image for the purpose of orthorectification
(that is, a single frame orthorectification), the minimum number of
GCPs required is three. Each GCP must have an X, Y, and Z
coordinate associated with it. The GCPs should be evenly distributed
to ensure that the camera/sensor is accurately modeled.
Processing a Strip of Images

When processing a strip of adjacent images, two GCPs for every third
image are recommended. To increase the quality of
orthorectification, measuring three GCPs at the corner edges of a
strip is advantageous. Thus, during block triangulation a stronger
geometry can be enforced in areas where there is less redundancy
such as the corner edges of a strip or a block.

Figure 23 illustrates the GCP configuration for a strip of images
having 60% overlap. The triangles represent the GCPs. Thus, the
image positions of the GCPs are measured on the overlap areas of
the imagery.
Figure 23: GCP Configuration
Processing Multiple Figure 24 depicts the standard GCP configuration for a block of
Strips of Imagery images, comprising four strips of images, each containing eight
overlapping images.
Figure 24: GCPs in a Block of Images
In this case, the GCPs form a strong geometric network of

observations. As a general rule, it is advantageous to have at least
one GCP on every third image of a block. Additionally, whenever
possible, locate GCPs that lie on multiple images, around the outside
edges of a block and at certain distances from one another within the
block.

Tie Points A tie point is a point whose ground coordinates are not known, but
is visually recognizable in the overlap area between two or more
images. The corresponding image positions of tie points appearing
on the overlap areas of multiple images is identified and measured.
Ground coordinates for tie points are computed during block
triangulation. Tie points can be measured both manually and
automatically.
Tie points should be visually defined in all images. Ideally, they
should show good contrast in two directions, like the corner of a
building or a road intersection. Tie points should also be distributed
over the area of the block. Typically, nine tie points in each image
are adequate for block triangulation. Figure 25 depicts the placement
of tie points.
Figure 25: Tie Point Distribution for Triangulation

y
Tie points in a
single image
In a block of images with 60% overlap and 25-30% sidelap, nine

points are sufficient to tie together the block as well as individual
strips (see Figure 26).
Figure 26: Tie Points in a Block
Nine tie points in

each image tie the
block together
Tie points
Automatic Tie Point Selecting and measuring tie points is very time-consuming. In recent
Collection years, one of the major focal points of research and development in
photogrammetry has been automated triangulation with automatic
tie point collection as the main issue.
LPS Project Manager Tie Points / 50

Another issue of automated triangulation is the automatic control
point identification, which is still unsolved due to the complexity of
the scenario. There are several valuable research results detailing
automated triangulation (e.g., Agouris and Schenk 1996; Heipke
1996; Krzystek 1998; Mayr 1995; Schenk 1997; Tang, Braun, and
Debitsch 1997; Tsingas 1995; Wang, Y. 1998).
After investigating the advantages and the weaknesses of the
existing methods, LPS Project Manager was designed to incorporate
an advanced method for automatic tie point collection. It is designed
to work with a variety of digital images such as aerial images,
satellite images, digital camera images, and close-range images. It
also supports the processing of multiple strips including adjacent,
diagonal, and cross-strips.
Automatic tie point collection within LPS Project Manager
successfully performs the following tasks:
• Automatic block configuration. Based on the initial input

requirements, LPS Project Manager automatically detects the
relationship of the block with respect to image adjacency.
• Automatic tie point extraction. The feature point extraction

algorithms are used here to extract the candidates of tie points.
• Point transfer. Feature points appearing on multiple images are

automatically matched and identified.
• Gross error detection. Erroneous points are automatically

identified and removed from the solution.
• Tie point selection. The intended number of tie points defined by

the user is automatically selected as the final number of tie
points.
The image matching strategies incorporated in LPS Project Manager

for automatic tie point collection include the coarse-to-fine
matching; feature-based matching with geometrical and topological
constraints, which is simplified from the structural matching
algorithm (Wang, Y. 1998); and the least square matching for the
high accuracy of tie points.
Image Matching Image matching refers to the automatic identification and

measurement of corresponding image points that are located on the
Techniques overlapping areas of multiple images. The various image matching
methods can be divided into three categories including:
• area-based matching
• feature-based matching
• relation-based matching
LPS Project Manager Image Matching Techniques / 51

Area-based Matching Area-based matching is also called signal based matching. This
method determines the correspondence between two image areas
according to the similarity of their gray level values. The cross-
correlation and least squares correlation techniques are well-known
methods for area-based matching.
Correlation Windows
Area-based matching uses correlation windows. These windows
consist of a local neighborhood of pixels. One example of correlation
windows is square neighborhoods (for example, 3 × 3, 5 × 5,
7 × 7 pixels). In practice, the windows vary in shape and dimension
based on the matching technique. Area correlation uses the
characteristics of these windows to match ground feature locations
in one image to ground features on the other.
A reference window is the source window on the first image, which
remains at a constant location. Its dimensions are usually square in
size (for example, 3 × 3, 5 × 5, and so on). Search windows are
candidate windows on the second image that are evaluated relative
to the reference window. During correlation, many different search
windows are examined until a location is found that best matches the
reference window.
Correlation Calculations
Two correlation calculations are described in the following sections:
cross-correlation and least squares correlation. Most area-based
matching calculations, including these methods, normalize the
correlation windows. Therefore, it is not necessary to balance the
contrast or brightness prior to running correlation. Cross-correlation
is more robust in that it requires a less accurate a priori position than
least squares. However, its precision is limited to one pixel. Least
squares correlation can achieve precision levels of one-tenth of a
pixel, but requires an a priori position that is accurate to about two
pixels. In practice, cross-correlation is often followed by least
squares for high accuracy.
Cross-correlation
Cross-correlation computes the correlation coefficient of the gray
values between the template window and the search window
according to the following equation:

∑ [ g1 ( c1, r1 ) – g1 ] [ g2 ( c2, r2 ) – g2 ]
i, j
aaρ = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 2
∑ [ g1 ( c1, r1 ) – g1 ] ∑ [ g2 ( c2, r2 ) – g2 ]
i, j i, j
with
1 1
g 1 = --- ∑ g 1 ( c 1, r 1 ) g 2 = --- ∑ g 2 ( c 2, r 2 )
n n
i, j i, j
In the above equations,

ρ = the correlation coefficient
g(c,r)= the gray value of the pixel (c,r)
c1,r1= the pixel coordinates on the left image
c2,r2 = the pixel coordinates on the right image
n = the total number of pixels in the window
i, j = pixel index into the correlation window
When using the area-based cross-correlation, it is necessary to have
a good initial position for the two correlation windows. If the exterior
orientation parameters of the images being matched are known, a
good initial position can be determined. However, if the contrast in
the windows is very poor, the correlation can fail.
Least Squares Correlation

Least squares correlation uses the least squares estimation to derive
parameters that best fit a search window to a reference window. This
technique has been investigated thoroughly in photogrammetry
(Ackermann 1983; Grün and Baltsavias 1988; Helava 1988). It
accounts for both gray scale and geometric differences, making it
especially useful when ground features on one image look somewhat
different on the other image (differences which occur when the
surface terrain is quite steep or when the viewing angles are quite
different).
Least squares correlation is iterative. The parameters calculated
during the initial pass are used in the calculation of the second pass
and so on, until an optimum solution is determined. Least squares
matching can result in high positional accuracy (about 0.1 pixels).
However, it is sensitive to initial approximations. The initial
coordinates for the search window prior to correlation must be
accurate to about two pixels or better.
When least squares correlation fits a search window to the reference
window, both radiometric (pixel gray values) and geometric
(location, size, and shape of the search window) transformations are
calculated.

For example, suppose the change in gray values between two
correlation windows is represented as a linear relationship. Also
assume that the change in the window’s geometry is represented by
an affine transformation.
g 2 ( c 2, r 2 ) = h 0 + h 1 g 1 ( c 1, r 1 )
c2 = a0 + a1 c1 + a2 r1
r2 = b0 + b1 c1 + b2 r1
In the equations,
c1,r1 = the pixel coordinate in the reference window
c2,r2 = the pixel coordinate in the search window
g1(c1,r1) = the gray value of pixel (c1,r1)
g2(c2,r2) = the gray value of pixel (c2,r2)
h0, h1 = linear gray value transformation parameters
a0, a1, a2 = affine geometric transformation parameters
b0, b1, b2 = affine geometric transformation parameters
Based on this assumption, the error equation for each pixel is
derived, as shown in the following equation:
v = ( a 1 + a 2 c 1 + a 3 r 1 )g c + ( b 1 + b 2 c 1 + b 3 r 1 )g r – h 1 – h 2 g 1 ( c 1, r 1 ) + ∆g
with ∆g = g 2 ( c 2, r 2 ) – g 1 ( c 1, r 1 )
The values gc and gr are the gradients of g2 (c2,r2).
Feature-based Matching Feature-based matching determines the correspondence between

two image features. Most feature-based techniques match extracted
point features (this is called feature point matching), as opposed to
other features, such as lines or complex objects. The feature points
are also commonly referred to as interest points. Poor contrast areas
can be avoided with feature-based matching.
In order to implement feature-based matching, the image features
must initially be extracted. There are several well-known operators
for feature point extraction. Examples include the Moravec Operator,
the Dreschler Operator, and the Förstner Operator (Förstner and
Gülch 1987; Lü 1988).
After the features are extracted, the attributes of the features are
compared between two images. The feature pair having the
attributes with the best fit is recognized as a match. LPS Project
Manager utilizes the Förstner interest operator to extract feature
points.

Relation-based Matching Relation-based matching is also called structural matching
(Vosselman and Haala 1992; Wang, Y. 1994 and Wang, Y. 1995).
This kind of matching technique uses the image features and the
relationship between the features. With relation-based matching,
the corresponding image structures can be recognized
automatically, without any a priori information. However, the
process is time-consuming since it deals with varying types of
information. Relation-based matching can also be applied for the
automatic recognition of control points.
Image Pyramid Because of the large amount of image data, the image pyramid is
usually adopted during the image matching techniques to reduce the
computation time and to increase the matching reliability. The
pyramid is a data structure consisting of the same image
represented several times, at a decreasing spatial resolution each
time. Each level of the pyramid contains the image at a particular
resolution.
The matching process is performed at each level of resolution. The
search is first performed at the lowest resolution level and
subsequently at each higher level of resolution. Figure 27 shows a
four-level image pyramid.
Figure 27: Image Pyramid for Matching at Coarse to Full

Resolution
Level 4 Matching begins
64 x 64 pixels on level 4
Resolution of 1:8
Level 3
128 x128 pixels
Resolution of 1:4
and
Level 2
256 x 256 pixels
Resolution of 1:2
Matching finishes
on level 1
Level 1
Full resolution (1:1)
512 x 512 pixels

LPS Project Manager There are different resampling methods available for generating an
Pyramid Layers image pyramid. Theoretical and practical investigations show that
the resampling methods based on the Gaussian filter, which are
approximated by a binomial filter, have superior properties
concerning preserving the image contents and reducing the
computation time (Wang, Y. 1994). Therefore, LPS Project Manager
uses this kind of pyramid layer instead of those currently available
under ERDAS IMAGINE, which are overwritten automatically by LPS
Project Manager.
Satellite Satellite photogrammetry has slight variations compared to

photogrammetric applications associated with aerial frame cameras.
Photogrammetry This document makes reference to the SPOT and IRS-1C satellites.
The SPOT satellite provides 10-meter panchromatic imagery and 20-
meter multispectral imagery (four multispectral bands of
information).
The SPOT satellite carries two high resolution visible (HRV) sensors,
each of which is a pushbroom scanner that takes a sequence of line
images while the satellite circles the Earth. The focal length of the
camera optic is 1084 mm, which is very large relative to the length
of the camera (78 mm). The field of view is 4.1 degrees. The satellite
orbit is circular, north-south and south-north, about 830 km above
the Earth, and sun-synchronous. A sun-synchronous orbit is one in
which the orbital rotation is the same rate as the Earth’s rotation.
The IRS-1C satellite utilizes a pushbroom sensor consisting of three
individual CCDs. The ground resolution of the imagery ranges
between 5 to 6 meters. The focal length of the optic is approximately
982 mm. The pixel size of the CCD is 7 microns. The images captured
from the three CCDs are processed independently or merged into
one image and system corrected to account for the systematic error
associated with the sensor.
Both the SPOT and IRS-1C satellites collect imagery by scanning
along a line. This line is referred to as the scan line. For each line
scanned within the SPOT and IRS-1C sensors, there is a unique
perspective center and a unique set of rotation angles. The location
of the perspective center relative to the line scanner is constant for
each line (interior orientation and focal length). Since the motion of
the satellite is smooth and practically linear over the length of a
scene, the perspective centers of all scan lines of a scene are
assumed to lie along a smooth line. The scanning technique is
illustrated in Figure 28.
LPS Project Manager Satellite Photogrammetry / 56

Figure 28: Perspective Centers of SPOT Scan Lines
motion of
perspective centers satellite
of scan lines
scan lines
on image
ground
The satellite exposure station is defined as the perspective center in

ground coordinates for the center scan line. The image captured by
the satellite is called a scene. For example, a SPOT Pan 1A scene is
composed of 6000 lines. For SPOT Pan 1A imagery, each of these
lines consists of 6000 pixels. Each line is exposed for 1.5
milliseconds, so it takes 9 seconds to scan the entire scene. (A scene
from SPOT XS 1A is composed of only 3000 lines and 3000 columns
and has 20-meter pixels, while Pan has 10-meter pixels.)
NOTE: The following section addresses only 10-meter SPOT Pan

data.
A pixel in the SPOT image records the light detected by one of the
6000 light-sensitive elements in the camera. Each pixel is defined by
file coordinates (column and row numbers). The physical dimension
of a single, light-sensitive element is 13 × 13 microns. This is the
pixel size in image coordinates. The center of the scene is the center
pixel of the center scan line. It is the origin of the image coordinate
system. Figure 29 depicts image coordinates in a satellite scene.

Figure 29: Image Coordinates in a Satellite Scene
y
A XF
6000 lines C x
(rows)
6000 pixels
(columns)
YF
where,
A = origin of file coordinates
A-XF, A-YF=file coordinate axes
C = origin of image coordinates (center of scene)
C-x, C-y=image coordinate axes
SPOT Interior Orientation Figure 30 shows the interior orientation of a satellite scene. The
transformation between file coordinates and image coordinates is
constant.

Figure 30: Interior Orientation of a SPOT Scene
On
Ok f
f
O1
orbiting
direction
(N —> S)
f
PPn Pn
xn
scan lines Pk
(image plane) xk
PPk
P1 x1 ln
PP1 P1
lk
l1
For each scan line, a separate bundle of light rays is defined, where,
Pk = image point
xk = x value of image coordinates for scan line k
f = focal length of the camera
Ok = perspective center for scan line k, aligned along the
orbit
PPk = principal point for scan line k
lk = light rays for scan line, bundled at perspective center
Ok
SPOT Exterior Orientation SPOT satellite geometry is stable, and the sensor parameters, such
as focal length, are well-known. However, the triangulation of SPOT
scenes is somewhat unstable because of the narrow, almost parallel
bundles of light rays.

Ephemeris data for the orbit are available in the header file of SPOT
scenes. They give the satellite’s position in three-dimensional,
geocentric coordinates at 60-second increments. The velocity vector
and some rotational velocities relating to the attitude of the camera
are given, as well as the exact time of the center scan line of the
scene. The header of the data file of a SPOT scene contains
ephemeris data, which provides information about the recording of
the data and the satellite orbit.
Ephemeris data that can be used in satellite triangulation include:
• position of the satellite in geocentric coordinates (with the origin

at the center of the Earth) to the nearest second
• velocity vector, which is the direction of the satellite’s travel
• attitude changes of the camera
• time of exposure (exact) of the center scan line of the scene
The geocentric coordinates included with the ephemeris data are

converted to a local ground system for use in triangulation. The
center of a satellite scene is interpolated from the header data.
Light rays in a bundle defined by the SPOT sensor are almost
parallel, lessening the importance of the satellite’s position. Instead,
the inclination angles (incidence angles) of the cameras onboard the
satellite become the critical data.
Inclination is the angle between a vertical on the ground at the
center of the scene and a light ray from the exposure station. This
angle defines the degree of off-nadir viewing when the scene was
recorded. The cameras can be tilted in increments of a minimum of
0.6 to a maximum of 27 degrees to the east (negative inclination) or
west (positive inclination).
A stereo scene is achieved when two images of the same area are
acquired on different days from different orbits, one taken East of
the other. For this to occur, there must be significant differences in
the inclination angles.
Figure 31 illustrates the inclination.

Figure 31: Inclination of a Satellite Stereo Scene (View from
North to South)
O1 O2
vertical
orbit 1 orbit 2
sensors
I-
I+
EAST WEST
C Earth’s surface
(ellipsoid)
scene coverage
In Figure 31,
C = center of the scene
I- = eastward inclination
I+ = westward inclination
O1,O2= exposure stations (perspective centers of imagery)
The orientation angle of a satellite scene is the angle between a
perpendicular to the center scan line and the North direction. The
spatial motion of the satellite is described by the velocity vector. The
real motion of the satellite above the ground is further distorted by
the Earth’s rotation.
The scanner can produce a nadir view. Nadir is the point directly
below the camera. SPOT has off-nadir viewing capability. Off-nadir
refers to any point that is not directly beneath the satellite, but is off
to an angle (that is, East or West of the nadir), as shown in Figure 32.

Figure 32: Nadir and Off-nadir
Off-nadir Nadir
The velocity vector of a satellite is the satellite’s velocity if measured

as a vector through a point on the spheroid. It provides a technique
to represent the satellite’s speed as if the imaged area were flat
instead of being a curved surface (see Figure 33).
Figure 33: Velocity Vector and Orientation Angle of a Single

Scene
North
center scan line
orbital path V
In Figure 33,
O = orientation angle
C = center of the scene
V = velocity vector
Satellite block triangulation provides a model for calculating the
spatial relationship between a satellite sensor and the ground
coordinate system for each line of data. This relationship is
expressed as the exterior orientation, which consists of:
• the perspective center of the center scan line (that is, X, Y, and
Z),
• the change of perspective centers along the orbit,
• the three rotations of the center scan line (that is, omega, phi,
and kappa), and

• the changes of angles along the orbit.
In addition to fitting the bundle of light rays to the known points,

satellite block triangulation also accounts for the motion of the
satellite by determining the relationship of the perspective centers
and rotation angles of the scan lines. It is assumed that the satellite
travels in a smooth motion as a scene is being scanned. Therefore,
once the exterior orientation of the center scan line is determined,
the exterior orientation of any other scan line is calculated based on
the distance of that scan line from the center and the changes of the
perspective center location and rotation angles.
Bundle adjustment for triangulating a satellite scene is similar to the
bundle adjustment used for aerial images. A least squares
adjustment is used to derive a set of parameters that comes the
closest to fitting the control points to their known ground
coordinates, and to intersecting tie points.
The resulting parameters of satellite bundle adjustment are:
• ground coordinates of the perspective center of the center scan

line
• rotation angles for the center scan line
• coefficients, from which the perspective center and rotation

angles of all other scan lines are calculated
• ground coordinates of all tie points
Collinearity Equations Modified collinearity equations are used to compute the exterior
and Satellite Block orientation parameters associated with the respective scan lines in
Triangulation the satellite scenes. Each scan line has a unique perspective center
and individual rotation angles. When the satellite moves from one
scan line to the next, these parameters change. Due to the smooth
motion of the satellite in orbit, the changes are small and can be
modeled by low-order polynomial functions.
Control for Satellite Block Triangulation

Both GCPs and tie points can be used for satellite block triangulation
of a stereo scene. For triangulating a single scene, only GCPs are
used. In this case, space resection techniques are used to compute
the exterior orientation parameters associated with the satellite as
they existed at the time of image capture. A minimum of six GCPs is
necessary. Ten or more GCPs are recommended to obtain a good
triangulation result.
The best locations for GCPs in the scene are shown in Figure 34.

Figure 34: Ideal Point Distribution Over a Satellite Scene for
Triangulation
GCP
horizontal x
scan lines
Orthorectification Orthorectification is the process of reducing geometric errors

inherent within photography and imagery. The variables contributing
to geometric errors include, but are not limited to:
• camera and sensor orientation
• systematic error associated with the camera or sensor
• topographic relief displacement
• Earth curvature
By performing block triangulation or single frame resection, the

parameters associated with camera and sensor orientation are
defined. Utilizing least squares adjustment techniques during block
triangulation minimizes the errors associated with camera or sensor
instability. Additionally, the use of self-calibrating bundle adjustment
(SCBA) techniques along with Additional Parameter (AP) modeling
accounts for the systematic errors associated with camera interior
geometry. The effects of the Earth’s curvature are significant if a
large photo block or satellite imagery is involved. They are
accounted for during the block triangulation procedure by setting the
proper option. The effects of topographic relief displacement are
accounted for by utilizing a DEM during the orthorectification
procedure.
The orthorectification process takes the raw digital imagery and
applies a DEM and triangulation results to create an orthorectified
image. Once an orthorectified image is created, each pixel within the
image possesses geometric fidelity. Thus, measurements taken off
an orthorectified image represent the corresponding measurements
as if they were taken on the Earth’s surface (see Figure 35).
LPS Project Manager Orthorectification / 64

Figure 35: Orthorectification
Image
DEM
Orthorectified image
An image or photograph with an orthographic projection is one for

which every point looks as if an observer were looking straight down
at it, along a line of sight that is orthogonal (perpendicular) to the
Earth. The resulting orthorectified image is known as a digital
orthoimage (see Figure 36).
Relief displacement is corrected by taking each pixel of a DEM and
finding the equivalent position in the satellite or aerial image. A
brightness value is determined for this location based on resampling
of the surrounding pixels. The brightness value, elevation, and
exterior orientation information are used to calculate the equivalent
location in the orthoimage file.
Figure 36: Digital Orthoimage - Finding Gray Values

O
P1
f
Z
P
DTM
orthoimage
grayvalues
In Figure 36,
P = ground point

P1 = image point
O = perspective center (origin)
X,Z = ground coordinates (in DTM file)
f = focal length
In contrast to conventional rectification techniques,
orthorectification relies on the digital elevation data, unless the
terrain is flat. Various sources of elevation data exist, such as the
USGS DEM and a DEM automatically created from stereo image
pairs. They are subject to data uncertainty, due in part to the
generalization or imperfections in the creation process. The quality
of the digital orthoimage is significantly affected by this uncertainty.
LPS provides the necessary tools to ensure the creation of map-

accurate DTMs, including DEMs. For more information, see Leica
Photogrammetry Suite Automatic Terrain Extraction User’s
Guide.
For different image data, different accuracy levels of DEMs are

required to limit the uncertainty-related errors within a controlled
limit. While the near-vertical viewing SPOT scene can use very
coarse DEMs, images with large incidence angles need better
elevation data such as USGS level-1 DEMs. For aerial photographs
with a scale larger than 1:60000, elevation data accurate to 1 meter
is recommended. The 1-meter accuracy reflects the accuracy of the
Z coordinates in the DEM, not the DEM resolution or posting.
Cell Size Resampling methods used are nearest neighbor, bilinear

interpolation, and cubic convolution. Generally, when the cell sizes
of orthoimage pixels are selected, they should be similar or larger
than the cell sizes of the original image. For example, if the image
was scanned 9K × 9K, one pixel would represent 0.025 mm on the
image. Assuming that the SI of this photo is 1:40000, then the cell
size on the ground is about 1 m. For the orthoimage, it is appropriate
to choose a pixel spacing of 1 m or larger. Choosing a smaller pixel
size oversamples the original image.
For SPOT Pan images, a cell size of 10 meters is appropriate. Any
further enlargement from the original scene to the orthophoto does
not improve the image detail. For IRS-1C images, a cell size of 6
meters is appropriate.

LPS Project Manager Tour Guides

Frame Camera Tour Guide
Introduction With LPS Project Manager, you have access to many different types
of geometric models with which to create a block file. This tour guide
takes you through the steps with the frame camera model.
The graphic in Figure 37 represents the geometric relationship
between three images, control points, and check points. The control
points are shown at the positions that coincide with the image
features they are associated with. Initially, the input images are not
in the coordinate system of the control points. The input images are
usually in file (pixel) coordinates, which can be defined as an
arbitrary grid of coordinate values.
Figure 37: Geometric Relationship
The top image is

identified here
Tie points display

as red squares
Control points display

as red triangles
This graphic displays

the three overlapping
orthoimages in
the block

During triangulation, the control points are used to establish a
mathematical relationship between the camera, the photographs,
and the 3D ground surface. Once this mathematical relationship has
been defined, orthorectification can be performed. During
orthorectification, the input image grid coordinates are resampled
into the map coordinate system of the control points.
Before You Begin This tour guide uses frame camera images of Colorado Springs,
Colorado. They are National Aerial Photography Program (NAPP)
black and white aerial photographs at a 1:40000 photo scale. The
DEM used in this example has a ground resolution of 30 meters.
Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 1 hour, 15

minutes.
In this tour guide, you are going to perform the following basic steps:
• Create a new project.
• Add imagery to the block file.
• Define the camera model.
• Measure GCPs and check points.
• Use the automatic tie point collection function.
• Triangulate the images.
• Orthorectify the images.
• View the orthoimages.
• Save the block file.
Create a New In this section of the tour guide, you create a new project using
frame camera images of Colorado Springs, Colorado.
Project
Prepare the Block File
1. Click the LPS icon on the icon panel.
The LPS Project Manager opens.
LPS Project Manager Create a New Project / 70

Access LPS tools
using the toolbar
This is the Block Project

Tree View—make choices
here to view them in the
Project Graphic Status
window
This is the Project Graphic

Status window—you may
control the contents
with the tools on the
right side of the dialog
Images in the block file

appear here, in the
CellArray
2. Click the Create New Block File icon .

The Create New Block File dialog opens.
Click
OK
Type the
name of
the block
file here
3. Navigate to a folder where you have write permission.

4. Next to File name, type frame_tour, then press Enter on your
keyboard.
The *.blk extension, for a block file, is appended automatically.
The Block (.blk) File

When you use LPS Project Manager, you create block files. Block
files have the .blk extension. A block file may be made up of only
one image, a strip of images that are adjacent to one another, or
several strips of imagery.
The .blk file is a binary file. In it is all the information associated
with the block including imagery locations, camera information,
fiducial mark measurements, GCP measurements, and the like.
Block files can also be used in other LPS applications, such as
Stereo Analyst and Terrain Editor, for the collection of 3D features,
stereo viewing, and terrain editing.
5. Click OK to close the Create New Block File dialog.
Select Geometric Model Once you have created a block file, the Model Setup dialog opens.
Here, you select a geometric model that corresponds to the type of
camera associated with the images.
Choose the Click OK

category
Select Frame Camera

from the list
1. Click the Geometric Model Category dropdown list and select

Camera.
2. Click Frame Camera in the Geometric Model list.
3. Click OK to close the Model Setup dialog.
Define Block Properties The Block Property Setup dialog opens.

Click the Set
button to open
the Projection
Chooser
1. Click the Set button in the Horizontal Reference Coordinate

System section of the Block Property Setup dialog.
Click OK to accept the projection
2. Click the Standard tab in the Projection Chooser dialog.
3. Click the Categories dropdown list and select US State Plane -

NAD27 - Old USGS (DO154) Zone Numbers.
4. Click the Projection scroll bar, then select COLORADO CENTRAL

(3476).
5. Click OK to close the Projection Chooser dialog.
6. Click the Horizontal Units dropdown list and choose Meters.

In this example, the block file is in WGS84, so the vertical coordinate
system is also WGS84 by default. If the vertical system is different,
you must change it to match the block file.

Information you supplied in the Projection
Chooser displays here
Ensure that the information you provide in the Reference

Coordinate System section of the Block Property Setup dialog
is accurate. You are unable to return to this stage of the block
setup process to change projection information once it has been
set.
7. Click Next in the Block Property Setup dialog.

The Set Frame-Specific Information section displays.
Click OK
Type the
value here
8. Type 7000 in the Average Flying Height (meters) number field,

then press Enter.
The average flying height is the distance between the camera at the
time of exposure and the average ground elevation. The average
flying height can be determined by multiplying the focal length by
the image scale. You must supply an average flying height.
9. Click OK to close the Block Property Setup dialog.

Next, you choose the images that make up the block file.
The LPS CellArray

As you add images to the block file, they are listed in the LPS
CellArray. Each image has a series of columns associated with it.
The Row # column enables you to select an image specifically for
use with LPS Project Manager. For example, you may want to
generate pyramid layers for one image alone.
The Image ID column provides a numeric identifier for each
image in the block. You can change the Image ID by typing inside
the cell.
The Description field provides space for you to supply additional
information about the image, such as date of capture.
The > column lets you designate the image that is currently
active.
The Image Name column lists the directory path and file name
for each image. When the full path to the image is specified, the
corresponding Online column is green.
The Active column displays an X designating which images are
going to be used in the LPS Project Manager processes such as
automatic tie point generation, triangulation, and
orthorectification. By default, all images are active.
The final five columns’ status is indicated in terms of color: green
means the process is complete; red means the process is
incomplete. The color of the columns is controlled by a preference
setting. You can change the colors by going to the LPS category
of the Preference Editor, then to Status On Color and Status Off
Color.
The Pyr. column shows the presence of pyramid layers.
The Int. column shows if the fiducial marks have been measured.
The Ext. column shows if the final exterior orientation parameters
are complete.
The DTM column shows if you have created DTMs, such as a DEM
or a TIN, from the files in the block. This column is specifically
related to LPS Automatic Terrain Extraction functionality. For more
information about LPS Automatic Terrain Extraction, see Leica
Photogrammetry Suite Automatic Terrain Extraction User’s Guide.
The Ortho column shows if the images have been orthorectified.
The Online column shows if the images have a specified location.
Add Imagery to Now that you have provided general information about the block,
you can add images and create pyramid layers.
the Block
LPS Project Manager Add Imagery to the Block / 75

Add Frames
1. In the Block Project Tree View on the left side of the LPS Project
Manager, click Images.
Click the Images

folder to add
images
2. Select Edit -> Add Frame from the menu bar, or click the Add
Frame icon .
The Image File Name dialog opens.
Select the
first image
in the list
3. Navigate to /examples/orthobase/frame and select col90p1.img.
4. Hold down the Shift key and select the last *p1.img file in the list,
col92p1.img.
All three *p1.img images are selected and can be added to the block
file at once.

Click the last
file in the
range to add
to the block file
Click OK to add images to the block
5. Click OK to close the Image File Name dialog.

The three frame image files are loaded and display in the CellArray
at the bottom of the LPS Project Manager. You can resize this portion
of the LPS Project Manager so that the top window, the Project
Graphic Status window, is enlarged.
6. Click the plus sign next to the Images folder to see the list of
images in the frame_tour.blk file.

The images in the Images folder display in the CellArray. As you work through the
LPS Project Manager workflow, the color of the columns in the CellArray indicates completed tasks.
Compute Pyramid Layers Next, you compute pyramid layers for the images in the block file.
Pyramid layers are used to optimize image display and automatic tie
point collection.
LPS Project Manager Pyramid Layers

Pyramid layers generated by LPS Project Manager are based on a
binomial interpolation algorithm and a Gaussian filter. Using this
filter, image contents are preserved and computation times are
reduced. Pyramid layers generated by LPS Project Manager
overwrite those generated by ERDAS IMAGINE, which uses
different methods in pyramid generation.
1. Click the Edit menu, then choose the Compute Pyramid Layers
option.
The Compute Pyramid Layers dialog opens.

All Images Without
Pyramids is selected
Click OK to
by default
start computing
pyramid layers
for the images
2. In the Compute Pyramid Layers dialog, confirm that the All Images
Without Pyramids radio button is selected.
3. Click OK in the Compute Pyramid Layers dialog.

A progress bar displays at the bottom of the LPS Project Manager as
pyramid layers are created. When complete, the images’ rows
corresponding to the Pyr. column are all green.
Images in the block file All images now have pyramid layers,
indicated by the green Pyr. column
are identified here
Next, you define the camera model.
Define the Camera When you define the camera model, you provide information about
the position of the fiducials (interior orientation) as well as the
Model
camera position (exterior orientation) about the camera that
collected the images.
Enter Specific Camera

Information
1. Select Edit -> Frame Editor from the menu bar, or click the Frame
Properties icon .
The Frame Camera Frame Editor dialog opens, displaying
information about the active image listed in the CellArray, indicated
with the >, col90p1.img.
LPS Project Manager Define the Camera Model / 79

The current image
is listed here
Click to define a new camera
2. In the Sensor Name section, click the New Camera button.

The Camera Information dialog opens.
Type the camera

name here
Type details about

the camera here
3. Enter Zeiss RMK A 15/23 in the Camera Name text field.
4. Enter 153.124 in the Focal Length (mm) number field.
5. Enter -0.002 in the Principal Point xo (mm) number field.
6. Enter 0.002 in the Principal Point yo (mm) number field.
For the complete calibration report, see the ReadMe file,

readme.doc, located in /examples/orthobase/frame.

Add Fiducial Marks
1. Click the Fiducials tab in the Camera Information dialog.

The options for fiducials display.
Click OK to
accept the
fiducial
measurements
Increase the
number of
fiducials here
2. Type 8 in the Number of Fiducials number field, then press Enter

on your keyboard.
The CellArray is populated by the additional fiducials, which are listed
in the Row # column.
3. Enter the following information in the Fiducials tab CellArray:
Row # Film X (mm) Film Y (mm)

1 -103.947 -103.952
2 103.945 103.924
3 -103.937 103.927
4 103.958 -103.952
5 -112.996 -0.005
6 112.990 -0.015
7 0.003 113.001
8 0.026 -112.971
You can also use the Load button on the Camera Information
dialog to load fiducial measurements contained in an ASCII file.
4. Click OK to close the Camera Information dialog.

The Frame Camera Frame Editor dialog remains, displaying the new
camera information in the Sensor Name field.
Measure Fiducials of the In this section, you are going to measure the fiducial marks in each
Images of the three images.

1. Click the Interior Orientation tab of the Frame Camera Frame
Editor dialog.
The tools for setting up the image’s interior orientation information
display. The image is identified in the title bar of the dialog.
Measure fiducials on the

Interior Orientation tab
Fiducials’ pixel coordinates You use this icon to

are displayed here identify the fiducials
To change the color of the fiducial marks, click in the Color

column, and select the color you would like from the Color
menu.
2. Make sure the first Fiducial Orientation icon is selected.
Understanding Fiducial Orientation

To select the proper fiducial orientation, you should compare the
axis of the photo-coordinate system, which is defined in the
calibration report, with the orientation of the image.
The four possible fiducial orientations are, in order:
1. photo-coordinate system parallel to image orientation,
2. image rotated 90° relative to the photo-coordinate system,
3. image rotated 180° relative to the photo-coordinate system,

and
4. image rotated 270° degrees relative to the photo-coordinate

system.
5. Click the View icon .

A Main View opens on top of the Frame Camera Frame Editor dialog,
with an OverView that shows the entire image and a Detail View that
shows the part of the image that is within the Link Box in the Main
View. It is usually easiest to measure points in the Detail View.
If changing the color of the Link Cursor makes it easier to collect

fiducials, you may do so by right clicking in the view, selecting
Link Box Color, and choosing a different color.
This is the Main View The image is identified here This is the OverView
This is the
Link Cursor
This is the
Detail View
You use this icon to center the

Link Cursor over the fiducial mark
The approximate area of the first fiducial is identified by the Link
Cursor in the Main View, and the area within the Link Box displays in
the Detail View.

Link Cursor Elements
The Link Cursor, which appears in the Main View and the
OverView, is a useful tool to resize the display of a feature of
interest in any of the views. It is composed of various parts:
Link Box
Crosshair
To reposition the Link Cursor grab a crosshair or the center of the

link box and drag it to the desired location. To resize the Link Box,
grab a corner and adjust it larger or smaller. To rotate the Link
Box, middle-hold inside the Link Box and drag right or left.
You use the Link Cursor extensively to select control, check, and
tie points.
6. Click in the center of the Link Box in the Main View and drag it so
that the cross-shaped fiducial mark is in the center.
The fiducial mark is centered in the Detail View. You can adjust its
display (zoom in or out) by adjusting the size of the Link Box.
Click here, in the

center, to place the
fiducial mark
7. Click the Place Image Fiducial icon on the Interior Orientation

tab.
Your cursor becomes a crosshair when placed over any one of the
views.
8. Measure the first fiducial by clicking in its center in the Detail View.
The fiducial point is measured and reported in the Image X and
Image Y columns of the CellArray, and the display automatically
moves to the approximate location of the next fiducial. This is
controlled by the Set Automatic Move tool , which is enabled by
default.

LPS Project Manager moves Coordinates for the first
to the next fiducial to be measured fiducial have been recorded
You can click the Lock icon to lock the Place Image Fiducial
icon . This means that you can use the icon repeatedly
without having to select it each time you measure a fiducial in
the image.

Using Auto Locate
Rather than measure each fiducial independently, LPS provides
the Auto Locate option. Used in conjunction with the Set
Automatic Center icon , you can apply Auto Locate to find and
mark fiducials in the one image displayed, in only active images in
the block file, in the unsolved images, or in all images in the block
file. A report generates to show you the results. If the results are
acceptable and you apply them, the fiducial marks are then
indicated in the view and CellArray. Of course, you can review the
position of individual fiducial marks and change the location, if
necessary.
9. Measure the remaining fiducials, including side fiducials, using step

6 through step 8.
NOTE: Rather than plus signs (+), fiducials 5 through 8 display as

dots in the Detail View. These are side fiducials.
This is a side fiducial
When all eight fiducials are measured, the display returns to the first
fiducial mark.
Your solution (displayed over the Solve button on the Interior
Orientation tab of the Frame Camera Frame Editor) should be less
than a pixel.

LPS Project Manager returns All fiducials have RMSE is
to the first fiducial been measured reported here
NOTE: If your solution is greater than 0.33 pixels, remeasure some

of your fiducials. Frequently, the first few measurements are not
quite as accurate as the later measurements. To remeasure, click in
the row of the Point # you wish to change, click the Select icon ,
then reposition the fiducial mark in the Detail View.
Enter Exterior Orientation

Information
1. Click the Exterior Information tab on the Frame Camera Frame

Editor dialog.

Enter exterior orientation
information in these fields
2. Enter the following information in the Value number fields. These

values correspond to the exterior orientation of the camera that
captured the image col90p1.
Xo Yo Zo Omega Phi Kappa

Value 666700.000 115900.000 8800.000 0.0000 0.0000 90.0000
3. Click the Set Status checkbox.
4. Confirm that the Set Status dropdown list is set to Initial.
Edit the Remaining Now, you need to measure fiducials and define the exterior
Images in the Project orientation for the remaining images in the block file.
1. Click on the Sensor tab in the Frame Camera Frame Editor dialog.
This returns you to the beginning of the process. You complete this
process two more times, once for each remaining image in the block
file, measuring fiducials and providing exterior orientation for each.
2. Click the Next button on the Frame Camera Frame Editor dialog.

The Image File Name on the Sensor tab changes to the next
image, col91p1, in the CellArray. The image also displays in the
views.
3. Note that the camera, Zeiss RMK A 15/23, is the same as that
entered for the first image.
4. Click on the Interior Orientation tab.
5. Measure the fiducial marks in the second image, col91p1.
If you need to review the steps required to collect fiducial

measurements, refer to “Measure Fiducials of the Images” on
page 81.
Once you have finished measuring the eight fiducials in the col91p1
image, the RMSE displays.
6. After fiducials for the second image have been measured, click the
Exterior Information tab.
7. Enter the following information in the Value number fields:

Value 666700.000 119400.000 8800.000 0.0000 0.0000 90.0000
9. Confirm that the Set Status dropdown list displays Initial.
10. Click the Sensor tab.
11. Click the Next button on the Frame Camera Frame Editor dialog to
advance to the final image in the block file, col92p1.
12. Click the Interior Orientation tab.
13. Measure the fiducial marks in the third image, col92p1.
14. After fiducials for the third image have been measured, click the
Exterior Information tab.
15. Enter the following information in the Value number fields, which
corresponds to the position of the camera as it captured the last
image in the block file, col92p1.

Value 666800.000 122900.000 8800.000 0.0000 0.0000 90.0000
17. Confirm the Set Status dropdown list displays Initial.

18. Click OK to close the Frame Camera Frame Editor dialog.
Note that the Int. column of the CellArray is green, indicating that
the interior orientation information has been specified for each
image in the block file.
The interior orientation information for all images in the block file
is complete, indicated by the green Int. column
An alternate method to the one presented here is to process

each element completely (that is, identify all the sensors,
measure all of the fiducials, then input all of the exterior
orientation information), instead of proceeding image-by-
image.
19. Click File -> Save to save the interior orientation information to the
block file, or click the Save icon .
Measure GCPs and Now that you have measured the fiducials and provided interior
orientation for each image that makes up the block, you are ready
Check Points to use the Point Measurement tool to measure the position of GCPs,
tie points, and check points in the images. This determines exterior
orientation.
1. Select Edit -> Point Measurement from the menu bar.
NOTE: You may be prompted to select either the classic Point

Measurement Tool or the Stereo Point Measurement Tool. Use the
Classic Point Measurement Tool for this exercise.
You can also click the Point Measurement icon on the toolbar
to open this dialog.
The Point Measurement tool opens. It displays the first two images
in the block file, col90p1 and col91p1, in the Left View and the
Right View, respectively.
LPS Project Manager Measure GCPs and Check Points / 90

This is the reference CellArray: reference This is the file CellArray: coordinates from
coordinates display here the images (in pixels) display here
To change the color of points, click the Viewing Properties icon

to access the Viewing Properties dialog. In the Point
Table Info section, click the Advanced radio button, click the
Color checkbox, then click OK. This adds a Color column to the
reference CellArray and the file CellArray. You can then left-click
and choose the color you want.
The Point Measurement tool consists of a tool palette, a reference

CellArray (which gives coordinate values), a file CellArray (which
gives pixel values), and six views in two groups of three that display
different views of two of the image files in a block file. In this case,
the first two files in the block, col90p1 and col91p1, display. This
is a single dialog that can be resized by dragging the corners and
sides.
For information about the tools contained in the Classic Point

Measurement tool, see the On-Line Help.

Collect Point ID 1002 The next series of steps takes you through the process of collecting
a GCP.
Real-World Application
When you use LPS Project Manager in your own work, you might
have a photo overview of an area along with other sources of
information to locate GCPs. This type of application is simulated in
this tour guide using a reference image, a reference sketch, and a
Detail View of each control point.
GCPs are typically placed in areas such as road intersections,
building corners, or landmarks. You should avoid placing control
points on features that vary, such as forest lines and water
features. You might use a 1:24000 topographic map, state
surveys, or sketches drawn in the field to help you locate
appropriate points.
In general, the process of collecting GCPs involves studying the
topographic map for the location of a specific point, such as a road
intersection. Once you have determined its location, you use LPS
Project Manager to collect and record the position. Then, you
check the reference image to see where that point is located.
Control point collection can be a time-consuming process, but
accurate collection is imperative to the successful triangulation
and orthorectification of images in your block file.
Once you have collected some well-distributed GCPs that are
common to two or more images in the block file, you can perform
triangulation. Triangulation ties the images together so that they
can then be orthorectified and linked together.
NOTE: The minimum amount is three vertical GCPs (with a Z

coordinate) and two horizontal GCPs (with X and Y coordinates)
per photo. If you use the auto tie function, you can collect fewer
GCPs.
1. Click the Add button in the upper right-hand corner of the Point
Measurement tool to add a new Point #.
This adds a new row to the reference CellArray in the lower portion
of the Point Measurement tool.
Point IDs are added sequentially, but can be edited
2. Click in the Point ID column and type the new ID number, 1002.

Specify the Type and Usage
1. Click in the Type column to access the dropdown list.
2. Select Full from the dropdown list.

A Full GCP has X, Y, and Z (elevation) coordinates.
3. Click in the Usage column to access the dropdown list.
4. Select Control from the dropdown list.

Control denotes a control point (versus a check point or tie point).
Next, you are going to use a reference image of the area as well as
a sketch and Detail View of control point 1002 to collect it in the
image.
Collect Point ID 1002 in col90p1

Figure 45 on page 129 shows you where points are located in the first
image in the block, col90p1. You refer back to this graphic as you
collect points. Point ID locations are indicated with boxes, and
labeled accordingly.
Figure 38 is an example of the type of sketch produced in the field
that you might use to locate the precise location of a point. BM, or
benchmark, stands for the location of a point with known
coordinates. Also included is a Detail View of Point ID 1002.
NOTE: Each one of the following points also has a reference sketch
and Detail View to help you select the point.
Figure 38: Reference Sketch and Detail View of Point ID 1002
1. Make sure that the Select Point icon is active in the Point
Measurement tool palette.
2. Using Figure 45 on page 129 as a guide, move the Link Cursor in the
OverView until you can see the area where Point ID 1002 is
located.
3. In the Main View, move the Link Cursor until the control point feature
is visible in the Detail View. Resize the Link Box as necessary in the
views.

4. Click the Create Point icon in the Point Measurement tool
palette.
5. Using Figure 38 as a guide, click in the Detail View to place control

point 1002.
The point is placed in the views corresponding to col90p1, and
labeled 1002. The file CellArray reflects the coordinates of the point.
The control point displays in both the File coordinates of the control point
Main View and the Detail View in the first image display here

Now that you know the approximate area in the reference image and
the exact location in the Detail View, you are going to collect Point
ID 1002 in the second image of the block file, col91p1.
Figure 46 on page 130 is a reference image that shows you where
points are located in the second image in the block, col91p1. You
refer back to this graphic as you collect points. Point ID locations
are indicated with boxes, and labeled accordingly.

1. Using Figure 46 on page 130 as a guide, apply the Select Point icon
and Create Point icon to collect Point ID 1002 in the

second image, col91p1.
2. Check your results against the following X File and Y File

coordinates for Point ID 1002.
Image X File Y File

col90p1 952.625 819.625
col91p1 165.875 846.625
3. If your X File and Y File coordinates do not match those above

within two pixels, type the correct values into the file CellArray.
Enter Reference Coordinates for Point ID 1002

Since you have successfully located Point ID 1002 in the two
images, col90p1 and col91p1, you are ready to enter the reference
control point coordinates. In this exercise, reference control points’
coordinates are provided for you.
In “SPOT Pushbroom Sensor Tour Guide”, instead of typing in

values, you are going to collect reference control points from a
reference image displayed in a view.
1. Click in the X Reference column corresponding to Point ID 1002.
2. Type the value 665228.955 in the X Reference column.
3. Click in the Y Reference column corresponding to Point ID 1002.
4. Type the value 115012.472 in the Y Reference column.
5. Click in the Z Reference column corresponding to Point ID 1002.
6. Type the value 1947.672 in the Z Reference column, then press

Enter on your keyboard.
X, Y, and Z coordinates You can change the color display

are reported here of the points in the views
7. When you are finished, click the Save button in the Point
Measurement tool.
Now, you are ready to place the second control point.

Collect Point ID 1003
1. Click in the Type column to access the dropdown list and select Full.
2. Click in the Usage column to access the dropdown list and select
Control.
located.
views.

palette.

point 1003.
The point is placed in the views and labeled 1003. The file CellArray
reflects the coordinates of the point.

ID 1003 in the second image of the block file, col91p1. That image
displays in the right three views (the Right View in the Point
Measurement tool).
1. Check Figure 46 on page 130 to locate the position of Point ID 1003

in the reference image.
2. Use the Select Point and Create Point icons to collect Point
ID 1003 in the second image, col91p1.

Point ID 1003 is visible in all three images that make up the block
file. Right now, you can only see the images col90p1 and col91p1
in the Point Measurement tool. Using the Right View dropdown list,
you can display the third image in the block, col92p1, and collect
the control point in that image.
NOTE: In a real-world scenario, the images you work with may be

much larger than those provided for this example, and would load
slowly in the views. Therefore, you may want to select all of the
points located in the two images currently displayed in the Right
View and Left View before loading another image. In the case of
this tour guide, however, the images are small enough so that
changing the displayed image does not take much time.
1. In the Point Measurement tool, click on the Right View dropdown

list.
2. From the Right View dropdown list, click col92p1.

The third image, col92p1, displays in the right three views.
3. Using Figure 47 on page 131, locate Point ID 1003 in the reference

image.
ID 1003 in the third image, col92p1.

Image X File Y File

col90p1 1857.875 639.125
col91p1 1064.875 646.375
col92p1 286.875 639.125


1. Click in the X Reference column corresponding to Point ID 1003

and type the value 664456.22.
2. Click in the Y Reference column corresponding to Point ID 1003

3. Click in the Z Reference column corresponding to Point ID 1003

and type the value 1988.820, then press Enter on your keyboard.
Measurement tool.
When you have finished, the Point Measurement tool looks like the
following:
All three images in the block file are listed in the file CellArray—
you maneuver between images using the Left View and
Right View dropdown lists
Set Automatic (x, y) Drive LPS Project Manager provides some automatic functions to help you
Function select GCPs more rapidly. One such function is the Automatic (x, y)
Drive function. This function becomes available after you have
selected two points, but is actually implemented after collection of
the third point.

1. In the Point Measurement tool palette, click the Automatic (x, y)
Drive icon .
The icon changes to .

Using the Automatic (x, y) Drive function, LPS Project Manager
approximates the location of the point in the second and any
subsequent images based on the location of the point in the first
image.
Collect Point ID 1004 Point ID 1004 is located in the images col91p1 and col92p1. The
last point you collected was in col92p1, which displays in the Right
View. You are going to adjust the Left View to display col91p1
before you begin.
1. Click the Left View dropdown list and select col91p1.

The image col91p1 displays in the left three views; col92p1
displays in the right three views.
Control.
located.

views.

palette.
5. Using Figure 40 as a guide, click in the Detail View to place the

control point 1004.
The point is placed in the views and labeled 1004. The file CellArray
reflects the coordinates of the point.

ID 1004 in the third image in the block file, col92p1. That image is
in the right three views (the Right View in the Point Measurement
tool).
1. Check Figure 47 on page 131 to locate the position of Point ID 1004

in the reference image.

Image X File Y File

col91p1 1839.52 1457.43
col92p1 1050.60 1465.23




Measurement tool.

Collect Point ID 1005 The next control point, Point ID 1005, is located in all three of the
images in the block file. It is usually best to select control points in
the images’ order in the block file (that is, collect in col90p1, then
col91p1, then col92p1). This order corresponds to the images’
order in the strip. First, you use the Left View and Right View
dropdown lists to get the images back in order.
2. Click the Right View dropdown list and select col91p1.
Specify Type and Usage
Control.
located.
views.

palette.

point 1005.
Note that, because you set the Automatic (x, y) Drive function,
LPS Project Manager adjusts the images in the views to display
the same approximate area in the second image, col91p1.
1. Use the Select Point and Create Point icons to collect Point ID 1005
in the second image, col91p1.

Image X File Y File

col90p1 1769.450 1508.430
col91p1 1007.250 1518.170
col92p1 224.670 1510.670




Measurement tool.
Collect Point ID 1006 Point ID 1006 is also located in all three images that make up the
block file.

Control.
located.
views.

palette.

point 1006.
1. Use the Select Point and Create Point icons to collect Point ID 1006
in the second image, col91p1.


Image X File Y File

col90p1 1787.875 2079.625
col91p1 1023.625 2091.390
col92p1 215.125 2083.790




Measurement tool.
When you are finished selecting the control points and entering
reference coordinates into the CellArrays, they look like the
following.
Each Point ID has two or more sets of

file (pixel) coordinates associated with it
Input Check Next, you are going to input two check points into the reference
CellArray and the file CellArray. Check points are input in the same
Points
way as control points. The only difference is the Check designation
in the Usage column.
NOTE: Check points are additional GCPs that are used to quantify the
accuracy of the triangulation. Check points are not needed to
actually perform the triangulation.
LPS Project Manager Input Check Points / 104

Collect Point ID 2001 Like control points, it is best to select the check points in the same
order as the images in the block file.
Check.
located.
3. In the Main View, move the Link Cursor until the check point feature
views.

palette.
5. Using Figure 43 as a guide, click in the Detail View to place check

point 2001.

The Automatic (x, y) Drive function is still active, so LPS Project
Manager adjusts the display of the second image in the views
accordingly.
ID 2001 in the second image, col91p1.

Image X File Y File

col90p1 915.02 2095.71
col91p1 160.90 2127.84




Measurement tool.
Collect Point ID 2002 Point ID 2002 is located in the last two images of the block file,
col91p1 and col92p1.
NOTE: The same image cannot be displayed in both the Right View
and the Left View at the same time. This is why you are instructed
to select from the Right View dropdown list first.

Check.
located.
3. In the Main View, move the Link Cursor until the check point feature
views.

palette.
5. Using Figure 44 as a guide, click in the Detail View to place check

point 2002.

Image X File Y File

col91p1 2032.030 2186.530
col92p1 1227.375 2199.125





4. When you are finished, click Save in the Point Measurement tool.
When you are finished, the Point Measurement tool looks like the
following:

All of the Point IDs are listed
Images containing the point display
in the reference CellArray
here—not all images contain all points
Check points are designated
in the Usage column
Perform The tie point generation process measures the image coordinate
positions of the control points, which are present in two or more
Automatic Tie overlapping images.
Point Generation
1. In the Point Measurement tool palette, click the Automatic Tie Point
Collection Properties icon .

The Automatic Tie Point Generation Properties dialog opens.
LPS Project Manager Perform Automatic Tie Point Generation / 109

Use all of the images
in the block file
Exterior/Header/CGP
information should
be checked
Use Layer 1
2. In the General tab, confirm that the Images Used radio button is
set to All Available.
3. Confirm that the Initial Type radio button is set to

Exterior/Header/GCP.
This option tells LPS Project Manager to use the initial exterior
orientation parameters to calculate image topology.
4. Confirm that the Image Layer Used for Computation is set to 1.
Change the number of

points to 15 per image
5. Click the Distribution tab in the Automatic Tie Point Generation

Properties dialog.
6. Click in the Intended Number of Points Per Image field and type
15, then press Enter.
The actual number of points generated by auto tie is greater than or
less than 15. The number depends, in part, on the amount of overlap
between the images.
7. Confirm that the Keep All Points checkbox is off (unchecked).
8. Click the Run button in the Automatic Tie Point Generation

Properties dialog.
LPS Project Manager starts the automatic tie point generation
process, indicated by a progress bar at the bottom of the Point
Measurement tool. When complete, the tie points display in the
views. The tie points have the Type designation None (no X, Y, and
Z coordinates), and the Usage designation Tie in the reference
CellArray. Their coordinates are added to the file CellArray in the X
File and Y File columns.
LPS Project Manager Perform Automatic Tie Point Generation /

After the tie point generation process, the Auto Tie Summary dialog
opens to display tie point information for each image in the block file.
You may use this dialog to see overall auto tie results for the entire
block file.
9. Once you have finished reviewing the Auto Tie Summary dialog, click
Close.
Check Tie Point Accuracy You should always check a few of the tie points to ensure accuracy.
If a point is not as accurate as you would like, you may adjust it with
the Select Point tool, deactivate it by clicking to remove the X in the
Active column, or delete it by selecting the row in the CellArray (>
column) and clicking the Delete button.
1. In the reference CellArray, click the scroll bar and scroll to any point,
such as Point ID 2020.
2. Click in the > column to display Point ID 2020.

The point displays in the views. This appears to be an acceptable tie
point.
LPS Project Manager Perform Automatic Tie Point Generation / 111

Tie points have File Coordinates, which are listed in
the file CellArray, but no Reference coordinates
3. Click in the > column of other Point IDs to see where tie points were
placed.
NOTE: Since all tie points are not common to all images, there can
be cases where the displayed images do not have corresponding tie
points. In such cases, verify the tie point by opening a different
adjacent image in one of the views. To do so, use the Left View or
Right View dropdown list.
4. If the position of a tie point needs to be adjusted, click the Select
Point icon and reposition it in the Detail View.
5. When you are finished reviewing the automatically generated tie

points, click the Save button.
6. Click the Close button to close the Point Measurement tool.
LPS Project Manager Perform Automatic Tie Point Generation /

Perform Aerial Now that you have obtained control, check, and tie points, LPS
Project Manager has all the information it needs to perform aerial
Triangulation
triangulation. This step in the process establishes the mathematical
relationship between the images that make up the block file and
calculates exterior orientation.
1. From the Edit menu, select Triangulation Properties.

The Aerial Triangulation dialog opens.
Click the
Point tab
You can also access the Aerial Triangulation dialog from the
Point Measurement tool by clicking the Triangulation Properties
icon .
2. Click the Point tab in the Aerial Triangulation dialog.

The Point options display. These control the statistical weights (the
confidence in their accuracy) assigned to the GCP parameters. These
are commonly defined by the precision of the GCPs (the reference
source). For example, a weight of 1 meter is better accuracy than a
weight of 5 meters.
Click Run to
generate the
summary
report
Click the Type

dropdown list
LPS Project Manager Perform Aerial Triangulation / 113

3. In the GCP Type and Standard Deviations section, click the Type
dropdown list and select Same Weighted Values.
4. Click the Run button to run the aerial triangulation.

A Triangulation Summary dialog generates and opens.
Click Update
Click to view the report
Find Information in the You may wish to consult the Triangulation Report for more detailed
Triangulation Report numbers corresponding to the triangulation. You can save the report
as a text file for future reference.
1. In the Triangulation Summary dialog, click the Report button.

The Triangulation Report opens.

Scroll to see all
of the report
2. Resize the Triangulation Report so that it is all visible in the window.
Check the Results
1. Scroll down until you reach The Output of Self-calibrating Bundle

Block Adjustment section of the report.
The standard error of the last iteration is the most important

2. Note the standard error of iteration number 3.
This is the standard deviation of unit weight, and measures the
global quality of that iteration.
3. Note the exterior orientation parameters.
These are the exterior orientation parameters associated with each

image in the block file.
4. Note the residuals of the control points and the residuals of the
check points.
The control point X, Y, and Z residuals define the accuracy in both

the average residual and the geometric mean residual. The X, Y, and
Z residuals of the check points serve as an independent check in
defining the average quality of the solution.
5. Scroll down to the residuals of image points section of the

Triangulation Report.

These are the photo or image coordinate residuals. They can be used
to determine the less accurate points. The inaccurate points
generally have large residuals.
Save the Triangulation If you save the Triangulation Report, you can always refer back to it.
Report
1. From the File menu of the Editor, select Save As.

The Save As dialog opens.
Click OK
Type the
name of
the ASCII
file here
2. Navigate to a folder in which you have write permission.

3. In the File name text field, type the name frame_report.txt, then
press Enter.
4. Click OK in the Save As dialog.
5. When you are finished viewing the Triangulation Report, select File
-> Close in the Editor.
The Triangulation Summary dialog is still open.
To open the Triangulation Report in ERDAS IMAGINE, click the

Tools menu in the ERDAS IMAGINE menu bar. Then, select Edit
Text Files. Use the Open icon to open the report in the
IMAGINE Text Editor dialog.
Update the Exterior

Orientation
1. In the Triangulation Summary dialog, click the Update button to

update the exterior orientation parameters.
This replaces the Initial exterior orientation parameters you entered
during the measurement of fiducials with the exterior orientation
computed by LPS Project Manager based on control and tie points in
the images making up the block file.
You also have the option to use check points to determine

exterior orientation. That option is located in the Aerial
Triangulation dialog, Advanced Options tab.
2. Click the Close button to close the Triangulation Summary dialog.
3. In the Aerial Triangulation dialog, click the Accept button to accept

the triangulation parameters.
4. Click OK in the Aerial Triangulation dialog to close it.

The Project Graphic Status window and CellArray of the LPS Project
Manager update to reflect the completion of the exterior orientation
step. Notice that the Ext. column is now green.
5. Click the Images folder to see the graphic display of the block file in
the Project Graphic Status window.

The Ext. column is green, indicating the exterior orientation has been calculated
Ortho Resample The next step creates orthorectified images of your block file images.
Orthorectified images have fewer relief displacements and geometric
the Imagery
errors than nonorthorectified images, and thus are considered more
accurate. The orthorectified images display objects in their real-
world X, Y, and Z positions.
1. On the LPS Project Manager toolbar, click the Ortho Resampling icon
.
The Ortho Resampling dialog opens on the General tab.
LPS Project Manager Ortho Resample the Imagery / 119

Choose DEM as
the DTM Source
Set the Output

Cell Sizes
The first image

in the block
is identified here
2. Click the DTM Source dropdown list, then select DEM.

The DEM file is used to supply elevation information to create the
orthorectified imagery.
3. Confirm that the Vertical Units are set to Meters.
4. Click the dropdown list associated with the DEM File Name, and
select Find DEM.
5. In the File Selector, navigate to /examples/orthobase/frame and

select colspr_dem.img as the DEM File.
6. Click OK in the File Selector dialog.
7. Change the Output Cell Sizes for X and Y to 4.0.

This value is determined based on the ground resolution of the
images. See Table 3 on page 24 for additional information.
8. Click the Advanced tab at the top of the Ortho Resampling dialog.

Resample method
displays here
To add the other

images in the
block file, click
this button
9. Click the Resample Method dropdown list and select Nearest

Neighbor.
10. Click the checkbox next to Ignore Value, and keep the value of 0.
By default, LPS Project Manager assumes you only want to generate
an orthoimage for the first image in the block file. You can use the
Add Multiple utility to add all of the images in your block file to the
Ortho Resampling dialog.
11. Click the Add Multiple button located at the bottom of the dialog.
The Add Multiple Outputs dialog opens.
Click this checkbox

so that all orthos
have the same
cell size
12. Click the checkbox next to Use Current Cell Sizes.

This ensures each output orthoimage has X and Y cell sizes of 4.0.
13. Click OK in the Add Multiple Outputs dialog.

14. Click OK in the Confirm Existing Ortho dialog.
The other images in the block file are added to the CellArray in the
Ortho Resampling dialog.
All images and corresponding orthoimages

are listed here
15. Use the scroll bar at the bottom of the CellArray to see the
parameters for each of the files in the block.
16. Click OK in the Ortho Resampling dialog.

A status dialog opens, tracking the ortho resampling process.
17. When the status dialog reaches 100% complete, click the OK button
to dismiss it.
The presence of the status dialog is controlled by a preference.

It is located in the User Interface & Session category of the
Preference Editor: Keep Job Status Box.
View the First, you can see the orthos display in the LPS Project Graphic
Status window.
Orthoimages
Display Graphic View
1. Click the Orthos folder in the Block Project Tree View.
LPS Project Manager View the Orthoimages / 122

You can also use the Project Graphic Status window to get
information about points in the orthoimages.
2. Click on one of the points (a square, a triangle, or a circle) displayed

in the Project Graphic Status window.

In this example, the point is a tie point and is located in the first two
images in the block file. The residual values are acceptably low.
3. Click Dismiss to close the Point Data dialog.

Now that the images have been ortho resampled, you can check how
well they fit together in a Viewer.
Use the Viewer
1. From the ERDAS IMAGINE icon panel, click the Viewer icon.
NOTE: If necessary, select the type of Viewer you want to work with:
Classic Viewer or Geospatial Light Table.
2. Click the Open icon to access the Select Layer To Add dialog.
3. Navigate to the location in which you saved the orthorectified

images.
4. Click the image orthocol90p1.img, then Shift-click

orthocol92p1.img.

Select multiple images
to add to the Viewer
5. In the Select Layer To Add dialog, click the Raster Options tab.
6. Deselect the Clear Display checkbox.
7. Click to select the Fit to Frame and Background Transparent

checkboxes.
The default settings of these options can be defined in the

Viewer category of the Preference Editor.
8. Click the Multiple tab and confirm that the Multiple Independent
Files radio button is selected.
9. Click OK in the Select Layer To Add dialog.
10. From the View menu, select Arrange Layers.

The images display in the Viewer. If you would like to rearrange the
images in the Viewer, click and drag the images in the Arrange
Layers dialog accordingly, then click Apply.
Magnify Areas of Overlap Now, you can check the areas of overlap to see how well LPS Project
Manager orthorectified the images. Take special note of features
such as roads, rivers, and parcels of land.
1. In the Viewer, click the Zoom In icon .
2. Click on an area in the Viewer where two of the images obviously

overlap.
3. Apply the Zoom In icon as many times as necessary to see the

portion of overlap clearly in the Viewer.

You can see that LPS Project Manager successfully put images into
the same reference coordinate space. In the following picture, the
presence of two images is indicated by the side fiducial mark. Notice
how the road on either side of the side fiducial matches very well.
The edge of the image can This road is common to both

be seen here, indicated by images and matches well
the side fiducial mark
Use the Swipe Utility You can use the Swipe utility to see how well the images overlap.
1. Click the Utility menu on the Viewer menu bar.
2. Choose Swipe.
The Viewer Swipe dialog opens.

Click on the slider
and move the mouse
back and forth to
adjust the swipe
position
3. Right-click in the Viewer to access the Quick View menu.
4. Click Fit Image to Window.
5. Click the slider bar in the Viewer Swipe dialog and move it to the left
and right to see how well the top image, col92p1, overlaps the
others.
You can also choose the Horizontal radio button from the
Viewer Swipe dialog.
6. When you are finished, click Cancel in the Viewer Swipe dialog.
7. Click Close in the Arrange Layers dialog.
8. Once you are done examining the orthoimages, choose File | Close
from the Viewer menu bar.
Save and Close

the Block File
1. Now that you have verified the accuracy of the LPS Project Manager
output orthoimages, in the LPS Project Manager, click the File menu,
then select Save, or click the Save icon .
Notice that all of the columns are green—with the exception of the
DTM column which is a separate process—indicating that all of the
process steps have been executed. You can open the complete
project any time you like.
LPS Project Manager Save and Close the Block File / 127
All of the columns related to LPS Project Manager
are green; the project is complete
The DTM column is still red, which indicates that DTMs were not
generated from the images in the block file. Use LPS Automatic
Terrain Extraction (ATE) to create DTMs. For more information,
see Leica Photogrammetry Suite Automatic Terrain Extraction
User’s Guide.
2. To exit LPS Project Manager, choose File -> Close from the menu.
3. To exit LPS, choose File -> Exit from the menu.
4. If you want to exit ERDAS IMAGINE, select Session -> Exit

IMAGINE.
Conclusions In this example, you have learned that the use of ground control can
greatly improve the accuracy of your output orthoimages. The more
accurate your ground control, the better quality of your output.
Next, you can see how to orthorectify imagery without ground
control or a DEM.
LPS Project Manager Conclusions / 128

Reference Images
Figure 45: Reference Image of col90p1
1003
1002
1005
1006
2001
LPS Project Manager Reference Images / 129

1003
1002
1004
1005
2001 1006
2002

1003
1004
1005
1006
2002

Digital Camera Tour Guide
Introduction Using LPS Project Manager, you have access to many different types
of geometric models with which to create and orthorectify a block of
images. This tour guide takes you through the steps using the digital
camera model.
This tour guide demonstrates the ability of LPS Project Manager to
orthorectify imagery without ground control or a DEM to very high
accuracy. In this case, because the data you use also has airborne
GPS information (which details the exact position of the camera at
the time of image acquisition), the need for collecting ground control
is eliminated.
After defining the interior orientation and exterior orientation
parameters, you can proceed directly to auto tie and
orthorectification of the input images. Figure 48 shows the Import
Options dialog you can use to load orientation information.
Figure 48: Imported Orientation Information
Information about the

exact location of the
camera at the time of
image exposure
eliminates the need
for you to collect
ground control
Before You Begin The data you use with this tour guide comes from southeast Spain.
The data is 1:45000 scale (ground pixel size of .40 meters) imagery
that was collected using a Kodak DCS 420 digital camera.
Approximate completion time for this tutorial is 45 minutes.
LPS Project Manager Before You Begin / 133

• Add imagery to the block file.
• Define the camera model.
• Perform automatic tie point collection.
• Perform aerial triangulation.
• Save and close the block file.
Create a New In this section of the tour guide, you create a new project using three
digital camera images of southeast Spain. In this case, the images
Project are .tif images, but you can also use other formats such as .jpg,
.img, MrSid, raw and generic binary, and Grid.

Access LPS tools
using the toolbar

window


appear here, in the
CellArray
2. Click the Create New Block File icon .

The Create New Block File dialog opens.
Click OK
Type the name of

the block file here

4. Next to File name, type digital_tour, then press Enter on your
keyboard.
The *.blk extension, which stands for block file, is appended
automatically.

The Model Setup dialog opens.
Select Geometric Model
Click OK
Select the Camera
category
Click to choose
Digital Camera
1. Click the Geometric Model Category dropdown list and select

Camera.
2. Click in the Geometric Model section and select the Digital

Camera.
3. Click OK in the Model Setup dialog.

The Block Property Setup dialog opens.
Initially, the
projection is
Geographic
(Lat/Lon), but
you can change
it by clicking
the Set button
Define Block Properties
1. In the Horizontal Reference Coordinate System section of the

Block Property Setup dialog, click the Set button.
The Projection Chooser dialog opens.

The information you supply in
the Custom tab is transferred to
the Block Property Setup dialog
2. Click the Custom tab in the Projection Chooser dialog.
3. Click the Projection Type dropdown list and select UTM.
4. Click the Spheroid Name dropdown list and select WGS84.
5. Confirm that the Datum Name dropdown list shows WGS84.
6. Type 30 in the UTM Zone field and press Enter, or use the increment
nudgers to the right of the field.
7. Confirm that the NORTH or SOUTH dropdown list shows North.
8. Click OK in the (Edited) Projection Chooser dialog.
9. In the Block Property Setup dialog, confirm that the Horizontal

Units are set to Meters.
In this example, the block file is in WGS84, so the vertical coordinate
system is also WGS84 by default. If the vertical system is different,
you must change it to match the block file.
By default,
the vertical
displays WGS84

For more information about coordinate systems, see the On-Line
Help.
10. Click the Next button in the Block Property Setup dialog.
Import Exterior The Set Frame-Specific Information section of the Block Property
Orientation Parameters Setup dialog opens.
Click the Import Exterior

Orientation Parameters button
When these images were acquired, the position of the aircraft was
recorded using airborne GPS and INS technology. The airborne GPS
provides position information (that is, X, Y, and Z) about where the
camera/sensor is at the time of image capture. The INS provides
orientation information (that is, Omega, Phi, and Kappa) about
where the camera/sensor is at the time of image capture.
The accuracy of the measurements is within 2 meters in the X, Y, and
Z direction. In omega, phi, and kappa, the accuracy of the
measurements is within 0.1 degrees. With this information, there is
no need to collect GCPs in the images making up the block file.
Instead, you provide exterior orientation values.
1. Type the value 1248.168 in the Average Flying Height (meters)

section.
This value is derived by adding the Z values for each image in the
block (that is, 1851.948, 1853.994, and 1853.561) and dividing by
the number of files in the block. Then subtract the average elevation
value (that is, 605 meters) from the average Z value.
2. Click the Import Exterior Orientation Parameters button.

The Import ASCII File Name dialog opens.

Select the .dat
file for exterior
orientation
information
3. Navigate to /examples/orthobase/digital, select the file

airborne_GPS.dat, then click OK.
The Import Parameters dialog opens. In this dialog, you check to see
if the map information matches that which you specified during the
block setup.
Projection in the Import

Parameters dialog must
match Block Properties
If the projection information contained in the .dat file does not

match what you have specified for the block, the projection,
spheroid, datum, and units must be changed so that they do
match. You can use the Set button in the Import Parameters
dialog to specify the correct map projection.
4. Click OK in the Import Parameters dialog.

The Import Options dialog opens.

Click Input Preview
Click the Row Terminator

Character dropdown list
5. In the Field Definition tab of the Import Options dialog, click the
Row Terminator Character dropdown list.
6. Select Return NewLine (DOS) from the dropdown list.
7. Click the Input Preview tab on the Import Options dialog and view
the fields.
The images listed in Field 2

are the block file images
You can use the scroll bars

to see all of the information
provided for each image
8. Click OK in the Import Options dialog.

Once you click OK, the image names along with their X, Y, Z, Omega,
Phi, and Kappa values are noted, imported, and saved by LPS.
9. Click OK in the Block Property Setup dialog to complete block setup.

Add Imagery to The CellArray updates. The Image Name field is updated for you.
This is based on the information contained in the .dat file,
the Block
airborne_GPS.dat, that you selected during the Import Exterior
Orientation process. You can resize the elements of this dialog to suit
you.
To begin, the images need to be online. Online means that the image name is attached
and linked to the corresponding image file, which may be located on the hard drive or
the network.
1. Click on the Online cell associated with digcam1.tif.

The Digital Camera Frame Editor dialog opens.

Click the Attach button to attach the
image name to the image file
2. In the Digital Camera Frame Editor dialog, click the Attach button.
The Image File Name dialog opens. Next, you attach the files in the
block.
3. Navigate to /examples/orthobase/digital.
4. Click the Files of type dropdown list and select TIFF.
5. Click the file digcam1.tif.
Select the first file

in the block
6. Hold down the Shift key on the keyboard, then click the last *.tif file
in the list, digcam3.tif.
All of the *.tif files are selected for inclusion in the block file.
7. Click OK in the Image File Name dialog to return to the Digital

Camera Frame Editor dialog.
8. Click OK in the Digital Camera Frame Editor dialog.

You are returned to the LPS Project Manager. The cells in the Online
column of the CellArray are now green, indicating that the files in
/examples/orthobase/digital have been matched with the three
image files specified in the .dat file.
The complete path and image name are now listed in

the Image Name section of the LPS CellArray
The color of the columns is controlled by two preferences:

Status On Color and Status Off Color in the LPS category of
the Preference Editor.
Compute Pyramid Layers Next, you compute pyramid layers for the images in the block file.
Pyramid layers are used to optimize image display and automatic tie
point collection.
1. Click the Edit menu, then choose Compute Pyramid Layers.

The Compute Pyramid Layers dialog opens.
All Images
Without Pyramids
is selected by
Click OK to start default
computing pyramid
layers for the images
2. In the Compute Pyramid Layers dialog, confirm that the All Images
Without Pyramids radio button is selected.

A progress bar displays at the bottom of the LPS Project Manager as
pyramid layers are created for each image. When complete, the cells
corresponding to the Pyr. column are all green.

Now, the images have pyramid layers, indicated by the green Pyr. column
Define the Camera Since you have specified projection, imported exterior orientation
parameters, and identified the images to be used in the block file,
Model
now you need to define the camera model.
Enter Specific Camera

Information
1. On the LPS Project Manager toolbar, click the Frame Properties icon
.
The Digital Camera Frame Editor dialog opens. You attached the
images here, and now you specify the camera that goes with each
image.
Click New Camera
2. Click the New Camera button in the Digital Camera Frame Editor
dialog.
The Camera Information dialog opens.

You can save
this camera
information
for use with
other images
3. In the Camera Name section of the Camera Information dialog,

type the name Kodak DCS 420 Digital Camera.
4. In the Description field, type Project for Floodplain Mapping.
5. In the Focal Length field, type 28.0, then press Enter, or use the
increment nudgers to the right of the field to change the value.
6. Confirm that the Principal Point xo and the Principal Point yo

values are set to 0.0000.
Save the Camera

Information
1. Click the Save button to save the camera model information.

The Camera Parameter File Name dialog opens.
Camera files
are saved
with the .cam
extension
2. Navigate to a folder where you have write permission.

3. Confirm that the Files of type section says Camera File.
4. Type the name kodak_dcs420 in the File name field, then press
Enter on your keyboard. The .cam extension is automatically
appended for you.
5. Click OK in the Camera Parameter File Name dialog.
6. Click OK in the Camera Information dialog.

You are returned to the Digital Camera Frame Editor dialog. The
camera information you supplied is located in the Sensor Name
section of the dialog.
The correct camera is identified here
Check Camera
Information of the Other
Images
1. Click the Next button to display the information for digcam2, which
displays in the Image File Name section of the dialog.
2. Confirm that the Sensor Name dropdown list shows Kodak DCS
420 Digital Camera.
3. Click the Next button to display the information for digcam3.
4. Confirm that the Sensor Name dropdown list shows Kodak DCS
420 Digital Camera.
5. Click the Previous button twice to return to digcam1.
Enter Interior Orientation

Information
1. In the Digital Camera Frame Editor, click the Interior Orientation

tab.

Pixel size is applied to all images in the block
2. Click in the Pixel size in x direction field, and type 9.0.
3. Click in the Pixel size in y direction field, and type 9.0, then press
Enter.
4. Click to select the checkbox for Apply to all Frames.

These values come from the CCD of the camera that captured the
images. The number is a function of illumination.
For information about digital camera CCDs, see “Digital

Camera”.
5. Click the Next button twice to see that the same interior orientation
information is transferred to digcam2 and digcam3.
6. Click the Previous button twice to return to digcam1.
Enter Exterior Orientation

Information
1. Click the Exterior Information tab in the Digital Camera Frame

Editor dialog.
The information is already supplied for you. It comes from the .dat
file, airborne_GPS.dat, you selected when you imported the
information in the GPS file.

The exterior orientation information needed to define the Perspective
Center and Rotation Angle values is contained in the .dat file
2. Click the Next button to see the Exterior Information values for the
second image in the block file, digcam2.
3. Click the Next button again to see the Exterior Information values
for the third image in the block file, digcam3.
Note that the values for each image are different. This is due to the
altered position of the camera during each exposure.
4. Click OK to close the Digital Camera Frame Editor dialog.

You are returned to the LPS Project Manager. Note that the Int.
column for all of the files is green, indicating that the interior
orientation has been supplied.
Interior orientation information has been supplied
5. Click the Save icon to save your changes so far.
Perform Generally, at this point in the process you collect control points in
overlapping areas of images in the block file that determine the
Automatic Tie approximate exterior orientation parameters. Because this data
Point Collection includes the GPS and INS information, there is no need to collect
GCPs in order to obtain the exterior orientation information.
In a case such as this, the next step is to run the auto tie process.
This process further defines the geometry between the files in the
block.
LPS Project Manager Perform Automatic Tie Point Collection /

1. On the LPS Project Manager toolbar, click the Point Measurement
icon .
NOTE: You may be prompted to select either the Classic Point

The Point Measurement tool opens on your screen. In the Left View
you see the first image in the block file, digcam1. In the Right
View, you see the second image in the block file, digcam2. You can
use the Right View or Left View dropdown list to see the third
image in the block file, digcam3, as well.
LPS Project Manager Perform Automatic Tie Point Collection / 149

OverView Detail View Main View Link Cursor
File CellArray Select other images here

Reference CellArray
To change the color of points in the Point Measurement tool,

click the Viewing Properties icon to access the Viewing
Properties dialog. In the Point Table Info section, click the
Advanced radio button, then the Color checkbox, then OK.
This adds a Color column to the reference CellArray and the file
CellArray.
2. In the Point Measurement tool palette, click the Auto Tie Properties
icon .
The Automatic Tie Point Generation Properties dialog opens on the
General tab.

Click the Distribution tab
3. In the Automatic Tie Point Generation Properties dialog, click the

Distribution tab.
Change the Points

Per Image value to 50
Run the automatic

tie point generation
4. Type 50 in the Intended Number of Points Per Image field, then

press Enter.
This produces approximately 50 tie points per image.
5. Click Run in the Automatic Tie Point Generation Properties dialog.

After the tie point generation process, the Auto Tie Summary dialog
opens to display tie point information for each image in the block file.
You may use this dialog to see overall auto tie results for the entire
block file.
6. Once you have reviewed the contents of the Auto Tie Summary
dialog, click Close.

For more information about automatic tie point collection see
“Automatic Tie Point Collection”.
Check Tie Point Accuracy At this point, tie points are recorded in the file CellArray with their
image positions in X and Y. After you check their accuracy and run
the aerial triangulation, the map coordinates, displayed in the
reference CellArray, are available.
1. Click in the Point # row of a tie point to see its location in the images
displayed in the views.
NOTE: Since all tie points are not common to all images, there are
cases where the displayed images do not have common tie points.
In such cases, verify the tie point by opening a different adjacent
image in one of the views. To do so, use the Left View or Right
View dropdown list.
Click the Point # row of the The tie point’s file coordinates in
tie point you want to view each image are displayed here
2. Click other points to see the position of other tie points in the views.
3. Click the Save button in the Point Measurement tool.

4. Click the Close button in the Point Measurement tool.
You are returned to the LPS Project Manager.
Perform Aerial Now that you have used auto tie to create tie points in the images,
you can progress to the triangulation process.
Triangulation
1. In the LPS Project Manager, click Edit -> Triangulation
Properties.
The Aerial Triangulation dialog opens.
Select Microns
from this
dropdown list
2. Click the checkbox for Compute Accuracy for Unknowns.

This computes the accuracy of the adjusted exterior orientation
parameters and the X, Y, and Z tie point coordinates.
3. Click the Image Coordinate Units for Report dropdown list and
select Microns.
4. In the Aerial Triangulation dialog, click the Exterior tab.
Select Same
Weighted Values
5. Click the Type dropdown list and select Same weighted values.

6. Click in each of the Xo, Yo, and Zo fields and type 2.0.
This means that the X, Y, and Z values are accurate within 2 meters.
The omega, phi, and kappa values are accurate within 0.1 degree.
7. Confirm that the Omega, Phi, and Kappa fields are set to 0.1.
8. Click the Advanced Options tab.
Advanced robust
checking reduces
the error
Click to deselect
Use Image
Observations of
Check Points in
Triangulation
9. Click the Blunder Checking Model dropdown list and select

Advanced robust checking.
Advanced robust checking automatically identifies and removes poor
tie points from the solution.
10. Click to deselect Use Image Observations of Check Points in

Triangulation.
You do not have any check points displayed in the Classic Point
Measurement tool at this time; therefore, this option is not
applicable.
11. Click the Run button in the Aerial Triangulation dialog.

The Triangulation Summary dialog opens. The result, reported in the
Total Image Unit-Weight RMSE section, is less than 1 micron,
which equates to less than one-fourth of a pixel.
Total error is
reported here

12. Click the Report button in the Triangulation Summary dialog.
The Triangulation Report opens, which contains all the information
pertaining to the tie points used during the triangulation process.
This report may be saved as a text file for future reference.
Use the scroll bars to

see the entire report
See “Aerial Triangulation Report” on page 335 for a complete

explanation of the Triangulation Report.
To improve the triangulation results, you can look through the

Triangulation Report and identify the points with the most error.
These commonly have relatively large residuals. Then, you can
go back to the Point Measurement tool, deactivate those points
by clicking in the Active column to remove the X, and run the
triangulation again.
13. When you are finished looking at the report, select File -> Close.

14. Click the Accept button in the Triangulation Summary dialog.
15. Click the Close button to close the Triangulation Summary dialog.
16. Click OK in the Aerial Triangulation dialog to accept the triangulation.

You are returned to the LPS Project Manager. The Ext. column is now
green and the images display in the Project Overview window.
The Exterior Orientation Information has been calculated
Check Project Graphic The Project Graphic Status window offers you an easy way to
Status evaluate the GCPs, check points, and tie points associated with
images in the block file. You can also get information about each
specific points in this dialog.
1. In the LPS Project Manager, click plus sign next to the Images
folder in the Block Project Tree View.
2. In the Display Mode section of the LPS Project Manager, click the
checkbox next to Point IDs.

The Point IDs are listed below each of the Tie Points in the display.
3. Click the Zoom In icon and drag a box around an area containing
tie points.
Click on a Point ID to get

information about that point
4. Click on the Select icon to deactivate the Zoom In icon.
5. Click on a Tie Point square to display the Point Data dialog.

Information in the Point
Data dialog is obtained
from the reference and
file CellArrays in the
Point Measurement Tool
6. When you are finished viewing information in the Point Data dialog,
click the Dismiss button.
7. Click the Image Space radio button in the Display Mode section of
the LPS Project Manager.
8. In the Block Project Tree View on the left side of the dialog, click
digcam2.tif under the Images folder to display the points
associated with that image.
The active image is identified in both the Block Project Tree View and
the CellArray. The tie points display for the identified image.

Select the image to display in the Image Space mode in the Block Project Tree View
9. Click the to select the next image in the block file, digcam3. The tie
points redisplay in the Project Graphic Status window of the LPS
Project Manager accordingly.
10. When you are finished, click the Map Space radio button in the
Display Mode section of the LPS Project Manager.
Ortho Resample The final step in the process is to orthorectify the images in the block
file.
the Imagery
1. In the CellArray of the LPS Project Manager, click on a red cell within
the Ortho column, or select the Ortho Resampling icon from the
toolbar.

The Ortho Resampling dialog opens. The Ortho Resampling dialog
opens on the General tab. Here, you can set the parameters to be
applied to each of the images in the block.
The output orthoimage file

name displays here
In lieu of a DEM, set a constant

value for the scene
Change the cell sizes
1. Click in the Active Area field and type 95, or use the increment
nudgers to the right of the field.
2. Confirm that the DTM Source dropdown list shows Constant.
3. In the Constant Value field, type 605.0.

Use of a constant value is appropriate in relatively flat areas;
however, areas with large relief displacement benefit from a DTM
source, such as a DEM.
4. In the Output Cell Sizes section, change both X and Y to 0.50.
5. Click the Advanced tab.
6. Confirm that the Resampling Method is Bilinear Interpolation.
Add Multiple Images

In the CellArray of the Ortho Resampling dialog, you can add
multiple images in your block file to be resampled. You can do so
either in the General tab or the Advanced tab.
1. In the Advanced tab of the Ortho Resampling dialog, click the Add
Multiple button.

The Add Multiple Outputs dialog opens. It automatically adds the
ortho output file prefix for you. This option adds all files in the block
to the Ortho Resampling dialog CellArray.
Click here so all output

orthoimages have the
same cell size
2. Click the Use Current Cell Sizes checkbox so that all orthoimages
have X and Y cell sizes of 0.50.
3. Click OK in the Add Multiple Outputs dialog.
4. Click OK in the Confirm Existing Ortho dialog, which alerts you that
the first image in the block file, digcam1, is already set for ortho
resampling.
The remaining images in the block file are added to the Ortho
Resampling CellArray.
Images and their corresponding

orthoimages are identified here
5. Click OK in the Ortho Resampling dialog to begin the process.

A status dialog opens.
6. When the process is 100% complete, click OK in the status dialog to

close it.
View the Now that the resampling process is complete, indicated by the green
cells in the Ortho column of the CellArray, you can check the
Orthoimages
orthoimages in an ERDAS IMAGINE Viewer.
Use LPS
1. Click the plus sign next to the Orthos folder in the Block Project
Tree View of the LPS Project Manager.
Click Orthos to view

the images you created
2. Click on one of the orthos in the list to highlight it in the Block Tree
View, CellArray, and the Project Graphic Status window.

The highlighted ortho is indicated in the Block Project Tree View and the CellArray
To see the actual orthoimage, not just a graphical representation,

you may use a Viewer.
Use a Viewer
1. Right-click on the ortho in the Block Tree View and select View from
the Ortho quick view menu.
NOTE: If necessary, choose the type of Viewer you want to work

with: Classic Viewer or Geospatial Light Table.
2. From the Viewer menu bar, select File -> Open -> Raster Layer.
3. In the Select Layer To Add dialog, navigate to the location in which

you saved the resampled images.
4. Click the first orthoimage in the block file, orthodigcam1.img.

5. Hold down the Shift key and select the last orthoimage,
orthodigcam3.img.
6. Click the Raster Options tab.
7. Deselect Clear Display if it is selected with a check mark.
8. Select the Fit to Frame checkbox and the Background

Transparent checkbox.
The default settings of these options can be defined in the

Viewer category of the Preference Editor.
9. Click the Multiple tab.
10. Make sure that the Multiple Independent Files radio button is
selected, then click OK.
The three orthoimages display in the Viewer.
Magnify Areas of Overlap You can visually check the accuracy of the orthoimages by using the
Zoom In tool.
1. In the Viewer containing the images, click the Zoom In icon .
2. Click an area that interests you. You may have to apply the Zoom In
tool more than once to see the details.

The images
overlap here
Use the Swipe Utility You can also use the Swipe utility to see how well the images
overlap.
2. Choose Swipe.

Adjust the Swipe
Position using
this bar
4. Click Fit Image To Window.
and right to see how well the top orthoimage, orthodigcam3.img,
overlaps the others.
If you like, you may click the View menu, then select Arrange
Layers. You may change the order of the images as they display
in the Viewer to see how they look with the Swipe utility.
7. Click File -> Close in the Viewer containing the orthoimages.

8. Click the plus sign next to the Images folder in the Block Project
Tree View.
In the LPS Project Manager, you can see that the CellArray columns
are green (with the exception of the DTM column, which is specific
to LPS Automatic Terrain Extraction), indicating that the process is
complete.

Columns are green; the project is complete
Save and Close

the Block File
1. In the LPS Project Manager, select File -> Save, or click the Save
icon .
You can now refer to the complete block file whenever you like.
2. In the LPS Project Manager, select File -> Close.
3. To close LPS Project Manager, select File -> Exit.
Conclusions Interior and exterior orientation information from airborne GPS and
INS data is accurate enough to eliminate the need for ground
control. Simply import the data, and LPS uses that information to
create accurate orthoimages.
Next, you can learn how to select both horizontal and vertical
reference points from images outside the block file.

SPOT Pushbroom Sensor Tour Guide
Introduction Using LPS Project Manager, you have access to many different types
of geometric models with which to create a block file. This tour guide
takes you through the steps with the SPOT pushbroom model.
This tour guide demonstrates the use of existing orthorectified
imagery as a source for ground control measurements. In this case,
two images (xs_ortho.img and NAPP_2m-ortho.img, in Figure
49) are used for that purpose.
Figure 49: Reference Images: xs_ortho.img and NAPP_2m-ortho.img
When you use images outside of the block file as reference sources,
you must identify whether you are using them as horizontal (X, Y) or
vertical (Z) reference sources. The benefit of using existing
orthorectified imagery in the collection of your GCPs is that the GCPs
you collect are more accurate than those collected from
nonorthorectified imagery.
Other types of external reference sources you can use with LPS
Project Manager include: geocorrected images, vector Arc
coverages, annotation layers, ASCII text files, and digitizing tablets.

Before You Begin The data you use with this tour guide comes from Palm Springs,
California. You choose reference coordinates in two images: one a
SPOT image, and one an orthorectified aerial photo. The block itself
consists of two images, both SPOT panchromatic images with 10-
meter resolution.
For more information about the data used in this tour guide, see
“SPOT Example Data”.
This tour guide takes approximately 1 hour, 30 minutes to

complete.
• Select a horizontal reference source.
• Collect GCPs.
• Add a second image to the block file.
• Collect GCPs in the second image.
• Perform automatic tie point collection.
• Triangulate the images.
• Save the block file.
Create a New In this section of the tour guide, you create a new project using SPOT
satellite images of Palm Springs, California.
Project

Access LPS tools
using the toolbar

window


appear here, in the
CellArray
2. Click the New File icon to open the Create New Block File dialog.
Click OK
Type the name of

the block file here
4. Click in the text field next to File name, and type spot_tour, then
press Enter on your keyboard.
The *.blk extension is appended automatically.

Choose Camera Model The Model Setup dialog opens.
Select Polynomial- Click OK

based Pushbroom
Select the SPOT

Pushbroom model
1. Click the Geometric Model Category dropdown list and choose

Polynomial-based Pushbroom.
2. In the Geometric Model section click SPOT Pushbroom.
3. Click OK to close the Model Setup dialog.

The Block Property Setup dialog opens.
Click Set to open

the Projection
Chooser dialog
4. Click the Set button in the Horizontal Reference Coordinate

System section of the Block Property Setup dialog.
The Projection Chooser dialog opens.

The Custom tab is where you select the projection
5. In the Custom tab, click the Projection Type dropdown list and
choose UTM.
6. Click the Spheroid Name dropdown list and select Clarke 1866.
7. Click the Datum Name dropdown list and choose NAD27

(CONUS).
8. Click in the UTM Zone field and type 11.
9. Verify that the NORTH or SOUTH field is set to North.
10. Click OK in the (Edited) Projection Chooser dialog.
11. Make sure that the Horizontal Units are set to Meters.
The Reference Coordinate System section of the Block Property
Setup dialog reflects the projection you selected. You do not need to
make changes to the Vertical section.
Click OK
to complete
To set a different
projection, click
this button

Make sure that the reference system is correct. You cannot
revise the projection system once you click OK to complete
setup in the Block Property Setup dialog.
12. Click OK to close the Block Property Setup dialog.
Add Imagery to the Block
1. In the Block Project Tree View on the left side of the LPS Project
Manager, click the Images folder.
Click on Images
2. Select Edit | Add Frame from the LPS Project Manager menu bar,
or click the Add Frame icon .

Select this
file first
3. Navigate to /examples/orthobase/spot, select spot_pan.img, then

click OK.
The image loads into the LPS Project Manager and displays in the
CellArray.

The image is listed
There are no pyramid
in the Image Name section
layers at this time
Generate Pyramid Layers To conserve space in the /examples/orthobase/spot folder, the

pyramid layers associated with the SPOT image are not included.
However, LPS Project Manager has a utility that enables you to
quickly compute pyramid layers for your images. Pyramid layers
make your image display more rapidly in the views.
1. Click in the red column labeled Pyr. for the spot_pan image.
This cell controls the creation of pyramid layers for the image(s) in
the block file.
The Compute Pyramid Layers dialog displays.
All Images Without Pyramids

is selected by default
Click OK
2. Confirm that the All Images Without Pyramids radio button is

checked.

A status bar displays at the bottom of the dialog, indicating the
progress of pyramid layer creation. When complete, the Pyr. column
for spot_pan is green, indicating that pyramid layers are present for
this image.
Define the Sensor Model Next, you are going to verify the parameters of the sensor. In this
case, it is a SPOT pushbroom sensor. The parameters are supplied
by the images you are going to be working with, contained in their
header files.

Header Files
Header files precede image data on storage media, be it tape or
CD. In general, header files contain the following information:
number of columns (in pixels), number of rows (in pixels), data
storage format, pixel depth (for example, 8-bit), number of bands,
blocking factor, and number of header files and header records.
With sensor data, such as that obtained by the SPOT pushbroom
sensor, data in the header file (also called ephemeris data) also
includes the orientation of the sensor as it existed at the time of
image capture. This information, x, y, z, omega, phi, kappa, can
be read directly into LPS and used in the creation of block files.
Moreover, you can also get information such as velocity vector and
the exact time of the center scan line from the header file.
You can use the Tools -> View Binary Data option to view the
header information of any file.
1. Select Edit -> Frame Editor from the menu bar, or click the Frame
Properties icon .
The SPOT Pushbroom Frame Editor dialog opens, which displays
information about the active image listed in the LPS CellArray,
spot_pan.
The current
image is
identified here
Click the
Edit button
2. In the Sensor tab of the SPOT Pushbroom Frame Editor dialog, click
the Edit button.
The Sensor Information dialog displays.

Click OK
3. Review the fields in the Sensor Information dialog.

The data in the Sensor Information dialog corresponds to the SPOT
pushbroom sensor that obtained the image named spot_pan. The
information is derived from the header file of the image.
4. Click OK in the Sensor Information dialog to confirm that the

information is correct.
5. Click OK in the SPOT Pushbroom Frame Editor dialog.

You are returned to the LPS Project Manager. As you can see, the
Int. column that corresponds to the SPOT image is now green,
indicating that the sensor has been specified.
The Pyr. and Int. columns are green, showing those steps have been completed
Start the Point

Measurement Tool
1. In the dialog, click the Point Measurement icon .

The Point Measurement tool opens displaying three views, a tool

palette, and two CellArrays: one for recording reference coordinates,
and one for recording file coordinates.
LPS Project Manager Start the Point Measurement Tool / 177

Main View Link Cursor OverView Tool Palette
Reference CellArray File CellArray Detail View
Specify the Horizontal

Reference Source
1. In the Point Measurement tool palette, click the Horizontal Reference
Source icon .
The GCP Reference Source dialog opens.

Click OK
Click
Image Layer
NOTE: An existing image layer that has been orthorectified is going

to be used for the collection of horizontal (X, Y) control points.
2. In the GCP Reference Source dialog, click the Image Layer radio
button.
3. Click OK in the GCP Reference Source dialog.

The Reference Image Layer dialog opens.
Select this
image
A preview displays here
4. Navigate to /examples/orthobase/spot and select the file

xs_ortho.img.
5. Click OK in the Reference Image Layer dialog.

The Reference Image Layer dialog closes, and you are returned to
the Point Measurement tool.
6. In the Point Measurement tool, click the checkbox next to Use

Viewer As Reference.

7. If you are prompted to create pyramid layers for the xs_ortho.img
image, click Yes.
The Point Measurement tool automatically changes to display the
new reference image, xs_ortho, in the Left View of the Point
Measurement tool, and the original image, spot_pan, in the Right
View of the Point Measurement tool. You are going to obtain
reference coordinates by selecting points in xs_ortho, the reference
image, that correspond to points also in the block image, spot_pan.
Click Use Viewer as Reference
The reference CellArray displays The file CellArray displays

here, under the reference image here, under the block image
Now, you are ready to begin collecting control points.

Collect GCPs In this section, you are going to use screen captures of the reference
image, xs_ortho, and the first image in the block, spot_pan, to
collect the GCPs and identify their X and Y coordinates.
NOTE: The GCPs displayed in this tour guide are shown in different
colors to enable you to see them better. Therefore, Color columns
have been added to the reference and file CellArrays. By default,
GCPs are added to the views in green, and the Color column does
not display.
To change the color of points, click the Viewing Properties icon

to access the Viewing Properties dialog. In the Point Table
Info section, click the Advanced radio button, then the Color
checkbox, then OK. This adds a Color column to the reference
CellArray and the file CellArray.
LPS Project Manager Collect GCPs / 181

Collect Point ID 1
Figure 50: Location of Point ID 1

Click this icon to create a point
Reference coordinates for File coordinates for

Point ID 1 display here Point ID 1 display here
1. Click the Add button in the Point Measurement tool.

A row for Point ID 1 is added to the reference CellArray.
2. Check Figure 50 for the location of Point ID 1 in xs_ortho displayed

in the Left View of the Point Measurement tool.
3. Click the Select Point icon and use it to move the Link Cursors in
the views until you see the road intersection.
When you have found the road intersection and centered it in the
views, you are ready to collect the control point.
4. Click the Create Point icon .

5. Move the cursor into the Detail View displaying the reference image,
xs_ortho, and click the intersection.
NOTE: In the xs_ortho OverView, the Link Cursor is located in the

upper right corner of the image. If you need more detailed
information to find the intersection, it is located at the following
ground coordinates in the reference image, xs_ortho: 566189.190,
3773586.979; and the following pixel coordinates in the first block
image, spot_pan: 5239.468, 337.384.
A control point is placed on the intersection and labeled 1. The

reference CellArray updates to include the X Reference and Y
Reference coordinates of the point in the reference image,
xs_ortho.
6. Check your control point coordinates. They should match those in

the following table:
Point ID X Reference Y Reference

1 566189.190 3773586.979
7. If your coordinates do not approximate (within 10 meters) those

listed in step 6 above, type the correct coordinates in the reference
CellArray, then press Enter on your keyboard.
The Z Reference column is empty at this time. You are going to

input Z values using a DEM later in the exercise, in “Set the
Vertical Reference Source”.
Now, you are going to collect the point on the block image,
spot_pan.
8. Check Figure 50 for the location of Point ID 1 spot_pan displayed

in the Right View of the Point Measurement tool.
9. Click the Select Point icon and use it to move the Link Cursors
in the views until you see the road intersection.
When you have found the road intersection and centered it in the
views, you are ready to collect the control point.
11. Move the cursor into the Detail View containing spot_pan and click
the intersection.
A control point is placed on the intersection and labeled 1. The file
CellArray updates to include the point in the spot_pan image, and
the X File and Y File coordinates are updated.
12. Check your point coordinates. They should approximate those in the
following table:

Image Name X File Y File
spot_pan 5239.468 337.384
13. If your coordinates do not approximate (within two pixels) those

listed in step 12 above, type the correct coordinates in the file
CellArray, then press Enter on your keyboard. The point changes
location accordingly.
Collect Point ID 2
Point ID 2 displays in the next row
2. Check Figure 51 for the location of Point ID 2 in the xs_ortho views

on the left side of the Point Measurement tool.
in the views until you see the road intersection.

5. Move the cursor into the Detail View containing the reference image,
xs_ortho, and click the intersection.
NOTE: In the xs_ortho OverView, the box is located in the lower

right corner of the image. If you need more detailed information to
find the point location, it can be found at the following ground
coordinates in the reference image, xs_ortho: 555690.659,
3728387.770; and the following pixel coordinates in the first block
image, spot_pan: 5191.590, 4969.546.
A control point is placed on the intersection and labeled 2. The

reference CellArray updates to include the X Reference and Y
Reference coordinates of the point in the reference image,
xs_ortho.
6. Check your control point coordinates. They should approximate

those in the following table:

2 555690.659 3728387.770
7. If your coordinates do not approximate (within 10 meters) those

listed in step 6 above, type the correct coordinates in the reference
8. Check Figure 51 for the location of Point ID 2 in spot_pan

displayed in the Right View of the Point Measurement tool.
in the views until you find the road intersection.
the intersection.
following table:

spot_pan 5191.590 4969.546


Set Automatic (x, y) Drive LPS Project Manager provides an automatic function to enable you to
Function select ground control points more rapidly. Next, you are going to
activate the Automatic (x, y) Drive function. This function is only
available after the first two points have been collected.
1. Click the Automatic (x, y) Drive icon. .
The icon changes to .

This icon allows LPS Project Manager to approximate the position of
a GCP in the block image file, spot_pan, based on the position in the
reference image, xs_ortho.
Collect Point ID 3 Figure 52: Location of Point ID 3

Image chip from xs_ortho Image chip from spot_pan

A row for Point ID 3 is added to the reference CellArray.
2. Using the following table, type the X Reference and Y Reference

coordinates for the third control point into the reference CellArray,
then press Enter on your keyboard.

3 501918.953 3732595.411
LPS Project Manager adjusts the reference image in the views and
places the control point at the coordinates you specify.
Because the Automatic (x, y) Drive icon is enabled, LPS Project
Manager moves spot_pan to the same approximate area in the
views. The placement improves with subsequent points.
3. Check Figure 52. Then, click the Select Point icon , and move the
Link Cursor until you can see the location of the point in spot_pan.

palette.
the intersection.

following table:

spot_pan 230.925 5378.823



coordinates for the fourth control point into the reference CellArray,

4 515114.084 3759740.576
3. Check Figure 53. Then, click the Create Point icon in the Point
4. Move the cursor into the Detail View containing spot_pan, and click
the intersection.

following table:

spot_pan 869.542 2487.996



coordinates for the fifth control point into the reference CellArray,

5 543537.306 3779981.255
the intersection.

following table:

spot_pan 3027.570 51.432



coordinates for the sixth control point into the reference CellArray,

6 558640.300 3751516.718
the intersection.

following table:

spot_pan 4999.412 2636.848


coordinates for the seventh control point into the reference

7 532062.982 3724946.633
the intersection.

following table:

spot_pan 3064.254 5673.794



coordinates for the eighth control point into the reference CellArray,

8 539381.670 3768419.388
the intersection.

following table:

spot_pan 2890.880 1258.852



coordinates for the ninth control point into the reference CellArray.

9 526013.661 3753709.856
the intersection.

following table:

spot_pan 1978.138 2919.004

7. Click the Save button to save your points.
Collect the Last The last two control points, Point ID 11 and Point ID 12, use a
different horizontal reference source than the previous control
Two Control points. For them, you are going to use an image called NAPP_2m-
Points ortho.img. This is an orthoimage of 1:40,000 scale photography
with a 2-meter resolution.
LPS Project Manager Collect the Last Two Control Points / 191
Set the Horizontal
Reference
1. In the Point Measurement tool palette, click the Horizontal Reference
Source icon .
The GCP Reference Source dialog opens.
Click
Image Layer Click OK
2. In the GCP Reference Source dialog, click the Image Layer radio
button.
3. Click OK in the GCP Reference Source dialog.

The Reference Image Layer dialog opens.
Select this file
The file previews here
4. Navigate to /examples/orthobase/spot and select the file

NAPP_2m-ortho.img.
5. Click OK in the Reference Image Layer dialog.

The Reference Image Layer dialog closes, and you are returned to
the Point Measurement tool. The file, NAPP_2m-ortho, is
automatically loaded into the Left View.
The new reference image is added to the Left View
Collect Point ID 11 To make the distinction between two different horizontal reference
sources (xs_ortho and NAPP_2m-ortho) more clear, skip Point
ID 10, and name the next control point Point ID 11.
The last two Point IDs are located in a different reference image
2. Click in the Point ID column for Point # 10, and type 11.
Point ID 11 is the first of the points you collect from NAPP_2m-
ortho.

coordinates for the next control point into the reference CellArray,

11 545372.750 3741643.250
The control point is placed in the views displaying NAPP_2m-ortho.

palette.
the intersection.
following table:

spot_pan 3982.969 3817.813

Collect Point ID 12

Note that the Point ID column identifies the new point as 12.

coordinates for the control point into the reference CellArray, then
press Enter on your keyboard.
12 540901.659 3746876.633

palette.
the intersection.

following table:

spot_pan 3469.092 3367.939
6. If your coordinates do not approximate (within two) pixels those

7. In the Point Measurement tool, click Save to save your work to this
point.
8. In the Point Measurement tool palette, click to deselect the Use

Viewer As Reference checkbox.
The reference file NAPP_2m-ortho closes, and spot_pan displays
alone.
Set the Vertical To provide Z (elevation) values for all of the reference control points
Reference Source you selected in the reference images, xs_ortho and NAPP_2m-
ortho, you are going to specify a DEM that contains height
information, palm_springs_dem.img.
1. Click the Vertical Reference Source icon .

The Vertical Reference Source dialog opens, in which you select the
DEM that is going to supply height information.
Click OK
Click the
DEM radio button
Select a
specific DEM file
The DEM must be in the same projection as that of the block file.
If it is not, you can use the ERDAS IMAGINE reproject utility to
put it in the correct projection. Select Image Interpreter ->
Utilities -> Reproject Images, and enter the correct
information in the dialog. You can then use the new DEM as a
vertical reference source.
2. Click the DEM radio button.
3. Click the dropdown arrow and select Find DEM from the list.
4. In the Add DEM File Name dialog, navigate to

/examples/orthobase/spot and select the DEM
palm_springs_dem.img.
5. Click OK in the File Selector.

The DEM file you selected displays in the DEM section of the Vertical
Reference Source dialog.
6. Click OK in the Vertical Reference Source dialog.
7. Right-click in the Point # column of the reference CellArray to

access the Row Selection menu and select Select All.
8. Click on the Update Z Values on Selected Points icon .

The Z Values of all the reference points are updated in the reference
CellArray based on the values in the DEM you selected,
palm_springs_dem.
Select all of the Z Reference values are

points here provided by the DEM
9. Right-click in the Point # column and choose Select None.
Another function of LPS is the automatic Z value update. Before

you even begin choosing control points, you can set a vertical
reference source, then click the Automatic Z Value icon in the
Point Measurement tool palette. The icon then changes to ,
indicating that the Z value is updated automatically each time
you choose a point.
Set Type and Usage Up until this point, the Type and Usage for each of the control points
has been set to None and Tie, respectively. Follow the next series
of steps for a quick application of new classes of Type and Usage
with the Formula dialog in ERDAS IMAGINE.
For more information about the Formula dialog, see the On-Line
Help.
1. Left-click the title bar of the column titled Type to select all of the
column, which is highlighted in blue.
2. Right-click on Type to access the Column Options menu, then

select Formula.
The Formula dialog opens.
Columns are listed here
Enter the Type and Usage here
3. In the Formula section of the Formula dialog, type Full.
4. Click Apply in the Formula dialog.

Each Type entry changes to indicate Full (X, Y, and Z coordinates).
5. Left-click in the column titled Usage to select all of the column,

which is highlighted in blue.
6. In the Formula section of the Formula dialog, type Control (remove

Full).
7. Click Apply in the Formula dialog.

Each Usage entry changes to indicate Control.
8. Click Close in the Formula dialog.
9. Right-click in the Usage column to access the Column Options

menu, then choose Select None.
When you are finished, your CellArray should look like the following
(with the exception of the Color column).
All of the Point IDs have the correct Type and Usage description now
Another way of assigning the same Type and Usage

designations to all points is to right- click in the Point # column
and choose Select All. Then, click the title of the Type or
Usage column. Right-click, then select the designation you want
for the points.
Save the Block File At this time, you should save the block file to preserve your work.
1. In the Point Measurement tool, click the Save button.
2. Click the Close button on the Point Measurement tool.

Add a Second Now that you have successfully collected reference coordinates in
the reference images, xs_ortho and NAPP_2m_ortho, and file
Image to the
coordinates in the first block file, spot_pan, you can progress to the
Block second image in the block, spot_panb.
1. Select Edit -> Add Frame from the LPS menu bar, or click the Add
Frame icon .
2. Navigate to /examples/orthobase/spot, select spot_panB.img,

then click OK.
The image is loaded into the LPS Project Manager and displays in the
CellArray.
The second image in the block file, spot_panb, is added to the CellArray
Generate Pyramid Layers Like the first image in the block file, you are going to create pyramid
layers for spot_panb to make it display more quickly in the views.
1. Click Row #2 to highlight the row corresponding to Image ID 2,

spot_panb.
LPS Project Manager Add a Second Image to the Block / 200

2. Click in the red column labeled Pyr. for the spot_panb image.
The Compute Pyramid Layers dialog displays.
Select the first radio

button to generate
layers for one image
Click OK
3. Click the One Image Selected radio button.

A status bar displays at the bottom of the LPS Project Manager,
indicating the progress of pyramid layer creation. When complete,
the Pyr. column for spot_panb is green, indicating that pyramid
layers are present for this image.
Define the Sensor Model Next, you are going to provide LPS Project Manager the parameters
of the sensor, in this case a SPOT pushbroom sensor, that supplied
the image you are working with.
1. Select Edit -> Frame Editor from the LPS Project Manager menu
bar, or click the Frame Properties icon .

The SPOT Pushbroom Frame Editor dialog opens, displaying
information about the currently selected image (>) listed in the
CellArray, spot_panb.
Click OK
to accept
the parameters
2. Click OK in the SPOT Pushbroom Frame Editor to accept the

parameters.
The Int. column in the LPS Project Manager CellArray becomes
green. Remember, the header file of the image contains the
necessary orientation information.
LPS Project Manager Add a Second Image to the Block / 201

Start the Point Now, you are going to open the Point Measurement tool so that you
can locate the points you collected in the first image in the block,
Measurement Tool
spot_pan, in the second image, spot_panb.
1. In the LPS Project Manager, click the Point Measurement icon .

The Point Measurement tool opens, displaying views, a Point

Measurement tool palette, and two CellArrays: one for recording
reference coordinates, and one for recording file coordinates. The
image in which you are going to collect points, spot_panb, is in the
Right View; the image spot_pan is in the Left View.

Use the locations of the points in spot_pan to place the same points in spot_panb
Collect Ground Collect GCPs in spot_panb based on those you have already
collected in spot_pan. In this portion of the tour guide, you are
Control Points
provided X File and Y File coordinates to speed the GCP collection
process. However, if you would rather visually select the GCPs in
spot_panb, we encourage you to do so.
Collect Point ID 1
1. In the reference CellArray, click on Point #1 to highlight the row.

The image spot_pan automatically changes position to show Point
ID 1.
2. Move the Link Cursor in the views displaying spot_panb until you
can see the location of Point ID 1.

palette.
LPS Project Manager Collect Ground Control Points / 203

4. Click the approximate point in the Detail View of spot_panb,
displayed in the Right View.
A point is placed in the Detail View and labeled 1.
5. Check your results against the following table. If your results are not
within two pixels, type the X File and Y File coordinates for the point
in spot_panb into the file CellArray, then press Enter on your
keyboard. The point changes location accordingly.

spot_panb 2857.270 753.852
Make sure you enter X File and Y File coordinates on the

appropriate row. The row corresponding to spot_panb is the
second row in the file CellArray.
Collect Point ID 2
2. Move the Link Cursor as necessary in the views displaying

spot_panb.

palette.
4. Click the approximate point in the Detail View of spot_panb.

spot_panb 3003.782 5387.892
Next, you collect Point ID 5 in spot_panb. Point IDs 3 and 4 are

not located on spot_panb.
Collect Point ID 5
2. Move the Link Cursor as necessary in the views displaying

spot_panb.

palette.


spot_panb 1022.701 644.456
Collect Point ID 6

Note that, because the Automatic (x, y) Drive function is still
enabled, LPS locates the position of Point ID 6 for you. This occurs
after three points (in this case, 1, 2, and 5) have already been
identified in the images.

palette.

spot_panb 2736.125 3070.227
Next, you are going to collect Point ID 8 in spot_panb. Point ID

7 is not located in spot_panb.
Collect Point ID 8

palette.

spot_panb 937.482 1862.696
Collect Point ID 9

palette.

spot_panb 221.445 3594.113
Next, you are going to collect Point ID 12 in spot_panb.
Collect Point ID 12
1. In the reference CellArray, click on Point #11, which corresponds to

Point ID 12, to highlight the row.

palette.

spot_panb 1499.230 3923.753
5. Right-click in the Point # column and choose Select None.
6. In the Point Measurement tool, click the Save button.

The Z value is updated, making
the control points Full Both images have file coordinates
Perform The tie point collection process measures the image coordinate
positions of ground points appearing on the overlapping area of the
Automatic Tie
two SPOT images: spot_pan and spot_panb.
Point Collection
1. In the Point Measurement tool palette, click the Automatic Tie Point
Collection Properties icon .

The Automatic Tie Point Generation Properties dialog opens on the
General tab.

Use all of
the images
and header
information
Use the
first layer
2. Check to confirm that the Images Used radio button is set to All
Available.
3. Check to confirm that the Initial Type radio button is set to

Exterior/Header/GCP.
4. Check to confirm that the Image Layer Used for Computation is

set to 1.
5. Click the Distribution tab in the Automatic Tie Point Generation

Properties dialog.
Change the number

of points to 40
6. Click in the Intended Number of Points Per Image field and type
40, then press Enter.
7. Check to confirm that the Keep All Points checkbox is not checked.
When this option is not selected, poor tie points are discarded.
8. Click the Run button in the Automatic Tie Point Generation

Properties dialog.
LPS starts the automatic tie point generation process, indicated by a
progress meter at the bottom of the Point Measurement tool, and
displays the tie points in the Point Measurement views when
complete. The tie points have the Type designation None, and the
Usage designation Tie. They are added to the reference CellArray
with their corresponding X File and Y File values in the file
CellArray.

Check Tie Point Accuracy You should always check a few of the tie points to ensure accuracy.
If a point is not as accurate as you would like, you can adjust it using
the Select Point tool. Alternately, you can delete it by selecting the
row in the reference CellArray and clicking the Delete button in the
Point Measurement tool. You can also make it inactive by clicking in
the Active column to remove the X.
1. In the reference CellArray, click the scroll bar and scroll to a point,
such as Point ID 35.
2. Click in the > column to select Point ID 35.

The point displays in the views. This is an acceptable tie point.
Select points to view by highlighting the Point #, or clicking in the > column
3. Click in the > column of other Point IDs to see where LPS placed tie
points.
Measurement tool.
5. Click the Close button to close the Point Measurement tool.


Perform Now that you have obtained control and tie points, LPS has all the
information it needs to perform triangulation. This step establishes
Triangulation
the mathematical relationship between the images that make up the
block file, the sensor model, and the ground.
1. From the Edit menu of the LPS Project Manager, select

Triangulation Properties.
The Triangulation dialog opens.
Click the
Point tab
Change this
value to 3
2. Change the Iterations With Relaxation value to 3.
3. Confirm that the Image Coordinate Units for Report is set to

Pixels.
4. Click the Point tab in the Triangulation dialog.

The Point options display. These control the GCP parameters.
Click the Type

dropdown list
5. In the Ground Point Type and Standard Deviations section, click

the Type dropdown list and select Same Weighted Values.
6. Click in the X, Y, and Z number fields, and change each of the values
to 15.
LPS Project Manager Perform Triangulation / 210

The value 15 is used because the resolution of the SPOT image,
xs_spot, that you used as reference for Point IDs 1 through 9 has
20-meter pixels. This value assures that the GCPs are accurate to
approximately 15 meters.
7. Click the Advanced Options tab.
Click Run to
begin the
triangulation
This checkbox is
selected by default
8. Confirm that the Simple Gross Error Check Using checkbox is

enabled. The default value of 3.0 Times of Unit Weight is
acceptable.
9. Click the Run button to run the triangulation.

A Triangulation Summary report opens.
Accept the
triangulation results
You can see the

complete report
by clicking this button
10. In the Triangulation Summary dialog, click the Report button.

The report opens in a separate window. You can save this report as
you would any text file, then refer to it as needed.

The Triangulation Report displays in a text editor
11. Resize the window and scroll through the report to see the
information it contains.
For more information about the Triangulation Report, see “Block

Triangulation”.
12. When you are finished viewing the report, select File -> Close.
13. Click the Accept button in the Triangulation Summary dialog to

accept the results.
14. Click the OK button in the Triangulation dialog.

You are returned to the LPS Project Manager. Notice that the Ext.
columns in the CellArray are now green, indicating that the exterior
orientation information has been supplied.

The Ext. columns are green, indicating the exterior orientation information has been supplied
15. In the LPS Project Manager, click the File menu and select Save.
Ortho Resample The next step creates orthorectified images wherein relief
displacements and geometric errors have been adjusted and
the Imagery accuracy has been improved. The orthorectified images display
objects in their real-world X and Y positions.
1. In the LPS Project Manager, click the Ortho Resampling icon .

The Ortho Resampling dialog opens.

The first image in the block A DEM improves the accuracy
is identified here of the output orthoimage
1. In the General tab, click the DTM Source dropdown list and select
DEM.
2. Click the DEM File Name dropdown list, and choose Find DEM.
3. If necessary, select the DEM palm_springs_dem.img from the

/orthobase/spot folder, then click OK in the File Selector.
4. Click in the Output Cell Sizes fields for both X and Y, and type
10.0.
5. Click the Advanced tab of the Ortho Resampling dialog.
6. Confirm that the Resampling Method is Bilinear Interpolation.
7. Click the Add button on the Advanced tab.

The Add Single Output dialog opens.

Click this checkbox so that the second orthoimage has
the same cell size as the first orthoimage
The Input File Name identifies the other image in the block file,
spot_pan.img. It also automatically attaches the prefix ortho to
the output file.
8. Click the checkbox next to Use Current Cell Sizes.
9. Click OK in the Add Single Output dialog.

The second image in the block file, and its corresponding
orthoimage, is added to the Ortho Resampling dialog CellArray. It
has the same parameters as the first image. You may use the scroll
bar at the bottom of the dialog to confirm that all information is
correct before proceeding to resampling.
The images display Use the scroll bar to

in the CellArray see all the parameters
10. Click OK in the Ortho Resampling dialog to start the process.

A Status dialog opens, tracking the progress.

11. Once the status dialog shows that the process is 100% complete,
click OK in the dialog.
View the Now you can check how the orthoimages fit together in the LPS
Project Graphic Status window and in a Viewer.
Orthoimages
Use LPS
1. In the LPS Project Manager, click the plus sign next to the Orthos
folder in the Block Project Tree View.
Click Orthos to view

the images you created
2. Click on one of the orthos in the list to highlight it in the Block Tree
View, CellArray, and the Project Graphic Status window.

The highlighted ortho is indicated in the Block Project Tree View and the CellArray
To see the actual orthoimage, not just a graphical representation,

you can use a Viewer. You can get details about the control and tie
points displayed in the Project Graphic Status window by clicking on
them with the Selector icon .
Use a Viewer
1. Right-click on the first ortho, orthospot_panb.img, and select

View from the Ortho quick view menu.
2. Right-click inside the Viewer and select Fit Image to Window from
the Quick View menu.
3. Select File -> Open -> Raster Layer and navigate to the location
of the orthos.
4. Select orthospot_pan.img, then click the Raster Options tab.

5. In the Raster Options tab, make sure that Clear Display is not
selected.
6. Select Fit to Frame and Background Transparent if they are not

selected.
7. Click the Multiple tab and make sure that the radio button next to
Multiple Independent Files is selected.
8. Click OK in the Select Layer to Add dialog.

The overlapped orthoimages display in the Viewer.
The images overlap here
Magnify Areas of Overlap Now, you can check the areas of overlap to see how well LPS Project
Manager orthorectified the images. Take special note of features
such as roads, rivers, and parcels of land.
1. In the Viewer, click the Zoom In icon .
2. Click on an area in the Viewer where the images obviously overlap.
3. Apply the Zoom In icon as many times as necessary to see the

portion of overlap clearly in the Viewer.
You can see that LPS Project Manager successfully overlapped the
images in the following picture. Geographic features of interest are
well matched.

If you wish, you can click the View menu, then select Arrange
Layers. You may change the order of the images’ display in the
Viewer to see how they look with the Swipe utility.
Use the Swipe Utility You can also use the Swipe utility to see how well the images
overlap.
2. Choose Swipe.
Adjust the swipe

position here

4. Click Fit Image To Window.
and right to see how well the top image, orthospot_panb.img
overlaps the bottom image, orthospot_pan.img.
If you wish, you can click the View menu, then select Arrange
Layers. You can change the order of the images’ display in the
Viewer to see how they look with the Swipe utility.
7. When you are finished viewing the images, select File -> Close from
the Viewer menu bar.
Save and Close

the Block File
1. In the LPS Project Manager, click the File menu, then select Save.
Notice that all of the columns are green (with the exception of the
DTM column, which is specific to LPS Automatic Terrain Extraction),
indicating that all of the process steps have been executed. You can
open the complete block file any time.
Steps have been executed; the block file is complete
2. From the File menu, select Exit.
3. To close ERDAS IMAGINE, select Session -> Exit IMAGINE.
Conclusions As you have learned, you can easily select control points from
images outside the block file. Points can be horizontal or vertical and
come from many sources, including a reference image.
Next, you can learn about the DTM extraction capability of LPS. It is
an automatic terrain extraction program designed to produce DTMs
in various formats.

SPOT Example This section describes the data used in this chapter.
Data
Project Location Palm Springs, California, USA
Imagery Image 1: spot_pan.img (35.5 MB), SPOT Panchromatic scene with

10-meter ground resolution
Image 2: spot_panB.img (35.5 MB), SPOT Panchromatic scene with
NOTE: This image is named spot_panb.img (i.e., the "B" becomes

lowercase) in the Windows environment.
Image 3: xs_ortho.img (50.4 MB), SPOT orthorectified image with

Image 4: NAPP_2m-ortho.img (33.2 MB), NAPP orthorectified image
with 2-meter ground resolution
NOTE: The xs_ortho.img and NAPP_2m-ortho.img files are used as

reference sources for collecting GCPs.
DEM palm_springs_dem.img with 75-meter ground resolution in X and Y
Projection UTM
Spheroid Clarke 1866
Zone Number 11
Datum NAD27 (CONUS)
Horizontal Units Meters
Vertical Units Meters
Sensor Information
spot_pan.img
Side Incidence (degrees) = 16.8
Focal Length = 1082.0 mm
Pixel Size = 0.013 mm
Sensor Columns = 6000
spot_panB.img
Side Incidence (degrees) = -30.0
Focal Length = 1082.0 mm
Pixel Size = 0.013 mm
Sensor Columns = 6000
LPS Project Manager SPOT Example Data / 222

GCP Map Coordinates GCPs are accurate to 15.0 meters (standard deviation) in the X, Y,
and Z direction. The following table details the positions of the GCPs
in map coordinates.
Table 4: GCP Map Coordinates
Pt. ID Map X Map Y Elevation
1 566189.190 3773586.979 996.200
2 555690.659 3728387.770 229.080
3 501918.953 3732595.411 484.000
4 515114.084 3759740.576 1022.972
5 543537.306 3779981.255 1318.440
6 558640.300 3751516.718 325.973
7 532062.982 3724946.633 1331.120
8 539381.670 3768419.388 765.880
9 526013.661 3753709.856 427.760
11 545372.750 3741643.250 122.000
12 540901.659 3746876.633 224.000
GCP Pixel Coordinates The following table details the image coordinate positions of the
GCPs in pixels.
Table 5: GCP Pixel Coordinates
Control
Images X File Y File
Point
1 spot_pan 5239.468 337.384
spot_panB 2857.270 753.852
2 spot_pan 5191.590 4969.546
spot_panB 3003.782 5387.892
3 spot_pan 230.925 5378.823
4 spot_pan 869.542 2487.996
5 spot_pan 3027.570 51.432
spot_panB 1022.701 644.456
spot_panB 2736.125 3070.227
7 spot_pan 3064.254 5673.794
8 spot_pan 2890.880 1258.852

Table 5: GCP Pixel Coordinates (Continued)
Control
Images X File Y File
Point
spot_panB 937.482 1862.696
9 spot_pan 1978.138 2919.004
spot_panB 221.445 3594.113
11 spot_pan 3982.969 3817.813
12 spot_pan 3469.092 3367.939
spot_panB 1499.230 3923.753

Stereo Point Measurement Tool Tour
Guide
Introduction When you collect points from the images in a block file, you may
select from the Classic Point Measurement Tool—as you have
practiced in the previous tour guides—or you may use the Stereo
Point Measurement Tool. This tour guide takes you through the
process of collecting check points using the utilities provided by the
Stereo Point Measurement Tool.
You may set a preference if you prefer to work with one or the
other measurement tool consistently. Select the LPS category in
the Preference Editor. Scroll to the bottom of the list and make
your selection in the Point Measurement Tool section:
Always Ask, Classic Point Measurement Tool, or Stereo
Point Measurement Tool.
There is also a preference category specific to the Stereo Point

Measurement Tool, LPS - Stereo Point Measurement. You
may want to look at the settings in that category to see if the
defaults are acceptable for your own standard workflow.
Before You Begin The data used in this tour guide covers the campus of The University
of Western Ontario in London, Ontario, Canada. The photographs
were captured at a photographic scale of 1:6000, and scanned at a
resolution of 25 microns. The resulting ground coverage is 0.15
meters per pixel.
Approximate completion time for this tour guide is 20 minutes.
• Save the example block file as my_western_spmt.blk.
• Set up the system mouse as a digitizing device.
• Collect and save five points.
Open a Project In this section of the tour guide, you prepare your own block file.
LPS Project Manager Open a Project / 225

1. Click the LPS icon to open the LPS Project Manager workspace.
Access LPS tools

using the toolbar

window


appear here, in the
CellArray
2. Click the Open icon , then navigate to the <IMAGINE_HOME>

/examples/western folder.
3. Select the file named western_spmt.blk, then click OK in the file

selector.
4. Select File -> Save As to open the Save Block File As dialog.
5. Click in the File name window, then type my_western_spmt.blk.

Click OK in the dialog.
You will be working with this block file instead of the original one.
6. Click the Start Point Measurement Tool icon , or choose Edit ->
Point Measurement... from the LPS Project Manager menu bar.
7. If you are prompted to select which version of the point

measurement tool you want to use, select the radio button for
Stereo Point Measurement Tool, then click OK.
LPS Project Manager Open a Project / 226

If you are not prompted and the Classic Point Measurement Tool
starts instead, check the preference setting in the LPS category
called Point Measurement Tool. Set it to either Always Ask
or Stereo Point Measurement Tool. Exit LPS, then you may
restart the program, open the block file, and continue.
8. If the Loading Images Help dialog appears, click OK.

You will load images in the next section of the tour guide.
Whether or not this dialog displays is controlled by a preference

in the LPS - Stereo Point Measurement category, named
Display Help Dialog.
Image Selection One of the first tasks you must perform when using the Stereo Point
Measurement Tool is selecting which image in your block file will
serve as the master image. This block file contains three images; the
master image has been identified as 251.img.
1. In the Image Selection tab, located on the right-hand side of the

Stereo Point Measurement Tool, check the Master field to confirm
that the master image is indeed set to 251.img.
2. Decrease the Overlap percentage to 21, by typing in the field or

using the increment nudgers.
LPS Project Manager Image Selection / 227

3. In the Load As section, confirm that the setting is Mono.
4. In the Image Selection CellArray, make sure that the second and
third images in the block file, 252.img and 253.img have an X in
the Load column.
5. Click the Load button to display the images in the Stereo Point
Measurement Tool.
6. Click the Image Adjustment tab, then deselect Dynamic Range

Adjustment.
Deselect this option

for the Western images
you may adjust other
brightness and contrast
settings if you like
7. Click the Image Selection tab again.
LPS Project Manager Image Selection / 228

Check Device If you have a digitizing device, such as a Leica Geosystems
TopoMouse, you should check the settings for that device before
Setup collecting points in the Stereo Point Measurement Tool. Similarly, if
you plan to use your system mouse to collect points, you should
check the existing button mappings before you begin collecting
points.
1. Click the Devices button on the right-hand side of the Stereo Point
Measurement Tool workspace.
2. In the Devices dialog, select the type of device you will be using to
collect points. For this exercise, choose System Mouse.
3. Click the Button Mappings button to open the System Mouse

Button Mapping dialog.
LPS Project Manager Check Device Setup / 229

4. Select the Point Measurement category on the left side of the
dialog.
5. In the Commands/Buttons window, select Create/Edit Point.
6. In the Customize Button Assignment section, click the dropdown

list and choose Left.
7. Click Assign to use the left mouse button to add points in the Stereo
Point Measurement Tool.
In this section of the

dialog, you can see
what mouse and
keyboard buttons
are mapped to the
various commands
8. In the Commands/Buttons window, select Correlate Point.
9. In the Customize Button Assignment section, click the dropdown

list and choose Right.
10. Click Assign to use the right mouse button to correlate points in the
Stereo Point Measurement Tool.
Set the right mouse

button to correlate
option—this makes
point selection easier
11. Click Close in the System Mouse Button Mapping dialog.
LPS Project Manager Check Device Setup / 230

12. Click Close in the Devices dialog.
For additional information about setting up digitizing devices,

please refer to the On-Line Help: “Device Button Commands.”
Select Points Now that your system mouse is set up to select points, you are ready
to begin using the Stereo Point Measurement Tool.
Point ID 1001
1. Make sure that the Maintain Scale Factor, Manual Toggle Cursor
Mode, Fixed Image Mode, and Automatic View Link icons are all
selected in the tool palette.
This is the This is the This is the This is the

Maintain Scale Manual Cursor Fixed Image Automatic
Factor icon Mode icon icon View LInk
icon
2. In the Reference CellArray of the Stereo Point Measurement Tool,

scroll down to the bottom of the list.
3. Click inside the > field for Point ID 1001 to make it the active point.
4. Click on the Drive To icon to display the location of the point in

each of the views.
LPS Project Manager Select Points / 231

Begin collecting in Once you collect the point in the master image
the master image the software automatically makes the next
image in the block file active for collection,
and so on through the block file
5. Check the following screen shot to locate the approximate position

of the point.

6. Click the Create Point icon in the tool palette.
7. Click inside the first view, which displays the master image,
251.img.
8. Press F3 on your keyboard to enter collection mode, then click to

place point 1001 in the master image.
Notice that the next image in the pair, 252.img, becomes active.
You can tell which image is the active image because it has white text
in the title bar of the view.
9. Right-click to correlate the cursor position with the point you

selected in the master image, then click to place point 1001 the
same point in the second image.
When your cursor is in the approximate location of the point

selected in the master image, a right-click results in a green
cursor, which indicates that the location is accurate. If the cursor
is not close enough to the point, a right-click results in a red
cursor. In that case, reposition the cursor, and right-click again
to find the correlation area. Repeat as necessary.
Notice that after you select the point in the second image in the
block, the final image in the pair becomes active, indicated by the
white text in the title bar of the view.
selected in the master image, then click to place point 1001 in the
third image.
11. Once you have placed the point in all the images, press F3 on your
keyboard to exit collection mode.
12. Compare your image point X and Y values to those in the following
table. If they do not match within two pixels, change the values in
the Stereo Point Measurement Tool to match the following:
Image X File - PID 1001 Y File - PID 1001

251 8025.278 1034.117
252 4236.679 897.966
253 626.392 940.934
13. Click the Save button in the Stereo Point Measurement Tool.
Point ID 1002 You’ll collect the next two points in stereo.
1. Click the Load As dropdown list and select Full.
2. Click the Load button in the Image Selection tab.

When you select the Full option, you see both
stereo and mono views at the same time

each of the views.

of the point.

Use the stereo
view to locate
the point in 3D
You may select

the point here,
or in the mono
views
7. Click inside the view displaying the first image pair, 251.img /
252.img.

place point 1002 in each image in the first image pair.
When you collect points in stereo while the Load As option is set
to Full, you may use the mono views below the stereo view to
help you position the point in the same location in each image.
Notice that the next image pair, 251.img / 253.img, becomes

active. You can tell which pair is the active pair because it has white
text in the title bar of the view.

second image pair, specifically, 253.img—you have already placed
the point in 251.img, which accompanies 253.img in the stereo
view.
10. Press F3 to exit collection mode.

251 7401.106 3218.404
252 3679.477 3090.953
253 127.491 3101.026
Point ID 1003

each of the views.

of the point.

5. Click inside the view displaying the first pair, 251.img / 252.img.

place point 1003 in each image in the first image pair.
7. Right-click in the second image of the second image pair, 251.img

/ 253.img, to correlate the cursor position with the point you
third image, 253.img.
8. Press F3 to exit collection mode.


251 8869.302 3858.729
252 5113.843 3733.511
253 1521.556 3743.966
Point ID 1004 Switch back to mono view to collect the last two points.
1. Click the Load As dropdown list and select Mono.
2. Click the Load button in the Image Selection tab.

each of the views.

of the point.
7. Click inside the view displaying the master image, 251.img.

9. Right-click in the second view to correlate the cursor position with

the point you selected in the master image, then click to place point
1004 in the second image, 252.img.
10. Right-click in the third view to correlate the cursor position with the
point you selected in the master image, then click to place point
1004 in the third image, 253.img. Then press F3 to exit collection
mode.


251 8579.676 4563.065
252 4859.108 4435.806
253 1299.713 4440.873
Point ID 1005

each of the views.

of the point.
5. Click inside the view displaying the master image, 251.img.

7. Right-click in the second view to correlate the cursor position with

the point you selected in the master image, then click to place point
1005 the same point in the second image, 252.img.
8. Right-click in the third view to correlate the cursor position with the
point you selected in the master image, then click to place point
1005 in the third image, 253.img. Then press F3 to exit collection
mode.


251 8201.628 4981.529
252 4516.606 4851.847
253 990.204 4853.881
10. Click Save to save all the image points you have collected.
At this point, your Stereo Point Measurement Tool should look similar
to the following:

Each check point now has image coordinates in addition to reference coordinates
Next Steps Next, you may proceed to the last few steps in the photogrammetric
workflow, including triangulation, and orthoimage generation if you
wish. Otherwise, perform the following steps to save your work and
close the Stereo Point Measurement Tool.
Please refer to “Perform Aerial Triangulation” on page 113 and

“Ortho Resample the Imagery” on page 119 in the Frame
Camera Tour Guide for additional information.
1. Click Close on the Stereo Point Measurement Tool.
LPS Project Manager Next Steps / 241

2. Click the Save iconto keep the changes you made to
my_western_spmt.blk.
3. Select File -> Exit from the LPS Project Manager menu bar.
For more information about the Stereo Point Measurement Tool,

please refer to the On-Line Help.
LPS Project Manager Next Steps / 242

Practical Applications

Getting Started with LPS Project Manager
Introduction The chapters in this section give a detailed description of LPS Project
Manager and the photogrammetric concepts used within the
software to bridge the fundamental concepts of photogrammetry,
and the practical tools of LPS Project Manager. Additional tips and
tricks are provided to increase the production associated with block
triangulation and orthorectification.
What is a Block? Prior to performing any photogrammetric tasks within LPS Project
Manager, a block must be created. Block is a term used to describe
and characterize all of the information associated with a
photogrammetric mapping project, including:
• projection, spheroid, and datum information,
• imagery used within a project,
• camera or sensor model information associated with the

imagery,
• GCPs and their measured image positions, and
• geometric relationships between the imagery in a project and the

ground.
LPS Project Manager supports the processing of various types of

blocks, including:
• A block containing one image for applications associated with

single frame orthorectification. Single frame orthorectification is
the process of orthorectifying one image using several GCPs and
an elevation model. The GCPs are used to determine
camera/sensor orientation, and the DEM is used to represent
topographic relief. Both factors being considered, the geometric
distortions associated with an image can be removed.
• A block containing a strip of imagery (see Figure 61). A strip of

imagery comprises two or more images adjacent to one another
containing common overlap areas. Typically, adjacent images or
photographs contain approximately 60% overlap.
LPS Project Manager What is a Block? / 245

Figure 61: A Block Containing a Strip of Imagery
• A block containing several strips of imagery (see Figure 62).

Adjacent strips of imagery commonly contain 20% to 30%
sidelap. It is also common for adjacent strips to contain 60%
sidelap, since this type of block configuration can provide greater
accuracy and reliability during aerial triangulation. Additionally,
LPS Project Manager can accommodate cross-strips.
Figure 62: A Block Containing Several Strips of Imagery
LPS Project Manager provides a linear workflow for the creation of a

block. The following steps are required to create the block:
• define a project name,
• define the sensor model,
• define the reference coordinate system,
• define the units,
• define the mapping sensor rotation systems,
• define the characteristics of the imagery (for example, aerial or

ground-based), and
• import the exterior orientation information, which is the position

and orientation of the camera/sensor at the time of exposure.
LPS Project Manager What is a Block? / 246

LPS Project Manager
Once you click the LPS icon within the ERDAS IMAGINE icon
bar, the linear workflow associated with creating a block is enabled.

The first dialog is depicted in Figure 63.
Figure 63: The Leica Photogrammetry Suite Project Manager Dialog
You can create a new LPS Project Manager project by choosing File
-> New, or open an existing LPS Project Manager project, by
choosing File -> Open, from this dialog. In either case, you work
with a block file (*.blk). The block file is a binary file containing all of
the information associated with a block. Select the View IMAGINE
HFA File Structure option within the ERDAS IMAGINE Tools menu
to view the contents of the binary file.
LPS Project Manager LPS Project Manager / 247

In an existing block file is open, laguna.blk (which is located in the
examples that come with LPS). If you open an existing block file, the
LPS Project Manager’s CellArray is populated with information about
the images contained in the block, as in Figure 64.
Figure 64: LPS CellArray
For information about height extraction, which is indicated by

the DTM column in the LPS Project Manager CellArray, see Leica
Photogrammetry Suite Automatic Terrain Extraction Tour Guide.
Geometric Model LPS Project Manager supports the orthorectification of photography

and imagery from various camera and satellite sensor types. In
order to process the various types of photography and imagery, the
appropriate camera or sensor model which defines the geometry of
the sensor must be selected. Figure 65 shows the Model Setup
dialog.
Figure 65: Model Setup Dialog
The geometric properties of a camera or sensor model define the

internal and external characteristics associated with it. Internal
characteristics include parameters which define the internal
geometry of the camera or sensor as it existed when the imagery
was captured. The external parameters define the original position
and orientation of the camera or sensor when the imagery was
captured.
Each camera and sensor type has different internal and external
properties associated with it. LPS Project Manager estimates both
the internal and external characteristics associated with a sensor
model in order to accurately model the geometry of the camera or
sensor model. This information is required for point determination
and the creation of orthorectified images, DEMs, and stereopairs.
LPS Project Manager Geometric Model / 248

Frame cameras, digital cameras, videography, and nonmetric
cameras have a perspective center. The perspective center is the
optical center of a camera lens. All light rays that pass through a lens
pass through the perspective center. The elements of exterior
orientation define the position of the perspective center relative to
the ground coordinate system. Cameras have one perspective
center. Pushbroom sensors have multiple perspective centers,
according to the number of scan lines in the image.
Cameras The properties associated with cameras can include, but are not
limited to, focal length, principal point, calibrated fiducial mark
positions, and radial lens distortion. The following geometric models
are supported within LPS Project Manager:
Frame Camera
This type of camera is commonly associated with aerial cameras
having an approximate focal length of 6 inches (152 mm). The
photographic format size from these cameras is 9 × 9 inches. Frame
cameras have fiducial marks positioned within the camera body. The
fiducial marks are exposed onto the film emulsion when the
photography is captured. The fiducial marks are subsequently
measured to determine the interior orientation of the camera. Frame
cameras are considered metric cameras since they have been
calibrated in a laboratory.
Digital Camera
This type of camera can be used for aerial and ground-based
(terrestrial) mapping applications. The focal length for a digital
camera may range in size from 10 mm to 50 mm or greater. Rather
than using film to record an image, digital cameras make use of a
CCD. A CCD contains an array of cells which record the intensity
associated with a ground feature or object. The x and y pixel size of
the CCD array must be defined. Digital cameras do not have fiducial
marks, and for that reason they do not need to be measured. Digital
cameras are considered nonmetric, noncalibrated cameras.
Video Camera (Videography)

(terrestrial) mapping applications. The focal length for a video
camera may range in size from 10 mm to 50 mm or greater. A video
camera can use either film or a CCD to record an image. If a film
video camera is used, the film scanning resolution must be used for
interior orientation. If a CCD type is used, the x and y pixel size of
the CCD array must be defined. Video cameras do not have fiducial
marks, and for that reason they do not need to be measured. Video
cameras are considered nonmetric, noncalibrated cameras.

Non-metric Camera (35 mm, Medium, and Large Format Cameras)
(terrestrial) mapping applications. This type of camera may include
amateur 35 mm cameras and medium to large format cameras (for
example, 75 mm focal length). The focal length for a nonmetric
camera may range in size from 10 mm to 152 mm or greater.
A nonmetric camera is a camera which has not been calibrated in a
laboratory to define its internal geometry. The primary camera
parameters which have not been calibrated include focal length,
principal point, lens distortion, and fiducial marks. The minimum
interior orientation input requirements include an approximate focal
length, and the scanning resolution used to digitize the film.
DPPDB
DPPDB is the acronym for Digital Point Positioning Data Base. This
type of camera is for data, designed by NIMA, which is classified. Not
everyone has access to DPPDB data. It can be described as high-
resolution stereo data with support files, which normally covers a 60
nautical mile range (Federation of American Scientists, 2000).
Pushbroom Sensors Pushbroom data is collected along a scan line, with each scan line
having its own perspective center. The following geometric models
are supported:
Generic Pushbroom
This type of satellite pushbroom sensor can be used for satellites
other than SPOT, IKONOS, and IRS-1C, which scan along a line to
collect data. Sensor model parameters associated with the internal
geometry of the sensor must be provided.
SPOT Pushbroom
The SPOT pushbroom sensor supports SPOT Panchromatic (10-
meter ground resolution), and SPOT XS Multispectral (20-meter
ground resolution) imagery. Sensor model properties associated
with the satellite are automatically derived from the header file of the
imagery and subsequently used in LPS Project Manager. The ERDAS
IMAGINE Import tool can be used to import the SPOT imagery.
IRS-1C Pushbroom
The IRS-1C sensor model supports imagery collected from the IRS-
1C pushbroom sensor model (5-meter ground resolution). Sensor
model properties associated with the satellite are automatically
derived from the header file of the imagery and subsequently used
in LPS Project Manager. The ERDAS IMAGINE Import tool can be
used to import the IRS-1C imagery.

Orbital Pushbroom
The Orbital Pushbroom model is a generic model, which is able to
compute the transformation between image pixel (image space,
which is the source image pixel location) and ground point (ground
space, which is the ground point location) for pushbroom sensors
suck as QuickBird, EROS A1, ASTER, and SPOT. Generic modeling is
based on the metadata information about the sensor orbit.
RPC RPC (rational polynomial coefficient) files contain rational function

polynomial coefficients that are generated by the data provider
based on the position of the satellite at the time of image capture.
IKONOS
The IKONOS sensor model supports IKONOS imagery and its
associated rational polynomial coefficient (RPC) and metadata files.
The metadata files contain information regarding the images in the
data set. RPC files contain the necessary information to determine
interior and exterior orientation.
NITF RPC
The National Imagery Transmission Format (NITF) is the standard
format for digital imagery and imagery-related products used by the
Department of Defense and the intelligence community. NITF is
designed to be a common format for exchange of imagery data
between normally incompatible systems.The metadata files contain
information regarding the images in the data set. RPC files contain
the necessary information to determine interior and exterior
orientation.
QuickBird RPC
QuickBird data, which is supplied by DigitalGlobe, in “Basic” and
“Standard” formats can be used in LPS Project Manager for the
creation of block files. QuickBird images are delivered with image
support data (ISD) files that detail information such as ephemeris
and RPCs. The RPC data, which accompanies QuickBird images in
GeoTIFF or TIFF format, can be used to define the sensor.
Mixed Sensor The Mixed Sensor model supports LPS Project Manager calibrated
images, oriented images, and SOCET SET® support files. Images
without geometric models already associated with them cannot be
used with the Mixed Sensor geometric model. Using this model, the
same block file may have multiple projections and the may also have
images with different vertical datum and units.
NOTE: With the Mixed Sensor geometric model type, you cannot
perform automatic tie point generation. Also, the triangulation
process is used to check errors in GCPs only.
Once a sensor model has been selected for a block file, it cannot
be changed within LPS Project Manager.

Reference A reference coordinate system defines the projection, spheroid, and
datum for the block project. LPS Project Manager supports the use
Coordinate
of multiple projections (for example, UTM, State Plane, Geographic),
System spheroids (for example, Clarke 1866, GRS80, WGS84), and datums
(for example, NAD 27, NAD 83).
Once the appropriate geometric model has been selected, the Block
Property Setup dialog, shown in Figure 66, is provided, which allows
for the specification of a projection, spheroid, and datum.
Figure 66: Projection, Spheroid, and Datum
A right-handed cartesian coordinate system is supported in the case

that a projection, spheroid, and datum are not specified or required.
By selecting the Set Projection option within the Block Property
Setup dialog, the Projection Chooser dialog opens, as shown in
Figure 67.
Figure 67: The Projection Chooser
LPS Project Manager Reference Coordinate System / 252

A standard set of existing projections is contained within the
Categories dropdown list of the Standard tab. If a given
projection/datum is not listed within the category list, the Custom
tab can be selected to define a unique projection, spheroid, and
datum, as shown in Figure 68.
Figure 68: The Projection Chooser—Unique Parameters
Once a custom reference system has been defined, all of the

projection information can be saved and reused for other mapping
projects. If a reference system is saved, the corresponding system
opens within the category list contained within the Standard tab of
the Projection Chooser dialog. Additionally, existing reference
systems contained within the category list can also be deleted and
renamed.
Once a reference system has been selected, the respective
projection/spheroid/datum information displays within the Block
Property Setup dialog, as shown in Figure 69.
Figure 69: Block Property Setup Dialog
LPS Project Manager Reference Coordinate System / 253

The Next and Previous buttons in the Block Property Setup dialog
provide a linear project setup environment for the definition of an
LPS Project Manager project. During any portion of the setup, the
next or previous steps associated with defining the project can be
accessed.
Defining Units Once Next has been selected, the horizontal, vertical, and angular
units associated with a block project can be defined, as shown in
Figure 69.
LPS Project Manager supports the following horizontal and vertical
units: Meters, Feet, US Survey Feet, Indian Feet, International
Feet, Centimeters, and Inches. Angular unit support includes
Degrees, Radians, and Gons.
Defining LPS Project Manager allows for the specification of additional

information associated with photogrammetric components of the
Frame-specific
mapping project. This includes:
Information
• rotation system type
• photographic direction of the imagery in the project
• average flying height
• import of exterior orientation parameters
After the units types have been selected in the Block Property Setup
dialog, select the Next button. The dialog that allows for the
specification of photogrammetric information opens, as shown in
Figure 70.
Figure 70: Photogrammetric Information in Block Property

Setup Dialog
LPS Project Manager Defining Frame-specific Information / 254

Rotation System Support LPS Project Manager accommodates the use of three rotation
systems. A rotation system defines the axis used to characterize the
orientation of a camera/sensor at the time of exposure. A rotation
system is defined as having three rotation angles. These include an
Omega rotation around the x-axis, Phi rotation around the y-axis,
and Kappa rotation around the z-axis. The rotation angles define the
angular relationships between the x, y, or z axes of a tilted image
(defined by the photo/image coordinate system), and the X,Y, or Z
axes of the ground (defined by the ground coordinate system).
Different countries around the world employ different conventions
for rotation systems. The three options within the Rotation System
dropdown list include:
Omega, Phi, Kappa

This convention is most commonly used throughout the world.
Omega is a positive rotation around the x-axis, Phi is a positive
rotation around the y-axis, and Kappa is a positive rotation around
the z-axis. In this system, x is the primary axis, indicating that the
first rotation in forming the rotation matrix is around the x-axis.
The positive axis is also known as the primary axis. The primary axis
is the axis around which the first rotation occurs. Rotation follows the
right-hand rule, which says that when the thumb of the right hand
points in the positive direction of an axis, the curled fingers point in
the direction of positive rotation for that axis.
Phi(+), Omega, Kappa

This convention is most commonly used in Germany. Phi is a positive
rotation about the y-axis, Omega is a positive rotation around the x-
axis, and Kappa is a positive rotation around the z-axis. In this
system, y is the primary axis, indicating that the first rotation in
forming the rotation matrix is around the y-axis.
Phi(-), Omega, Kappa

This convention is most commonly used in China. Phi is a negative
rotation around the y-axis, Omega is a positive rotation around the
x-axis, and Kappa is a positive rotation around the z-axis. In this
system, y is the primary axis, indicating that the first rotation in
forming the rotation matrix is around the y-axis.
Since various rotation systems are supported, additional
transformations from one rotation system to another are not
required.
Photographic Direction LPS Project Manager supports the processing of aerial, terrestrial
(ground-based), and oblique imagery. A photographic direction is
specified in order to define the type of imagery to be processed.

Aerial photography and imagery are captured with the optical axis of
the camera having a Z direction. This type of imagery is most
commonly used for topographic and planimetric mapping
applications. Therefore, when utilizing aerial or vertical photography,
the Z-axis for normal images option should be selected within the
Photo Direction dropdown list.
Terrestrial or ground-based photography has the optical axis of the
camera directed toward the Y-axis of the ground coordinate system.
Therefore, when utilizing terrestrial photography, the Y-axis for
close range images option should be selected. This type of photo
direction is commonly used for applications involving close-range
photography (for example, the distance between the imaged object
and the camera station is minimal).
Figure 71 illustrates the differences between aerial or vertical
imagery, and terrestrial photography and imagery:
Figure 71: Photographic Directions Used for Aerial and

Terrestrial Imagery
Ground Ground
Z - Direction
Z
Y
Y - Direction
X Ground Coordinate System
The photographic direction (vertical) for aerial photography is in the

Z direction. The same photographic direction for terrestrial
photography and imagery is in the Y direction. LPS Project Manager
automatically translates all of the coordinates from one system to
another.
Average Flying Height The average flying height is the distance between the camera
position at the time of exposure and the average ground elevation.
Figure 72 graphically illustrates the average flying height:

Figure 72: Average Flying Height of an Aircraft Above Ground
Level
Exposure Stations
Average Aircraft
Altitude
Average Relative
Terrain Elevation
Avg. Flying Height =

Avg. Aircraft Altitude - Avg. Relative Terrain Elevation
The average flying height is an optional input requirement that

specifies the altitude or height of the camera/sensor at the time of
exposure. This distance is above ground, not above mean sea level.
The specification of this value assists the automatic tie point
collection algorithm when the exterior orientation parameters (for
example, initial approximations or final values) have been entered.
If the average flying height is close to the exterior orientation Z
coordinate values, the average flying height does not need to be
specified. In other words, the average flying height does not need to
be specified if the altitude of the aircraft over the average ground
surface is similar to the altitude of the aircraft over mean sea level.
Otherwise, it is recommended to specify the average flying height.
The average flying height is commonly provided by the photographic
instrumentation used to capture the data. If the average flying
height is not available (and the photo scale/image scale known), the
average flying height can be determined by multiplying the focal
length by the image scale.
The illustrations in Figure 73 define when the average flying height
is not required.

Figure 73: Examples that Specify Average Flying Height
Exposure Stations
Ground
Sea-Level (Vertical Datum)
Must Specify Average Need Not Specify Average

Flying Height Flying Height
The average flying height should be specified when the Z plane

(defined by the type of datum) deviates substantially relative to the
average ground level. This is primarily the case for mountainous
areas with large variations of topographic relief displacement.
NOTE: The Average Flying Height is helpful when you use the
Exterior Initial Type option for auto tie. If the Tie Points Initial Type
option is selected for auto tie, the Average Flying Height does not
influence results.
For more information about auto tie, see “Minimum Input

Requirements”.
Importing Exterior In cases where the position and orientation of the exposure stations
Orientation Parameters (exterior orientation) for the images in a block are known, an ASCII
file containing the respective information can be imported. The
exterior orientation parameters define the position and rotation of a
camera/sensor as they existed when the photography/imagery was
captured. The positional elements are defined using the X, Y, and Z
coordinates of the exposure station, and the rotational elements are
defined as the degree of tilt in each image. This can be expressed
using the three rotation angles (Omega, Phi, and Kappa). The
exterior orientation parameters can be obtained from various
sources, including:
• Airborne GPS and INS data. The GPS component provides the X,
Y, and Z coordinates of the exposure station to a given accuracy.
The INS provides the Omega, Phi, and Kappa rotation angles.
The INS attempts to stabilize the movement of the platform
during collection. For these reasons, the Omega and Phi rotations
associated with the INS are minimal, and at times negligible.

• Existing photogrammetric workstations. Exterior orientation
parameters have been determined by using external systems
including analog stereo plotters, analytical stereo plotters, digital
photogrammetric workstations, softcopy systems, and aerial
triangulation packages.
• Initial values approximated from topographic maps. In this

scenario, only the X, Y, and Z coordinates of exterior orientation
can be approximated.
Why Import Exterior Overall, the availability of the exterior orientation parameters
Orientation Parameters? advances the automation of the workflow associated with creating
orthorectified images. Following are some examples of the
usefulness of exterior orientation parameters.
• If exterior orientation parameters are available, the manual steps

of measuring at least two GCPs or tie points on the overlap areas
of each image in the project are not required to perform
automatic tie point collection. Instead, LPS Project Manager uses
the exterior orientation information to fully automate the
measurement of points.
• If the values for exterior orientation are known to a high accuracy

(that is, less than one meter), the process of performing aerial
triangulation is not required. Thus, the LPS Project Manager
workflow includes defining the block, adding imagery to the
block, defining the camera, specifying interior orientation, and
then performing orthorectification. Additionally, GCPs are not
required.
• If the values of exterior orientation are known to a given level of

accuracy, the initial approximations are useful for ensuring a high
accuracy when estimating the adjusted exterior orientation
information and the X, Y, and Z coordinates of ground
coordinates.
• If the relative orientation parameters between the images in the

block are known, these values can be used to perform automatic
tie point collection.
• If the SCBA is being used to determine the interior orientation

parameters associated with the camera, statistically constraining
the imported exterior orientation parameters increases the
accuracy of the final solution.
The Import Exterior Orientation Parameters button on the Block

Property Setup dialog activates the ERDAS IMAGINE Import Options
dialog. The ASCII file to be imported must have a *.dat file
extension. The contents of the ASCII file must include (in no
particular order or delimitation):
• Image ID
• Image Name

• X
• Y
• Z
• Omega
• Phi
• Kappa
Once a *.dat file has been selected, the Import Parameters dialog
opens, shown in Figure 74 wherein the reference coordinate system
and units of the incoming exterior orientation parameters can be
specified.
Figure 74: Import Parameters for Exterior Orientation
By clicking the Set button, the Projection Chooser opens. The

reference coordinate system and the horizontal, vertical, and
angular units of the information contained within the ASCII file can
be defined. LPS Project Manager automatically transforms the values
contained within the ASCII file to the appropriate projection,
spheroid, and datum used by the block project.
Once the reference coordinate system and units have been specified
and verified, the Import Options dialog opens, as shown in Figure 75.

Figure 75: Import Options for Exterior Orientation
The following properties associated with the input ASCII *.dat file
can be defined:
• Field Type. Choose either Delimited by Separator or Fixed

Width.
• If Delimited by Separator is selected, the following Separator

Character options are provided:
- White Space
- Tab
- Colon
- Comma
- Semi-Colon
- Vertical Bar ( | )
- Space
• Regardless of the Field Type, a Row Terminator Character

must be specified. The options include:
- New Line (UNIX)

- Return New Line (DOS)
- Return (MacOS)
• Depending on the nature of the input, an ASCII Comment

Character can also be specified. ASCII files tend to use
comment characters such as "#" or "*" to differentiate user-
specified comments from pertinent exterior orientation data.

• Depending on the nature of the ASCII file, an ASCII header file
may exist at the beginning of the *.dat file. If this is the case, you
can exclude this information from being considered during the
import by defining the Number of Rows To Skip during the
import.
The ASCII importer is flexible with respect to the column formatting

of the input exterior orientation data. The Column Mapping section
of the Import Options dialog associates the Input Field Number
with the Output Column Name. The Input Field Number defines
the column number within the ASCII file, and the Output Column
Name defines the associated exterior orientation parameter.
Selecting the View option displays the original ASCII *.dat file using
the ERDAS IMAGINE ASCII Editor. Within this environment, you have
the option of modifying, verifying, and saving the original ASCII file.
The Input Preview tab, shown in Figure 76, allows for the
verification of the Input Field Number and Output Column Name
associations.
Figure 76: Preview the Contents of the Input ASCII File
If you wish to change the respective associations, the Input Field

Number can be modified to reflect the input ASCII file. To import
the exterior orientation parameters, select OK.
When the OK button within the Block Property Setup dialog has been
selected, the CellArray updates. If the exterior orientation
parameters were imported, the LPS Project Manager shown in Figure
77 opens.

Figure 77: The LPS Project Manager CellArray with Imported Data
Since the imagery was already added to the block when the exterior
orientation parameters were imported, the image names must now
be attached to the corresponding image files. See “Attaching Multiple
Images”.
Once the OK button has been selected within the Block Property
Setup dialog, the geometric model, projection information, units
and average flying height information cannot be modified.
As an alternative approach, all of the images in a project can be

added to the block within the LPS Project Manager, and the exterior
orientation parameters imported using the Edit All Images option
contained within the Exterior Information tab of the Frame Editor.

Project Setup for The block property setup involves the following steps when the
SPOT, IRS-1C, IKONOS, or Generic Pushbroom sensor models are
Sensor Models
selected within the Set Geometric Dialog:
• Define the reference coordinate system. (that is, projection,

spheroid and datum). (See “Reference Coordinate System”.)
• Define the units. (See “Defining Units”.)
Once the block project has been defined, the LPS Project Manager
opens.
The LPS Project Manager When a new LPS Project Manager block has been created or an
Toolbar existing block opened, the LPS Project Manager and CellArray open,
as shown in Figure 78.
Figure 78: LPS Project Manager
LPS Project Manager Project Setup for Sensor Models / 264

Icons are located on the toolbar at the top of the LPS Project
Manager that simulate the photogrammetric workflow associated
with performing triangulation and creating orthorectified images.
Each icon performs a given portion of the photogrammetric
workflow.
LPS Automatic Terrain Extraction introduces an optional

elevation extraction step in the photogrammetric workflow. You
access the functionality by clicking the DTM Extraction icon
on the toolbar. For more information, see Leica Photogrammetry
Suite Automatic Terrain Extraction Tour Guide.
A photogrammetric workflow using LPS includes the following steps:
Table 6: LPS Workflow
1. Add imagery to the block. This step involves adding one or

multiple images to the project.
2. Input parameters in the frame editor. This step defines the

camera/sensor model properties used to collect the
photography or imagery. If photography or imagery
collected from a camera is used, additional dialogs are
provided for defining the camera and performing interior
orientation.
3. Perform point measurement. GCPs, tie points, and check

points can be measured on one image or multiple images.
Additionally, reference sources can be defined and used for
the collection of GCPs.
4. Conduct automatic tie point collection. LPS Project Manager

automatically measures the corresponding tie point positions
of points appearing on more than one image.
5. Run aerial triangulation. The aerial triangulation process

simultaneously estimates the exterior orientation
parameters of each camera/sensor station that existed at
the time of image exposure, and the X, Y, and Z ground
coordinates of tie points. The exterior orientation
parameters are computed for each image in a block.
Additionally, the camera’s interior orientation parameters
can be estimated by using the SCBA. If satellite imagery is
being used, this process is referred to as triangulation.
6. Create DTM. Click this icon to start LPS Automatic Terrain

Extraction, another component of the Leica Photogrammetry
Suite.
7. Edit DTM Click this icon to start Terrain Editor, another

component of the Leica Photogrammetry Suite.

Table 6: LPS Workflow
8. Perform orthorectification. This process creates orthophotos

showing images of ground features in their true orthographic
or planimetric positions. The orthorectification procedure
reduces image distortions caused by topographic relief,
sensor tilt, and systematic error in the imagery or the
imaging device. Additionally, ortho calibration techniques
can be used to create an orthorectified mathematical model
associated with an image, without resampling the original
image.
9. Mosaic images. Click this icon to open the Mosaic Tool.

Mosaicking is the process of joining georeferenced images
together to form a larger image or set of images. The input
images must all contain map and projection information;
however, they need not be in the same projection or have
the same cell sizes.
10. Collect features. Click this icon to open a feature collection

application such as Stereo Analyst, Stereo Analyst for
ArcGIS, or PRO600. The options available to you depend on
which applications you have installed and licensed. For
example, if you do not have Stereo Analyst for ArcGIS
loaded and licensed on your system, it does not appear on
the list.
The digital photogrammetric workflow is linear. For example, when

using frame cameras, automatic tie point collection cannot begin
until fiducial marks have been measured for each image in the block.
Using the icons located within the LPS Project Manager, moving
through the various steps from left to right allows for the completion
of the photogrammetric workflow.

Adding Images to the Block
Introduction An LPS Project Manager block file can contain a few or many images.
In this section, you learn how to add images and how to improve
their display in the view using LPS Project Manager pyramid layers.
Adding Images A single image or multiple images can be added to the block by
selecting the Add Frame icon or the Add Frame option from the Edit
menu in the LPS Project Manager. Once the option has been
selected, the Image File Name dialog opens, as shown in Figure 79.
Figure 79: Image File Name Dialog
Add Multiple Images To add one image to the block, simply select the image and select
OK. To add multiple images simultaneously, use the Shift and Ctrl
(Control) keys on your keyboard. For example, to select a series of
sequential images, hold down the Shift key, then click the first and
last images in the series. Click OK to add the files to the block. To
select multiple images that are not sequential in the file list, hold
down the Ctrl key, then click the files you want to include. Click OK
to add the files to the block.
LPS Project Manager supports the following raster DLLs:

IMAGINE IMG, JPEG, TIFF, GIF, LAN, Generic Binary, and RAW.
Using the supported raster DLLs, the image files do not need to
be imported.
LPS CellArray Once the images have been added, the LPS Project Manager displays
the CellArray with corresponding image names and associated
process information. The LPS CellArray is shown in Figure 80.
LPS Project Manager Adding Images / 267

Figure 80: The LPS CellArray with Added Imagery
Each image has an associated Row #. Selecting a row within the

Row # column selects that image for a subsequent operation within
LPS Project Manager. This operation may include deleting the image
or creating a pyramid layer for the image.
A right-click on a cell contained within the Row # column opens the
Row Selection menu of the CellArray. The options include: Select
None, Select All, Invert Selection, Delete Selection, Criteria,
Sort, and Goto.
Refer to the ERDAS IMAGINE On-Line Help for a detailed

explanation of these features.
The Image ID column of the CellArray defines a numeric identifier

for each image in the block. The entry must be numeric and unique
for each image. The values can be modified.
The Description column allows you to enter information about the
individual image.
The > column defines which image within a block is the current
image to be used for interior orientation, point measurement, and
orthorectification. For example, when the Frame Editor dialog is
activated, the image to be operated on is that image having the >
symbol assigned to it.
The Image Name column of the CellArray lists the directory path
and image file name for each image. The entry cannot be modified
and must correspond to the appropriate image file name and
location.
The Active column of the CellArray denotes with an X which
image(s) is used for automatic tie point collection, aerial
triangulation, and orthorectification. Each image added to a project
is automatically set to Active. By a selecting a cell element within
the Active column, the X disappears. Selecting the same cell
element once again displays X.
Color coding schemes are used as project management and
organization tools within LPS Project Manager. The default color
schemes within the CellArray include red, indicating that an
operation has not been performed for a specific image, and green,
indicating that an operation has been performed for a specific image.
In order to change the default color codes, select the LPS

category within the Preference Editor. The preferences
controlling color are Status On Color and Status Off Color.

Five additional columns represent the tasks associated with a given
process in LPS Project Manager. These include:
• Pyr. - Refers to the creation of pyramid layers. If pyramid layers

have been generated for an image, the cell element is green. If
a pyramid layer has not been generated for an image, the cell
element is red. The color codes are based on the default settings.
Remember, LPS Project Manager pyramid layers are generated

differently than ERDAS IMAGINE pyramid layers. For more
information, see “Creating Pyramid Layers”.
• Int. - Refers to the completion of interior orientation. If using

frame cameras, the fiducial marks must be measured in order to
compute the interior orientation for the image. At this point, the
cell element is green. If using digital, video, or nonmetric camera
imagery, the x and y size of a pixel in the image must be specified
for the color code to be green.
• Ext. - Refers to the availability of final exterior orientation

parameters. If aerial triangulation has been successfully
performed and the results accepted, the exterior orientation
parameters associated with each image in the block have been
computed. In this case, the respective cell elements are green. If
exterior orientation parameters were imported from another
photogrammetric system or airborne GPS system and accepted
as fixed positions, the respective cell elements are green.
Otherwise, the cell elements are red.
For information about height extraction, see Leica

Photogrammetry Suite Automatic Terrain Extraction Tour Guide.
• Ortho - Refers to the generation of orthorectified images or

ortho calibration. If an orthorectified image was created or ortho
calibration performed, the respective cell element for each image
is green. Otherwise, the cell element is red.
• Online - These cell elements indicate whether the image is

currently online or off-line. If an image is online, the image name
and directory path corresponds to the appropriate image file on
the hard-disk. When imagery is added to a block, the respective
cell elements are green. If existing imagery is moved from its
directory as indicated within the Image Name column, the cell
element is red. Using the Attach option within the Frame Editor
dialog, images that have been moved from their original
locations can be reattached. If exterior orientation parameters
were imported during block setup, the CellArray elements within
the Online column are red since the image name to image file
association has not been made.

Creating Pyramid The Compute Pyramid Layers option allows for the creation of
hierarchical pyramid layers. Pyramid layers are used by LPS Project
Layers
Manager to facilitate and optimize image zooming, panning, and
roaming. Additionally, the pyramid layers are necessary for
performing automatic tie point collection.
LPS Project Manager uses a different construction model for the
creation of pyramid layers as compared to ERDAS IMAGINE *.rrd
(Reduced Resolution Data) pyramid layers. LPS Project Manager
pyramid layers are created using a binomial interpolation algorithm,
whereas ERDAS IMAGINE pyramid layers are created using a user
specified option of Nearest Neighbor, Bilinear Interpolation, or
Cubic Convolution.
If the Compute Pyramid Layers option is selected from the Edit
dropdown list, or a cell element within the Pyr. column is selected,
the Compute Pyramid Layers dialog opens as shown in Figure 81.
Figure 81: Compute Pyramid Layers Dialog
The One Image Selected option creates pyramid layers for the
image currently selected, as designated by the >, within the
CellArray. You can select several images within the LPS CellArray for
which pyramid layers are created (All Selected Images option).
The third option, All Images Without Pyramids, creates pyramid
layers for all the images in the block that do not have existing LPS
Project Manager pyramid layers.
Once the pyramid layers are created for the images within the block,
the Pyr. column within the LPS Project Manager CellArray is green
(completed status).
LPS Project Manager Creating Pyramid Layers / 270

Defining the Camera or Sensor Model
Introduction Defining the camera or sensor model involves establishing the

geometry of the camera/sensor as it existed at the time of
photographic exposure or image acquisition. This includes defining
both the internal and external information associated with a camera
or sensor model.
Interior and When using cameras having one perspective center, including frame
cameras, digital cameras, videography, and nonmetric cameras, the
Exterior
internal geometry is referred to as interior orientation. When using
Orientation satellite sensors such as SPOT, IRS-1C, and other generic
pushbroom sensors use perspective center for each scan line, the
process is referred to as internal sensor modeling.
Defining the external properties associated with a camera or sensor
involves establishing the exterior orientation parameters associated
with the camera/sensor as they existed at the time of photographic
exposure or image acquisition.
Both the internal and external information associated with a
camera/sensor can be defined within the Frame Editor dialog. By
selecting either the Frame Editor icon on the LPS Project
Manager toolbar or the Frame Editor option within the Edit menu,
the Frame Editor dialog opens, as shown in Figure 82.
Figure 82: Frame Editor Dialog
Three tabs are provided within the Frame Editor dialog:
• Sensor. This tab allows for the definition of the image and the
corresponding camera or sensor information associated with an
image. The Sensor tab gives access to the following tasks:
• specifying of the image file location
LPS Project Manager Interior and Exterior Orientation / 271

- viewing an image file
(Selecting the View option activates the ERDAS IMAGINE
Viewer and displays the image within the Viewer.)
- editing an existing camera or sensor model
- creating a new camera or sensor model
• Interior Orientation. When using frame cameras, measuring

fiducial marks establishes the position of the principal point (i.e.,
the origin of the image coordinate system). When using digital,
video, or nonmetric cameras, interior orientation involves
defining the x and y pixel size of the camera CCD, or scanning
resolution used to digitize the film obtained from a camera not
using a CCD.
• Exterior Information. This tab allows for the input of exterior

orientation parameters for a given image or multiple images.
Attaching One If an image has been moved from its original location on a computer
as defined when the image was added to LPS Project Manager, the
Image image name can be associated with the corresponding image file and
its new location. When a cell element within the Online column of
the CellArray is red, the image is no longer online, as shown in Figure
83.
Figure 83: LPS CellArray with Off-line Image
By selecting the Attach option within the Sensor tab of the Frame
Editor dialog, the image file can be associated with the
corresponding image name as it appears in the CellArray.
LPS Project Manager Attaching One Image / 272

Figure 84: Image File in the Image File Name Dialog
Within the Image File Name dialog, shown in Figure 84, the image
file can be located and selected to attach the image name, as it
appears in the LPS Project Manager folder, to the appropriate
image file.
Attaching Multiple For mapping projects containing two or more images, rather than
attach each image separately, multiple images can be attached
Images
simultaneously. To attach multiple images in one directory, select
the Attach option within the Sensor tab of the Frame Editor dialog.
Use the Shift and Ctrl (Control) keys on the keyboard to select
multiple files.
To attach files listed sequentially, hold down the Shift key, then click
the first and last files in the list. To attach multiple files that are not
listed sequentially, hold the Ctrl key and click to select each image.
Once you have selected the files in this manner, click OK in the
dialog. Once images have been attached, the cells within the
CellArray are converted to green.
Defining or This section is applicable to photography or imagery with one

perspective center collected using frame, digital, video, or nonmetric
Editing Camera cameras.
Information
Selecting the Edit Camera button within the Sensor tab of the
Frame Editor dialog provides the ability to edit an existing camera
model. The camera model to be edited displays within the Sensor
Name dropdown list. Selecting the New Camera button within the
Sensor tab provides the ability to create a new camera model. Only
those cameras appearing within the Sensor Name dropdown list
can be edited.
NOTE: More than one camera can be used within a block project.
LPS Project Manager Defining or Editing Camera Information / 273

The Sensor Name dropdown list provides a list of existing cameras
or sensors that are available for use within a block. Only those
cameras or sensors that have been defined are displayed within the
Sensor Name list.
Defining the properties associated with a camera creates a primary
component of interior orientation. For aerial frame cameras, the
interior orientation process involves defining the camera properties
associated with a camera (for example, focal length, principal point,
radial lens distortion, and location of the fiducial marks).
For nonmetric cameras, including digital, video, and amateur
cameras, the process involves defining the camera properties (for
example, focal length, principal point (optional), radial lens
distortion (optional), and the x and y pixel size of the CCD if using
digital or video cameras). If the cameras used photography at the
time of exposure, the scanning resolution used to digitize the
photography must be entered.
By selecting the New option within the Sensor Name list, the
Camera Information dialog opens.
Figure 85: Camera Information Dialog
Within the Camera Information dialog, shown in Figure 85, the

camera properties associated with using a frame, digital, video, or
nonmetric camera can be defined. Within the General tab, the
following parameters can be defined:
• Camera Name. The name of the new camera can be defined in

this field.
• Description. A camera description can be assigned to a camera.

It can be an alpha-numeric string of information.
LPS Project Manager Defining or Editing Camera Information /

• Focal length (mm). The focal length of a camera can be defined
in millimeters. This is normally provided in a calibration report. A
calibration report is provided when aerial photography has been
flown and distributed for public use (e.g., USGS camera
calibration reports). The focal length is required in order to
continue photogrammetric processing.
• Principal Point xo (mm). This parameter defines the location

of the principal point in the x direction, relative to the origin of
the image or photo-coordinate system. The principal point
location is the location where the optical axis of the camera
intersects the image or photographic plane. The deformations
existing within the camera body and lens cause the principal
point to deviate from the image coordinate system origin, which
is normally defined by the fiducials.
• Principal Point yo (mm). This parameter defines the location

of the principal point in the y direction, relative to the origin of
the image or photo-coordinate system.
The Load button allows you to open an existing camera file having
a *.cam extension. Once a *.cam file has been opened, all of the
respective parameters within the Camera Information dialog are
populated. The *.cam file is an ASCII file with a fixed structure.
The Save option allows you to save all of the information associated
with a camera to a camera file having a *.cam extension. The file is
an ASCII file with a fixed file structure. It is recommended that the
camera information be saved once the camera model has been
defined, so that the camera can be reused in future photogrammetric
projects. The Save button saves the existing contents contained
within the Camera Information dialog to the block project and
correspondingly to the *.cam file.
Fiducial Marks
The Fiducials tab, shown in Figure 86, allows you to define the
number of fiducials located on an image and enter their calibrated x
and y image or photo-coordinate values.

Figure 86: Fiducials Tab
By entering a number in the Number of Fiducials field, the

appropriate number of rows is allocated to the CellArray. The Film X
(mm) and Film Y (mm) columns within the CellArray represent the
calibrated coordinates of the fiducial mark positions on the images.
Fiducial marks are physical features located within the camera body.
When an image is captured or exposed, the fiducial marks also
become captured within the image or film emulsion. Prior to
capturing imagery/photography, the positions of the fiducial marks
are precisely determined and measured in a laboratory. These
positions are then provided in a calibration report.
Importing Fiducial Marks Using the CellArray

The calibrated fiducial mark coordinates can be imported into the
fiducials CellArray using the following steps:
1. Enter the number of fiducial marks.
2. Select the Film X (mm) and Film Y (mm) columns using a left-click
and drag. Both columns become highlighted.
3. Right-click to display the column CellArray options.
4. Select the Import option.
5. Specify the input ASCII file.
6. Ensure that the appropriate column name (that is, Film X and Film Y)
is associated with the corresponding information in the ASCII file.
7. Click OK to import the fiducial coordinates.
NOTE: Fiducial mark coordinates can also be exported using the

CellArray.
LPS Project Manager Defining or Editing Camera Information /

Fiducials for Digital, Video, and Nonmetric Cameras
Since fiducial marks are not present on digital, video, and nonmetric
cameras, they are not required as input to define the camera model.
LPS Project Manager utilizes the corners of the image to define the
origin of the image/photo-coordinate system. This procedure is
performed automatically.
Radial Lens Distortion

The Radial Lens Distortion tab allows for the entry and
computation of radial lens distortion parameters associated with a
camera. It is shown in Figure 87.
Figure 87: Radial Lens Distortion Tab
Radial lens distortion is defined as the distortion of an image point

along a radial line from the principal point. The result is displacement
of the image point from its true position. Radial lens distortion is
caused by wear and tear of a lens and inaccurate optics.
Radial lens distortion can be measured using two techniques. The
first defines lens distortion as a function of radial distance from the
principal point, and the second defines the distance as a function of
the field angle from the principal point. The radial distortion values
required for use with both options are provided in most calibration
reports.
If the radial distortion values provided are based on the radial
distance or field angle, they can be defined within this environment.
The Add Point button must be selected for each radial distortion
entry. The number of points to be added depends on the number of
distortion values available.
If an entry is incorrect, the Delete Point button allows for the
deletion of a row within the CellArray.

Once the distortion values have been entered, the radial lens
distortion coefficients can be computed by selecting the Calculate
Coeffs button. The resulting three lens distortion coefficients are
displayed under the K0, K1, and K2 text fields.
Once the lens distortion coefficients have been calculated, the
Residual column within the Radial Lens Distortion CellArray
displays residuals, indicating the degree to which the radial
distortion parameters correspond to the radial lens distortion model.
In some instances, the lens distortion coefficients may be available
or previously computed. In this scenario, the three coefficients can
be entered rather than recomputed.
Selecting OK accepts all of the camera information defined within the
Camera Information dialog and creates a new camera/sensor model
to be used within LPS Project Manager. The new camera model
displays within the Frame Editor Sensor Name dropdown list.
Additionally, once OK has been selected, the Camera Information
dialog closes.
For more information, see “Lens Distortion”.
Interior Interior orientation for frame cameras varies in comparison to

interior orientation for digital, video, and nonmetric cameras.
Orientation
Interior orientation involves measuring the pixel coordinate positions
of the calibrated fiducial marks on each image within a block (if using
frame cameras). When using digital, video, or nonmetric camera
imagery, the process involves defining the x and y pixel size of the
CCD or scanning resolution used to digitize the film, if film was used.
The purpose of interior orientation is twofold:
• to define an image or photo-coordinate system within each

image of the block, and
• to determine the origin and orientation of the image/photo-

coordinate system for each image in the block.
The origin of the photo-coordinate system for each image is the

principal point. The principal point position is determined
mathematically by intersecting opposite fiducial mark positions. A 2D
affine transformation is used to determine the relationship between
the pixel coordinates of the measured fiducials and the film, or
photo-coordinates of the calibrated fiducials.

Interior orientation is semi-automated for frame cameras. For
example, if the positions of two fiducial marks are measured on an
image, LPS Project Manager automatically adjusts to display each
remaining fiducial mark. It is then the responsibility of the operator
to measure the position of the fiducial mark. For digital, video, and
nonmetric cameras, an automated procedure is used to determine
the origin of the image/photo-coordinate system.
Frame Cameras Upon selecting the Interior Orientation tab within the Frame Editor
dialog, the Interior Orientation dialog opens as shown in Figure 88.
Figure 88: Interior Orientation Tab of the Frame Editor
In the CellArray, the image that currently has the symbol > assigned
to it has the corresponding interior orientation information also
displayed within the Interior Orientation tab. The Next and
Previous buttons can be used to navigate throughout the block
during interior orientation. The currently active image name displays
within the upper left-hand corner of the Frame Editor title bar.
To display the image, the Viewer icon (first icon from the left) must
be selected. The image displays within three views. The views
include an OverView, a Main View, and a Detail View.
The primary window displays the area enclosed in greater detail
within the OverView window Link Cursor. The magnify window
displays the area enclosed in greater detail within the primary
window Link Cursor. Figure 89 shows the configuration of the
windows.

Figure 89: Fiducial Marks within the Frame Editor
It is recommended that fiducial mark measurements be made on the

Detail View to ensure sub-pixel accuracy.
Fiducial Orientation Fiducial orientation defines the relationship between the

image/photo-coordinate system of a frame and the actual image
orientation as it appears within a view. The image/photo-coordinate
system is defined by the camera calibration information. The
orientation of the image is largely dependent on the way the
photograph was scanned during the digitization stage.
For information about scanners, see “Desktop Scanners”.
Figure 90 shows a common fiducial orientation as a function of the

image/photo-coordinate system, and the raw image orientation.
Assume the photograph is aerial and has the following fiducial mark
coordinates:

Figure 90: Fiducial Orientation of an Aerial Photograph
3 2
Fiducial X Y
Y
1 -103.947 -103.952
2 103.945 103.924
X 3 -103.937 103.927
4 103.958 -103.952
1 4
The dark bar represents the data strip that is common to

photography captured using frame cameras. The data strip is used
as a reference in determining the manner in which the camera was
calibrated. In this example, the corresponding image/photo-
coordinate system X-axis is positive to the right, and the Y-axis is
positive up.
The fiducial orientation to be used for the above scenario depends on
the existing orientation of the image as it appears within a view.
Figure 91 illustrates the fiducial orientation used for the various
image orientation scenarios available.
Figure 91: Fiducial Orientation Conventions
3 2 1 3
Y Y
X X
1 4 4 2
4 1 2 4
X X
Y Y
2 3 3 1
Note: The black bar represents the image data strip.
The numbered corners represent the fiducials.

In order to select the appropriate fiducial orientation, compare the
axis of the photo-coordinate system (defined in the calibration
report) with the orientation of the image. Based on the relationship
between the photo-coordinate system and the image, the
appropriate fiducial orientation can be selected. The following
illustrations demonstrate the fiducial orientation used under the
various circumstances:
Photo-coordinate system parallel to image orientation.
Image rotated 90° relative to the photo-coordinate system.
Selecting the inappropriate fiducial orientation results in large RMS

errors during the measurement of fiducial marks for interior
orientation and errors during the automatic tie point collection. If
initial approximations for exterior orientation have been defined and
the corresponding fiducial orientation does not correspond, the
automatic tie point collection capability provides inadequate results.
Ensure that the appropriate fiducial orientation is used as a function
of the image/photo-coordinate system.
NOTE: Once the fiducial marks have been measured, do not change
the fiducial orientation. To change the fiducial orientation you should
delete the fiducial mark measurements, select the appropriate
fiducial orientation, and remeasure fiducials.
How to Find the Data Strip

The data strip on a image may vary with respect to the type of frame
camera used to capture the photography. Figure 92 displays a data
strip contained within aerial photographs captured using a Wild
camera.
Figure 92: Data Strip on a Photograph

The data strip commonly contains information associated with the
type of camera (Wild, Zeiss, Jena), the number of the camera, and
the approximate focal length of the camera (e.g., 152 mm).
If a data strip is not present within the photography, it is
recommended that the first fiducial orientation used for photography
be collected along a strip.
Interior Orientation The interior orientation CellArray displays the calibrated fiducial
CellArray mark coordinates, their associated row and column pixel
coordinates, fiducial mark color codes, and x and y fiducial mark
residuals. Once a fiducial mark has been measured, the row and
column pixel coordinates associated with a fiducial mark are
displayed within the CellArray.
Once the appropriate fiducial orientation has been selected, LPS
Project Manager automatically drives to display the approximate
image location of the first fiducial mark. When the fiducial mark is
measured, the image position of the second fiducial mark is
approximated. The quality of the approximation increases drastically
once the second fiducial mark has been measured.
Importing Fiducial Mark Measurements

If the row and column pixel coordinates of the fiducial marks are
available, an ASCII file containing their values can be imported.
The following steps can be used to import an ASCII file containing
the fiducial mark coordinates:
1. Select the Image X and Image Y columns using a left-click and

drag. Both columns become highlighted.
2. Right-click to display each column’s CellArray options.
4. Specify an ASCII file as input.
5. Ensure that the appropriate column name is associated with the

corresponding information in the ASCII file.
Image Enhancement To improve the quality of interior orientation, the image displayed
within the view can be enhanced to optimize fiducial mark
identification and measurement. The following options are provided
for enhancing the display of an image:
• Brightness and Contrast Controls. These controls are located

within the Interior Orientation tab. Changes to the brightness
and contrast levels are applied to the Main View and Detail View
in the Interior Orientation tab of the Frame Editor dialog.

• Set Resampling Method. A right-click within any of the three
views (OverView, Main View, Detail View) displays the Set
Resampling Method dialog, shown in Figure 93. Selecting the
Set Resampling Method option provides three image
resampling methods: Nearest Neighbor, Bilinear
Interpolation, Cubic Convolution, and Bicubic Spline.
Selecting the Nearest Neighbor option within Detail View is

optimum for identifying and measuring the location of a fiducial mark
to sub-pixel accuracy, since the individual pixels of the image are
displayed.
Figure 93: Set Resampling Method Dialog
• Data Scaling. The distribution of grey levels for an image can be

modified to enhance the display of fiducial marks. A right-click
within any of the three views (OverView, Main View, Detail View)
displays the Data Scaling dialog, shown in Figure 94. Adjusting
the histogram adjusts the display of the image to ease fiducial
mark identification and measurement.
Figure 94: Data Scaling Dialog
• General Contrast Options. Sophisticated image enhancement

tools are provided that allow for the variation of image display. A
right-click within any of the three views (OverView, Main View,
Detail View) displays the Contrast Adjust dialog, shown in Figure
95.

Figure 95: Contrast Adjust Dialog
The minimum number of fiducial mark measurements required to

obtain a solution is three. Once three measurements have been
made, the Solve button within the Interior Orientation tab can be
selected to derive a solution. RMS is not provided since the degree
of redundancy is not sufficient. If four fiducial marks have been
measured, the redundancy is sufficient to determine the statistical
quality of the solution. If all of the fiudcial marks have been
measured, the interior orientation solution is derived automatically
without selecting the Solve button.
Fiducial Mark Residuals If at least four fiducial mark positions have been measured, the
corresponding residuals are displayed within the CellArray when the
Solve option is selected. Residual X displays the x residual for a
given fiducial mark, which is computed based on a mathematical
comparison made between the original x fiducial mark position and
the actual measured fiducial mark position in the x direction.
Residual Y displays the y residual for a given fiducial mark, which
is computed based on a mathematical comparison made between
the original y fiducial mark position and the actual measured fiducial
mark position in the y direction.
The global RMSE displays in pixel and micron units. The RMSE
represents the overall correspondence between the calibrated
fiducial mark coordinates and their measured image coordinates.
Values larger than 0.5 pixels, or half the scanning resolution of the
image, infer systematic error and/or gross measurement errors
associated with the image. The error can be attributed to:
• film deformation
• poor scanning quality
• mismeasured fiducial mark positions
• incorrect calibrated fiducial mark coordinates

Deleting a Fiducial Mark Measurement
To delete the pixel coordinate information associated with a
measured fiducial mark, the fiducial mark measurement or
measurements must be selected. A right-click within the Point #
column of the CellArray displays its CellArray options. Select the
Delete Selection option to delete the measured fiducial mark row
and column information. Only the row and column pixel coordinates
are deleted.
Digital, Video, and Nonmetric Cameras

Since fiducial marks are not present in digital, video, and nonmetric
cameras, the interior orientation procedure does not require their
measurement on the images. For digital and video cameras
employing a CCD, the x and y pixel size of the CCD must be defined.
You can do so in the Interior Orientation tab, shown in Figure 96.
Figure 96: Interior Orientation Tab for Nonmetric Cameras
If photography captured from a nonmetric camera has been

scanned, the x and y scanning resolution of the image can be defined
in the x and y direction.
Defining Exterior Defining the external properties associated with a camera or sensor
involves establishing the exterior orientation parameters associated
Information of an with the camera/sensor as they existed at the time of photographic
Image exposure or image acquisition. Specifically, the exterior orientation
parameters define the position and orientation of the perspective
center. Thus, each image in a block has different exterior orientation
parameters associated with it.
The exterior information associated with an image includes:
• the six exterior orientation parameters of an image,
• the statistical weights associated with the exterior orientation

parameters of an image, and
LPS Project Manager Defining Exterior Information of an Image

• the status of each exterior orientation parameter.
Selecting the Exterior Information tab within the Frame Editor

dialog displays the exterior orientation information associated with
an image. It is pictured in Figure 97.
Figure 97: Exterior Information Tab for the Frame Editor
The positional elements defining the perspective center consist of

Xo, Yo, and Zo coordinates. These coordinates are relative to the
reference coordinate system, which is defined by the
projection/spheroid/datum specified during block setup.
The rotational elements of exterior orientation consist of three
rotation angles including Omega, Phi, and Kappa. The rotation
information used by LPS Project Manager is defined during block
setup. If the exterior orientation parameters were imported during
block setup, the respective values are displayed within the value text
fields of the Exterior Information tab. The Next and Previous
options can be used to view the exterior orientation values of other
images contained within the block.
The Std. fields allow for the specification of precisional quality
concerning the input of exterior orientation parameters. The
definition of statistical weight is optional. Defining statistical weight
assists in the distribution and minimization of error throughout the
block. These values are determined in the following manner:
• Evaluating the statistical output of existing aerial triangulation

results of other software packages.
• If existing topographic maps have been used to derive initial

approximations for exterior orientation, a statistical quality can
be deduced from the scale and quality of the topographic map.
• If airborne GPS and INS data are used as input for exterior
orientation, the statistical quality of the post-processed data can
be used as input for the precisional quality of exterior orientation.
LPS Project Manager Defining Exterior Information of an Image /

Once aerial triangulation has been performed and the Update
button (within the Aerial Triangulation dialog) is selected, the Value
fields within the tab are updated.
Exterior orientation parameters can have three status types: Fixed,
Initial, and Unknown. The status type defines the manner in which
the exterior orientation parameters are used during the aerial
• A Fixed status assumes that an exterior orientation value is fixed

in position or orientation, and is not estimated or modified during
aerial triangulation.
• An Initial status assumes that the exterior orientation value is

an initial approximation to the actual value. This status uses a
statistical weight if assigned. The statistical value that is assigned
governs the amount of value fluctuation that occurs during the
process of aerial triangulation.
• An Unknown status assumes that the exterior orientation

parameters are completely unknown. Therefore, the aerial
triangulation process estimates the parameters during aerial
triangulation.
Rather than define the status for each exterior orientation

parameter, the Set Status checkbox can be selected and used to set
the status for each parameter automatically.
Selecting the Next or Previous button displays the exterior
information for the next or previous image listed within the
CellArray.
Editing Exterior Rather than edit the exterior orientation information for each image
Information for Multiple independently, functions are provided for editing multiple images
Images simultaneously.
Selecting the Edit All Images button displays the Exterior
Orientation Parameter Editor dialog, shown in Figure 98, containing
all of the exterior information for each image in the block.
Figure 98: Exterior Orientation Parameter Editor Dialog

The Exterior Orientation Parameter Editor displays for each image:
• image name (cannot be edited)
• image ID (cannot be edited)
• X, Y, and Z coordinates of the perspective center
• Omega, Phi, and Kappa rotation angles
• standard deviation values for X, Y, and Z perspective center

coordinates
• standard deviation values for Omega, Phi, and Kappa rotation

angles
• status of X, Y, and Z perspective center coordinates (e.g., Initial,

Fixed, Unknown)
• status of Omega, Phi, and Kappa rotation angles (e.g., Initial,

Fixed, Unknown)
The status associated with the exterior orientation parameters can

be changed by using the dropdown list activated with a left-click.
Edits or modifications made within the editor are reflected within the
Exterior Information tab. Once aerial triangulation has been
performed and the Update button selected (within the Aerial
Triangulation dialog), the results are updated within the Exterior
Information tab and Exterior Orientation Parameter Editor.
Importing Exterior Orientation Values and Information

Using the CellArray capabilities of the Exterior Orientation Parameter
Editor, an ASCII file containing the exterior orientation parameters
and statistical information along with status information can be
imported. The following steps can be used:
1. Within the Exterior Orientation Parameter Editor, select the columns

to be imported using a left-click and drag. The selected columns
become highlighted.
4. Specify the input ASCII file.
5. Ensure that the appropriate column name is associated with the

corresponding information in the ASCII file.
Image Name and Image ID information cannot be imported since
the information remains fixed once defined.

Using the Import option within the CellArray, exterior orientation
parameter information from other photogrammetric or GPS sources
can be used within LPS Project Manager. The various
photogrammetric sources may include:
• analog stereo plotters
• analytical stereo plotters
• existing aerial triangulation packages (e.g., BLUH, PAT-B,

Albany, PC-GIANT, and SPACE-M)
• digital photogrammetric software packages
Exporting Exterior Orientation Values and Information

Using the CellArray capabilities of the Exterior Orientation Parameter
Editor, an ASCII file containing the exterior orientation parameters
and statistical information along with status information can be
exported. The following steps can be used:
1. Within the Exterior Orientation Parameter Editor, select the columns

to be exported using a left-click and drag. The selected columns
become highlighted.
3. Select the Export option.
4. Specify the output ASCII file with a *.dat file extension.
5. Selecting the Options button within the Export Column Data dialog
allows you to customize the output ASCII file.
Editing Statistical and The Exterior Orientation Parameter Editor is also useful in scenarios
Status Information where the standard deviation and status for each exterior orientation
parameter is the same for each image in a large block. In this case,
the statistical or status information can be specified once and applied
to each image in the block. The following steps are used:
1. Within the Exterior Orientation Parameter Editor select the Std.

(Standard Deviation) or Sta. (Status) columns to be edited using a
left-click and drag. The selected columns become highlighted.
3. Select the Formula option. The dialog in Figure 99 opens.

Figure 99: CellArray Formula Dialog
4. For standard deviation (Std.) values, define the numerical value. For
the status (Sta.), enter Fixed, Initial, or Unknown.
5. Click the Apply button to apply the value or status to each image in
the block selected.
6. Select Close to return to the Exterior Orientation Parameter Editor.
Sensor Model Definition for SPOT, IRS-1C, and Generic Pushbroom Sensor
Models
This section is applicable to imagery collected using the SPOT, IRS-
1C, and generic pushbroom sensor models.
Selecting the Frame Editor option within the Edit menu or the
Frame Editor icon on the LPS Project Manager toolbar displays
the Frame Editor dialog for use with SPOT, IRS-1C, and generic
pushbroom sensor models (Figure 100). The Frame Editor is used to
define the properties associated with the internal and external
parameters of the sensor models.
Figure 100: Frame Editor for Pushbroom Sensor Models
The Sensor tab allows for the attachment of an image name with the
corresponding image file. The Attach button is used to attach image
names to image files.

See “Attaching One Image” for more information.
If the SPOT sensor model was selected, the SPOT Pan (10-meter
resolution imagery) and the SPOT Multispectral (20-meter resolution
imagery), options are provided within the Sensor Name dropdown
list. To edit the properties associated with the SPOT model, the Edit
button can be selected, which opens the dialog depicted in Figure
101.
Figure 101: Sensor Information Dialog for Pushbroom Sensor

Models
The default sensor model information displays—including the focal

length of the sensor, pixel size of sensor, and the number of columns
in the image. The information within the General tab was
determined from the header file of the SPOT image. The Model
Parameters tab displays the polynomial orders to be used during
the triangulation process.
Figure 102: Model Parameters Tab of the Sensor Information

Dialog

Uses of Model Parameters
Polynomial models are used to model the perspective center and
rotation angles associated with the pushbroom sensor as they
existed when the imagery was being collected. Since a pushbroom
sensor has a perspective center for each scan line, the position and
orientation of the sensor is different for each scan line. Thus, one-
dimensional polynomial models are used to define the position and
orientation of the sensor as they existed at the time of capture.
After triangulation has been performed, polynomial coefficients are
calculated. The number of coefficients calculated is determined by
the polynomial orders. If the polynomial order is defined as being 1
for each exterior orientation parameter, the total number of
computed coefficients is 12 (that is, 6 for each set of exterior
orientation parameters).
The larger the polynomial order specified, the greater the number of
GCPs required to solve the triangulation solution. It is recommended
that 10 or more evenly distributed GCPs be used. It is also
recommended to use the default parameter setting in which the
second order one-dimensional polynomial is used for perspective
center X, Y, and Z and rotation angle Kappa. In Figure 102, the 0
order model (that is, single coefficient) is used for the rotation angles
Omega and Phi.
If edits to an existing sensor model are made, the sensor model can
be saved by selecting the Save option within the Sensor Information
dialog. Additionally, a new sensor model can be created by selecting
the New button within the Frame Editor dialog.
If the IRS-1C or Generic Pushbroom model were selected, the
appropriate information associated with the image would be
displayed within the Sensor Information dialog.
Defining Frame Attributes for SPOT, IRS-1C, and Generic Pushbroom Sensors
Selecting the Frame Attributes tab within the Frame Editor dialog
allows for the definition of external sensor model parameters
associated with an image, as depicted in Figure 103.
Figure 103: Frame Attributes Tab for Pushbroom Sensor

Models

If a SPOT or IRS-1C image is being used, LPS Project Manager
automatically reads the header information contained within the
image to determine the external sensor model information. For both
SPOT and IRS-1C, the side incidence angle and ground resolution
information is provided. If the Generic Pushbroom model is being
used, the additional options of defining the track incidence angles
and scanning direction are also provided.
The side incidence angle is the angle between the vertical position of
the satellite and the side viewing direction of the satellite when the
sensor is scanning along the side. For SPOT imagery, the angle
ranges between +27 to -27 degrees. The scanning direction is
perpendicular to the direction of flight.
The track incidence angle is the angle between the vertical position
of the satellite and the forward or backward viewing direction of the
satellite. Track incidence angle is used for the German MOMS
satellite imagery. For SPOT data, the track incidence angle is 0.
The sensor line defines the direction of the scan line which is used by
the satellite to record the data. SPOT and IRS-1C use the x-direction
as the scan line. Each scan line has associated with it a perspective
center with six exterior orientation parameters including X, Y, Z,
omega, phi, and kappa. LPS Project Manager computes the exterior
orientation parameters of the scan lines based on measured GCPs.
Sensor Model Definition for IKONOS Sensor Model

In order to accurately create or extract geographic information from
raw IKONOS imagery, the Image Geometry Model (IGM) must
accompany the imagery. The IGM consists of several metadata files
which contain RPCs. The RPCs are a series of coefficients that
describe the relationship between the image as it existed when
captured and the Earth’s surface. With the availability of RPCs, the
IKONOS interior and exterior orientation is very accurate.
The Sensor tab on the Frame Editor dialog is where you provide LPS
Project Manager with RPC information necessary to create the sensor
model. Figure 104 depicts the sensor setup of IKONOS imagery.
Figure 104: Sensor Tab for IKONOS Sensor Model

The software looks for the RPC file in the same directory as the .tif
file you added to the block file. Also included is a place for you to
supply the minimum and maximum elevation (in meters) of the
IKONOS scene. This information improves the accuracy of the output
orthoimage.
Figure 105: Chipping Tab for IKONOS Sensor Model
The chipping tab allows calculation of RPCs for an image chip rather
than the full, original image from which the chip was derived. This is
possible when you specify an affine relationship (pixel) between the
chip and the full, original image.
Use of this tab is only required when the RPCs that accompany
the image chip correspond to the full, original image and not the
chip itself. Typically, this is not the case.
In the case of Arbitrary Affine, the formulas are as follows:
x' = ax + by + c
y' = dx + ey + f

In the formulas, x' (x prime) and y' (y prime) correspond to pixel
coordinates in the full, original image. The values x and y correspond
to pixel coordinates in the chip you are currently working with.
Values for the following variables are either obtained from the
header data of the chip, or default to predetermined values:
a=A scale factor which is also used in rotation. In the absence of
header data, this value defaults to 1.
b=A value used in rotation. In the absence of header data, this
value defaults to 0.
c=An offset value. In the absence of header data, this value
defaults to 0.
d=A value used in rotation. In the absence of header data, this
value defaults to 0.
e=A scale factor that is also used in rotation. In the absence of
header data, this value defaults to 1.
f=An offset value. In the absence of header data, this value
defaults to 0.
In the case of Scale and Offset, the formulas are as follows:
x
x' = colscale x + coloffset
x
y' = rowscale y + rowoffset
In the formulas, x' (x prime) and y' (y prime) correspond to the pixel
coordinates for the full, original image. Otherwise, the values
correspond to those used in the Arbitrary Affine, above, as follows:
colscale=(Column Scale) This value corresponds to value e, as
defined above.
coloffset=(Column Offset) This value corresponds to value f, as
defined above.
rowscale=(Row Scale) This value corresponds to value a, as
defined above.
rowoffset=(Row Offset) This value corresponds to value c, as
defined above.
The values for b and d, as defined above, are set to 0.
The Full Row Count is the number of rows in the full, original
image. If the header data is absent, this value corresponds to the
row count of the chip. Likewise, the Full Column Count is the
number of columns in the full, original image. If the header data is
absent, this value corresponds to the column count of the chip.

Measuring GCPs, Check Points, and Tie
Points
Introduction The Point Measurement tool, shown in Figure 106 is used to measure
the GCPs, check points, and tie points appearing on one or more
overlapping images. The Point Measurement tool serves several
purposes including:
• collecting and entering GCP and check point coordinates
• measuring the image positions of GCPs, check points, and tie

points
• defining the statistical quality of the GCPs
• launching processes associated with automatic tie point

collection and aerial triangulation
Figure 106: Point Measurement Tool

The Point Measurement tool can be divided into three categories:
Point Measurement views, Point Measurement CellArrays, and Point
Measurement tools.
Point The Point Measurement tool allows for the display of two images
contained within a block. Each image has associated with it an
Measurement OverView, Main View and Detail View. A Link Cursor located within
Views the OverView and Main View is used to zoom in and out of an image
area and roam around an image to identify the image positions of
GCPs, check points, and tie points. Within the Point Measurement
views, the image positions of GCPs, check points, and tie points can
be measured. The Detail View is commonly used for image
measurement.
Image Enhancement To increase the quality of Point Measurement, the images displayed
within the Point Measurement views can be enhanced to optimize
GCP identification and measurement. The following options are
provided for enhancing the display of an image:
• Brightness and Contrast Controls. Changes to the brightness

and contrast levels can be applied to the Main View and Detail
View in the Point Measurement tool.
• Set Resampling Method. A right-click within any of the three

views: OverView, Main View, Detail View) displays the Set
Resampling Method option (Figure 107). Selecting the Set
Resampling Method option provides three image resampling
methods including Nearest Neighbor, Bilinear Interpolation,
Cubic Convolution, and Bicubic Spline.
Figure 107: Set Resampling Method Dialog
Selecting the Nearest Neighbor option within the Detail View is

optimum for identifying and measuring the location of a GCP to
sub-pixel accuracy.
• Data Scaling. The distribution of grey levels for a image can be

modified to enhance the display of the GCP locations. A right-
click within any of the three views (OverView, Main View, Detail
View) displays the Set Data Scaling dialog (Figure 108).
LPS Project Manager Point Measurement Views / 298

Figure 108: Set Data Scaling Dialog
Adjusting the histogram adjusts the display of the image to

enhance point identification and measurement.
• General Contrast Options. Sophisticated image enhancement

tools are provided that allow for the variation of image display. A
right-click within any of the three views (OverView, Main View,
Detail View) displays the General Contrast option, as shown in
Figure 109.
Figure 109: Contrast Adjustment Dialog
• Band Combinations. If using color or multispectral images

comprising several bands of imagery, the band combinations can
be used to assist in distinguishing and identifying GCPs. Figure
110 shows the interface.
Figure 110: Set Band Combinations Dialog
LPS Project Manager Point Measurement Views / 299

Defining the Type of GCPs
The type of GCP defines the characteristics of the point and how the
GCP is to be used by LPS Project Manager during the aerial
triangulation procedure. The Type column within the Point
Measurement tool reference CellArray displays one of the four
different GCP types including: Full, Horizontal, Vertical, and
None.
A Full control or check point has X, Y, and Z coordinates associated
with it. Each control point can also have a standard deviation
associated with it. A standard deviation value can be used to specify
the quality of the GCP during the aerial triangulation procedure.
A Horizontal control or check point has X and Y coordinates
associated with it. Each horizontal control point can also have a
standard deviation associated with it. The Z coordinate for the
control point is unknown and is estimated during the aerial
A Vertical control or check point has a Z coordinate associated with
it. Each vertical control point can also have a standard deviation
associated with it. The X and Y coordinates for this control point are
unknown and are estimated during the aerial triangulation process.
A None specification is used for tie points. Its image positions are
known and have been measured, but its X, Y, and Z coordinates are
estimated during the aerial triangulation procedure.
To edit the Type designation for one point in the project, right-click
the Type cell and select the appropriate designation.
To edit the Type designation for all of the points within a project,
select the Type column within the Point Measurement tool reference
CellArray and choose the Formula option. Within the Formula
dialog, input the appropriate designation and select Apply. The
Type designation is applied to all of the points simultaneously.
Defining the The usage of a GCP defines whether the GCP is a control point, check
point, or tie point.
Usage of GCPs
A control point has either its X, Y, and Z coordinates known (Full),
X and Y coordinates known (Horizontal), or Z coordinates known
(Vertical). During the aerial triangulation procedure, the X, Y, and
Z coordinates of a Full GCP can be fixed. If a standard deviation is
assigned to Full GCPs, the values are modified during aerial
triangulation. The Z coordinate of a horizontal control point is
estimated during the aerial triangulation procedure. The X and Y
coordinates of a vertical control point are estimated during the aerial
triangulation procedure.
LPS Project Manager Defining the Usage of GCPs / 300

A check point is used to independently verify the quality of an aerial
triangulation solution. During aerial triangulation, the X, Y, and Z
coordinates of a check point are not used. The image coordinates are
used to compute new X, Y, and Z coordinates. The newly computed
coordinates of the check points are subtracted from the input values.
The differences in coordinate values are residuals which are
displayed within the X Residual, Y Residual, and/or Z Residual
columns of the Point Measurement tool CellArray.
Display the X, Y, and Z residual columns by selecting the Viewing

Properties icon. Then click the Advanced radio button and the
Residual checkbox.
A tie point is the image/photo-coordinate position of an object

appearing on two or more images with overlapping areas. The X, Y,
and Z coordinates of a tie point are determined by LPS Project
Manager during the aerial triangulation procedure. The resulting X,
Y, and Z coordinates are then displayed within the X Reference, Y
Reference, and Z Reference columns of the CellArray if the
triangulation results are accepted. Once the coordinates of a tie point
have been estimated, the point can be used as a control point for
other applications (for example, geo correction). This approach in
creating control points is also known as control point extension.
To edit the Usage designation for one point in the project, right-click
the Usage cell and select the appropriate designation.
To edit the Usage designation for all of the points within a project,
select the Usage column within the Point Measurement tool
CellArray and choose the Formula option. Within the Formula
dialog, input the appropriate designation and select Apply. The
Usage designation is applied to all of the points which were selected
simultaneously.
Importing Ground
Coordinates Using the
CellArray
1. Add the number of points to be imported by clicking the Add button

within the Point Measurement tool.
2. Within the Point Measurement tool CellArray, select the appropriate

columns to be imported. This may include:
- Point ID
- Description
- Type
- Usage
- X, Y, Z
- Std X, Std, Y, Std Z

Hold the Shift key on the keyboard and left-click to select
nonadjacent columns.
5. Select the Import ASCII file name.
6. To customize the import procedure, select the Options button within

the Import Column Data dialog. Customize the import procedure as
a function of delimiters, row terminator, and column mapping.
7. Select OK to import the GCP information contained within the ASCII

file.
Exporting Ground
Coordinates Using the
CellArray

columns to be exported. These may include:
- Point ID
- Description
- Type
- Usage
- X, Y, Z
- Std. Xo, Std. Yo, Std. Zo, etc.
Hold the Shift key on the keyboard and left-click to select

nonadjacent columns.
3. Select the Export option.
4. Enter the Output ASCII file name. The ASCII file is stored as a *.dat
file.
5. To customize the export procedure, select the Options button within

the Export Column Data dialog. Customize the export procedure as
a function of delimiters, row terminator, and column mapping.
6. Select OK to export the ground coordinate information to the

specified ASCII file.

Defining the The quality of GCPs obtained from various reference sources can be
defined to optimize the distribution of error throughout the block
Statistical Quality
during the triangulation procedure. A standard deviation can be
of GCPs assigned to the GCPs to indicate the quality of the GCPs. For
example, if a GCP was digitized off a topographic map, and the
accuracy of the topographic map was 20 meters in X, Y, and 10
meters in Z, the corresponding standard deviation of the GCP would
be 20 meters for X and Y, and 10 meters for Z.
If the GCPs have different standard deviation values associated with
them, the Point Measurement tool should be used to input the
statistical information. If all of the GCPs have the same standard
deviation values, the Point tab of the Aerial Triangulation dialog can
be used to input the statistical information.
See “Assigning Statistical Weights to GCPs” for more information

about assigning statistical weights.
The following steps are used to define the statistical quality of the
GCPs:
1. Select the Viewing Properties icon within the Point Measurement

tool.
The dialog shown in Figure 111 opens.
Figure 111: Viewing Properties Dialog
2. Select the Advanced radio button, and choose the Std. option.
Select OK. The X, Y, and Z Std. columns are displayed within the
Point Measurement tool CellArray.

Std. X, Y, Z (Standard Deviation) columns using a left-click and
drag. The selected columns are highlighted.
4. Right-click to display the Column Options menu.
5. Select the Formula option. The dialog in Figure 112 opens.
LPS Project Manager Defining the Statistical Quality of GCPs / 303

Figure 112: Formula Dialog of the LPS CellArray
6. Within the Formula dialog, input the appropriate standard deviation

values. Selecting the Apply button applies the value to each GCP
selected.
7. Select Close to return to the Point Measurement tool. Direct

keyboard input can be used to specify the statistical quality of
individual GCPs.
Collecting Horizontal LPS Project Manager supports the use of GCPs obtained from various
Reference GCPs reference sources. This includes existing orthorectified images, geo
corrected images, vector Arc Coverages, annotation layers, ASCII
text files, and digitizing tablets.
The Set Horizontal Reference Source option allows for the
collection of horizontal GCPs. You select the reference source from
the dialog depicted in Figure 113.
Figure 113: GCP Reference Source Dialog from the Point

Measurement Tool
The following steps are used to collect GCPs from an existing

orthorectified image:
1. Select the Set Horizontal Reference Source icon .
LPS Project Manager Defining the Statistical Quality of GCPs /

2. Select the Image Layer option in the GCP Reference Source dialog,
then click OK.
3. Within the Reference Image Layer File Selector, specify the

orthorectified image as the input file, and select OK. The horizontal
reference source file name displays within the lower right portion of
4. Within the Point Measurement tool, click on the Use Viewer As

Reference Source option.
5. The existing orthorectified image displays within the left portion of

the Point Measurement views.
6. Select the Add button to begin collecting GCPs. The Detail View is
ideal for the identification and measurement of horizontal reference
GCPs. Once a point has been measured, the corresponding X and Y
ground coordinates are displayed within the Point Measurement
CellArray.
7. Identify and measure the corresponding image positions of the GCPs

on the block of imagery.
Ensure that the horizontal reference GCPs conform to the same
projection, spheroid, and datum as the block.
Collecting Vertical If horizontal GCPs have already been collected, the following steps
Reference GCPs are used to define the vertical (Z) component of existing horizontal
GCPs:
1. Select the Set Vertical Reference Source icon .
2. If a DEM is available, select the DEM option and define the DEM file.
If a DEM is not available and the area is relatively flat, select the
Constant option. The vertical reference source file name display
within the lower-right portion of the Point Measurement tool.
3. Within the Point Measurement tool CellArray, left-click within the

Point # column to select the GCPs. Its vertical component is
automatically updated.
4. Select the Update Z icon within the Point Measurement tool. The
Z coordinates of the GCPs are updated and displayed within the
CellArray.
During the collection of horizontal GCPs, the vertical component of
the GCPs can be automatically populated using the following steps:
1. Select the Set Vertical Reference Source icon .
2. If a DEM is available, select the DEM option and define the DEM file.
If a DEM is not available and the area is relatively flat, select the
Constant option. The vertical reference source file name displays
within the lower-right portion of the Point Measurement tool.

3. Select the Automatic Z Update icon . An “x” displays within the
icon once it has been selected .
4. The vertical component of a GCP is automatically added once a

horizontal GCP has been measured.
Ensure that the vertical reference GCPs conform to the same
projection, spheroid, and datum as the block.
Collecting GCPs on For projects comprising the use of three or more images within a
Multiple Images strip, as illustrated by Figure 114, the following steps can be used for
the collection of GCPs:
Figure 114: A Configuration of GCPs Located on Three Images
Image 2
1
4
2
5
3 6
Image 1
Image 3
= GCP (Ground Control Point)
1. Within the Point Measurement tool, define Image 1 as the Left View
and Image 2 as the Right View. The Left View and Right View
image dropdown lists can be used to define which images are
displayed within the Point Measurement tool.
2. Select the Automatic (X,Y) Drive icon to automatically display

the image positions of GCPs on the overlap areas of two images. This
capability is enabled when at least two GCPs have been measured on
the overlap areas of two images. Once selected, the icon changes to
the following: .
3. Select the Add button six times. Enter the GCP coordinates of GCPs,
or use the Set Horizontal Reference Source and Set Vertical
Reference Source tools to define the GCP coordinates.
4. Identify and measure the image positions of GCP 1, 2, and 3 on

Image 1 and Image 2.
5. Repeat step 3 and step 4 for GCPs 4, 5, and 6 on Image 1 and Image
2. The image positions of GCPs 4, 5, and 6 are automatically
displayed prior to the collection of each point.
6. Within the Right View tools group, select the Apply Image Shift
radio button.

7. Within the Right View tools group image dropdown list, select
Image 3. Image 2 is automatically placed within the Left View of the
Point Measurement tool.
8. Identify and measure the image positions of GCPs 4, 5, and 6 on

Image 3.
Collecting GCPs on For projects comprising two or more strips within a block, as
Multiple Strips illustrated by Figure 115, the following steps can be used for the
collection of GCPs:
Figure 115: A Configuration of GCPs Located on Six Images
Image 2
Image 1
1 Image 3
4
2
5
3 6 Image 5
Image 4
Image 6
= GCP (Ground Control Point)
1. Within the Point Measurement tool, define Image 1 as the Left View
and Image 2 as the Right View. The Left View and Right View
image dropdown lists can be used to define which images are
displayed within the Point Measurement tool.
2. Select the Automatic (X,Y) Drive icon to automatically display

the image positions of GCPs on the overlap area of two images. This
capability is enabled when at least two GCPs have been measured on
the overlap area of two images. Once selected, the icon changes to
the following: .
3. Select the Add button six times. Enter the GCP coordinates of GCPs
or use the Set Horizontal Reference Source icon and Set Vertical
Reference Source icon to define the GCP coordinates.

4. Identify and measure the image positions of GCP 1, 2, and 4 on
5. Within the Right View tools group, select the Apply Image Shift
radio button.
Image 3. Image 2 is automatically placed within the Left View of the
Point Measurement tool.
7. Identify and measure the image positions of GCPs 4 and 5 on Image

3.
8. Deactivate the Apply Image Shift option within the Right View
tools group.
9. Within the Left View tools group image dropdown list, select Image
4 and within the Right View tools group image dropdown list, select
Image 5.
10. Select the Apply Image Shift radio button within the Right View
tools group.
11. Identify and measure the image positions of GCP 2, 3, 5, and 6 on

Image 6. Image 5 is automatically displayed within the Left View of
13. Identify and measure the image positions of GCP 6 on Image 6.

Once a GCP, check point, or tie point has been measured, the image
coordinates are displayed within the right portion of the Point
Measurement tool CellArray.

Automatic Tie Point Collection
Introduction Automatic tie point collection utilizes digital image matching

techniques to automatically identify and measure the image
positions of GCPs appearing on two or more images with overlap.
Rather than manually identify and measure tie points on the overlap
areas of multiple images, LPS Project Manager automates the
procedure. LPS Project Manager supports the processing of multiple
strips of imagery, including adjacent, diagonal, and cross-strips.
The maximum number of tie points intended for each image is 500.
If the Keep All Points option is used, the number of tie points
collected for each image exceeds 500 points.
Automatic tie point collection successfully performs the following
tasks:
• Automatic block configuration. Based on the initial input

requirements, LPS Project Manager defines the extent of the
block with respect to image adjacency.
• Automatic tie point extraction. Image feature points are

automatically extracted using an interest operator.
• Point transfer. Ground points appearing on multiple images are

automatically identified and matched.
• Gross error detection. Erroneous points are automatically

identified and removed from the solution.
• Tie point selection. The intended number of tie points defined is

automatically selected as the final number of tie points.
By selecting the Automatic Tie Point Generation Properties option

within the Edit menu of the LPS Project Manager, or by selecting the
Automatic Tie Point Generation Properties icon within the Point
Measurement tool, the Automatic Tie Point Generation Properties
dialog in Figure 116 opens.
Figure 116: Automatic Tie Point Generation Properties Dialog

Minimum Input Since automatic tie point collection processes multiple images with
overlap, LPS Project Manager requires information regarding image
Requirements
adjacency. The minimum input requirements are used to determine
the block configuration with respect to which image is adjacent to
which image, and which strip is adjacent to which strip in the block.
The minimum input requirement can be one of the following three:
• If processing frame camera, digital camera, videography, or

nonmetric imagery, initial approximations to exterior orientation
(X, Y, Z, Omega, Phi, Kappa) can be specified for each image in
the block. These can be obtained from existing aerial
triangulation results, airborne GPS and INS data, or calculated
from an existing cartographic map (Omega and Phi can be
assumed 0 if the degree of photographic or image tilt is minimal).
If processing multiple strips of images captured with different
direction of flight, the appropriate Kappa element must be
specified. The Exterior/Header/GCP radio button is selected
as the Initial Type.
If processing SPOT, IRS-1C, or generic pushbroom imagery, the

ephemeris information (containing orbit and track information)
contained within the header file of the image is used.
If processing IKONOS imagery, the interior and exterior
orientation information is contained within the RPC file associated
with each image.
• At least two GCPs must be measured on the overlap areas for the
imagery in the block. The Exterior/Header/GCP radio button
is selected as the Initial Type.
• At least two tie points must be measured on the overlap areas of

the imagery in the block. Figure 117 illustrates the GCP or tie
point configuration required to perform automatic tie point
collection on six overlapping images comprising two strips. The
Tie Points radio button is selected as the Initial Type.
Figure 117: GCP Configuration for Six Images
LPS Project Manager Minimum Input Requirements / 310

Performing Automatic Tie For scenarios where initial approximations to exterior orientation are
Point Collection: An unknown, GCPs are unavailable and measuring two tie points is
Alternative Solution unrealistic (too many images in the block), but an alternative
solution can be used to provide the minimum input required to
perform automatic tie point collection.
The procedure involves establishing a relative relationship between
the images contained in the block and the ground. The relative
relationship is defined by establishing the relative X, Y, and Z
coordinates of the perspective center for each image.
In order to compute the relative X, Y, and Z coordinates for the
perspective center, the minimum input information includes a focal
length (inches or in millimeters) and scale of photography. Figure
118 illustrates a sample block of images. Its relative X, Y, and Z
perspective center coordinates can be determined. The circle
appearing in the central portion of the individual images is the
perspective center.
Figure 118: Location of the Perspective Center for Six Images
Assuming a 1:40000 scale photography (60% overlap and 30%

sidelap), and a six inch (152 mm) focal length (9 × 9 inch image
size), the relative X, Y, and Z coordinates of the individual
perspective centers are given in Table 7.
Table 7: Perspective Center Coordinates
Image X (meters) Y (meters) Z (meters)
1 0 0 6096
2 3658 0 6096
3 7316 0 6096
4 0 6401 6096
5 3658 6401 6096
6 7316 6401 6096

The perspective center of Image 1 would serve as the origin of the X
and Y coordinate system (for example, 0, 0). Every other X and Y
perspective center coordinate is relative to Image 1. Assuming
minimal photographic tilt, the Omega and Phi rotation angles are
negligible. An ASCII file containing the approximate relative exterior
orientation information can be imported into LPS Project Manager
and used for automatic tie point collection. The information can be
imported using the Edit All Images option contained within the
Exterior Information tab of the Frame Editor dialog.
In the previous scenario, the X coordinate is considered the base
between the exposure stations along a strip having 60% overlap
(that is, 3658 meters). The X coordinate for Image 3 is doubled
relative to its distance from Image 1. The Y coordinate is considered
the base between the strips that have 30% sidelap. The Z coordinate
is considered the average flying height (above sea level).
Table 8 provides the Base X (overlap with 60%), Base Y (sidelap with
30%), and average flying height for various scales of photography in
feet.
Table 8: Photography Scale and Associated Data (Feet)
Photo Flying Ground Overlap Sidelap

Scale Height Coverage 60% 30%
1 to... (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet)
1800 900 1350 540 945
2400 1200 1800 720 1260
3000 1500 2250 900 1575
3600 1800 2700 1080 1890
4200 2100 3150 1260 2205
4800 2400 3600 1440 2520
5400 2700 4050 1620 2835
6000 3000 4500 1800 3150
6600 3300 4950 1980 3465
7200 3600 5400 2160 3780
7800 3900 5850 2340 4095
8400 4200 6300 2520 4410
9000 4500 6750 2700 4725
9600 4800 7200 2880 5040
10800 5400 8100 3240 5670
12000 6000 9000 3600 6300
15000 7500 11250 4500 7875

Table 8: Photography Scale and Associated Data (Feet)

Scale Height Coverage 60% 30%
1 to... (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet)
18000 9000 13500 5400 9450
24000 12000 18000 7200 12600
30000 15000 22500 9000 15750
40000 20000 30000 12000 21000
50000 25000 37500 15000 26250
60000 30000 45000 18000 31500
Table 9 provides the Base X (overlap with 60%), Base Y (sidelap with
30%) and average flying height for various scales of photography in
meters.
Table 9: Photography Scale and Associated Data (Meters)

Scale 1 Height Coverage 60% 30%
to... (meters) (meters) (meters) (meters)
1800 274 411 165 288
2400 366 549 219 384
3000 457 686 274 480
3600 549 823 329 576
4200 640 960 384 672
4800 732 1097 439 768
5400 823 1234 494 864
6000 914 1372 549 960
6600 1006 1509 604 1056
7200 1097 1646 658 1152
7800 1189 1783 713 1248
8400 1280 1920 768 1344
9000 1372 2057 823 1440
9600 1463 2195 878 1536
10800 1646 2469 988 1728
12000 1829 2743 1097 1920
15000 2286 3429 1372 2400

Table 9: Photography Scale and Associated Data (Meters)

Scale 1 Height Coverage 60% 30%
to... (meters) (meters) (meters) (meters)
18000 2743 4115 1646 2880
24000 3658 5486 2195 3841
30000 4572 6858 2743 4801
40000 6096 9144 3658 6401
50000 7620 11430 4572 8001
60000 9144 13716 5486 9601
To compute the Base X and Base Y components for photographs

containing different percentage overlap and sidelap, multiply the
Ground Coverage by the appropriate percentage. For example, to
compute Base Y having a sidelap of 10%, multiply 0.9 by the ground
coverage. Similarly, to compute the Base X having a overlap of 30%,
multiply 0.7 by the ground coverage.
This approach is not suited for areas having large variations in

relief displacement (for example, mountainous regions).
Once the relative orientation parameters have been computed, an

ASCII file containing the information can be imported, or the values
can be entered directly within the Exterior Information tab of the
Frame Editor.
Optimizing Automatic Tie Strategy parameters governing the operation of the automatic tie
Point Collection point collection procedure can be used to optimize the performance
of automatic tie point collection. The factors governing the overall
performance of automatic tie point collection include:
• image quality (poor scanning)
• image content (deserts, water bodies)
• topographic relief displacement
• input quality of the minimum input requirements
Six strategy parameters are provided including:
• search size (pixels)
• correlation size (pixels)
• least squares size (pixels)
• feature point density (10% to 900%)

• coefficient limit (0 to 0.99)
• initial accuracy (0% to 150%)
Search Size
Once all of the interest or feature points have been identified, LPS
Project Manager calculates the approximate location of feature
points on the overlapping areas of multiple images. Once an
approximate location has been identified, LPS Project Manager
searches for the corresponding image positions within a square
search window. The size of the search window can be defined. For
areas with large topographic relief displacement, a larger search size
is recommended. If the default 21 × 21-pixel search window size is
increased, an increase in computation time can be expected.
Correlation Size
Correlation size defines the size of the window to be used to compute
the correlation between image points of common ground points
appearing on multiple images. The default window size is 7 × 7. For
areas containing minimal variation in topographic relief, grey level or
color intensity (for example, desert, agricultural fields, grassy
areas), a larger value (for example, 9 × 9 or greater) can be used.
For areas containing large degrees of topographic relief and grey
level or color intensity variation, a smaller window size is
recommended (for example, 5 × 5). If the default values are
modified, ensure the quality of the resulting tie points.
Least Squares Size

Least squares matching techniques are used to ensure that the
quality of the corresponding matched points is accurate to
approximately 0.1 to 0.2 pixels. The least square size defines the
window size of the two windows appearing over the overlapping area
of two images during the least squares matching process. A larger
window size reduces the number of false matches, but may also
increase the percentage of false matches. Similarly, a smaller
window size may increase the number of false matches while
maintaining a large percentage of good matches. For areas with
minimal relief displacement, a larger window size can be specified.
For areas containing large degrees of variation in image content
(urban areas) or relief displacement (rugged and mountainous
terrain), a smaller value is recommended.

Feature Point Density
During the automatic extraction of feature points, LPS Project
Manager calculates interest or feature points which consist of points
having large amounts of grey level variation within a local
neighborhood of pixels. LPS Project Manager automatically
determines the density of points located throughout the overlapping
areas of the images. The default feature density is 100%. A value of
300% stipulates that LPS Project Manager automatically collects
three times the number of points it normally collects. A value of 50%
stipulates that LPS Project Manager automatically collects 50% fewer
points than it normally collects. For images containing poor image
contrast, a higher value is recommended. For images containing
large amounts of detail (forested and urban areas), or that have a
sharp image contrast, using a smaller value is recommended.
Correlation Limit
The correlation limit defines the correlation coefficient threshold
used to determine whether or not two points are to be considered as
possible matches. Once the correlation between two points
appearing on two frames has been computed, the correlation limit is
compared to the correlation coefficient. If the correlation coefficient
is smaller than the correlation limit, the two points are not
considered a match. A larger correlation limit may result in greater
accuracy, although fewer points may be collected. If a smaller
correlation limit results, it may increase the number of correlated
points, but could introduce false match points into the solution.
Initial Accuracy
Initial accuracy defines the input quality of the input minimum
requirements. If exterior orientation parameters or header
information is used, the parameters should be accurate to 25% of
the true value. A larger value increases the initial search area to
identify and match corresponding image points in the initial
estimation process. If GCPs or tie points are used as the Initial
Type, the initial accuracy is considered as the relative elevation
difference (that is, average elevation difference divided by the flying
height). If the minimum input requirements are of poor precisional
and relative quality, a larger value is recommended. Therefore, if
accurate initial values are available, specify a low value. If inaccurate
initial values are available, a larger value should be specified.
Avoid Shadow
When this option is enabled, tie points are not generated in areas of
shadow, such as building and terrain shadows produced by the sun’s
position at the time of image capture. Avoiding areas in shadow
improves auto tie results. You should choose whether the images
you are working with came from film (Negative) or photographs
(Positive).

t1
t2
∆a a
h
∆d d
h sin ( ∆a ) -
∆d = ----------------------------------------
cos a cos ( a + ∆a )
–5
h • 7.27 • 10
∆d = -----------------------------------
2
∆t
cos a
The shadow displacement can be estimated with the above
equations. The shadow displacement is dependent on the object
height h and the time difference of two adjacent images ∆t = t1 - t2.
Since the airplane flies forward (west to east) on the first strip, and
backward (east to west) on the second strip, the maximal time
difference (the maximal shadow displacement) occurs between the
first image of the first strip and the last image of the second strip.
In the above equations, a is in degrees and can be estimated by the
photographic time (in 24-hour mode), a = (p_time - 12) * 15. For
example, if the time of flight is around 1:15 p.m., then a = 13.25 -
12) * 15 = 18.75 degrees. If the airplane takes 2 minutes to fly one
strip, then the maximal time difference will be 4 minutes (240
seconds). If we assume that the flight is around 1:15 p.m. in a
suburban area where buildings are not higher than 10 meters, the
strip is relatively long and takes two minutes to finish, then using the
above equation yields the maximal shadow displacement will be 0.19
meters. If we assume the image scale is 1:10,000 and image is
scanned with a pixel size of 0.030 mm, then this displacement has
already reached 0.6 pixels. If the maximal shadow replacement
exceeds a half pixel, we recommend using the Avoid Shadow
option. If the maximal shadow replacement is less than one third of
a pixel you probably do not need to use the Avoid Shadow option.
If your block only has one strip, you do not need to use the Avoid
Shadow option because there is usually almost no shadow
displacement between two adjacent images inside a strip.
Performing Automatic Tie With color imagery, automatic tie point collection is performed on
Point Collection on Color one image layer or band, defined by the Image Layer Used option
Imagery within the Automatic Tie Generation Properties dialog.
Prior to performing automatic tie point collection on color imagery, it
is highly recommended that the individual image layers be viewed to
identify which layer or band contains the greatest amount of grey
level variation.

Automatically collected tie points can be verified within the Point
Measurement tool by viewing the image positions of the tie points on
the overlap area of the two frames.
Troubleshooting Tips The following tips can be used in cases where the automatic tie point
collection fails to successfully match image points appearing on
multiple images:
• If exterior orientation parameters or GCPs were used as the

Initial Type, manually measure two tie points within the
overlapping areas of two images and Run the automatic tie point
collection.
• If initial approximations for exterior orientation are used and the

automatic tie point collection process fails to provide a solution,
the Kappa element associated with the exterior orientation
parameters should be checked and modified if required.
The following steps can be used to ensure that the appropriate Kappa
element be defined:
• Ensure that the appropriate image/photo-coordinate system is

defined. The image coordinate system defines the direction of the
x and y image coordinate system. This system is defined by
measuring the fiducial marks on the imagery and selecting the
appropriate fiducial orientation.
Refer to “Interior Orientation” for more information.
• Define the direction of the X, Y, and Z ground coordinate axes.

This involves determining the easting (X) and northing (Y) of the
ground coordinate system. The Z coordinate is normally vertical.
• Determine the relationship between the image coordinate system

and the ground coordinate system. Once the relationship has
been determined, the appropriate Kappa value can be assigned
to exterior orientation. The images in Figure 119 illustrate four
different options for defining the Kappa element as a function of
the relationship between the image/photo-coordinate system
and the ground coordinate system.

Figure 119: Kappa as a Function
1 Image Coordinate System 2 Image Coordinate System

Y Y
Y Y
X X
X X
Z Z
Ground Coordinate System Ground Coordinate System
Specify 0× or 360× Kappa Specify -90× or 270× Kappa
3 Image Coordinate System 4 Image Coordinate System

Y X Y X
Y Y
X X
Z Z
Ground Coordinate System Ground Coordinate System
Specify 180× or -180× Kappa Specify 90× or -270× Kappa
• Once the appropriate Kappa estimates have been determined,

the sign or magnitude of the initial Kappa value should be
changed in order for the automatic tie point collection procedure
to work.

Block Triangulation
Introduction Block triangulation is the process of defining the mathematical

relationship between the images contained within a block, the
camera or sensor model that obtained the images, and the ground.
Once the relationship has been defined, accurate and intelligent
imagery and information concerning the Earth’s surface can be
created.
Block triangulation simultaneously estimates:
• The position (X, Y, Z) and orientation (Omega, Phi, Kappa) of

each image in a block as they existed at the time of image
capture.
• The X, Y, and Z coordinates of tie points collected manually or

automatically throughout the block of images (point
determination and positioning). Once the X, Y, and Z coordinates
of tie points are computed, they can be converted to control
points.
• The interior orientation parameters associated with a camera or

sensor model. This process is commonly referred to as SCBA.
• AP characterizing systematic error within the block of images and

observations (lens distortion).
When processing frame camera, digital camera, videography, and

nonmetric camera imagery, block triangulation is commonly referred
to as aerial triangulation. When processing imagery collected with a
pushbroom sensor, block triangulation is commonly referred to as
triangulation.
Both aerial triangulation and triangulation techniques utilize bundle
block adjustment as the functional model to define the relationship
between image space and ground space. To edit and view the
properties associated with block triangulation, select the
Triangulation Properties option within the Edit menu or select the
Triangulation Properties icon within the Point Measurement tool.
To run the triangulation process, select the Triangulation icon on

the LPS Project Manager toolbar, Point Measurement tool, or the
Triangulate option within the Process menu in the LPS Project
Manager.
Aerial Parameters governing the operation of aerial triangulation can be

defined to optimize the results of using the estimated parameters.
Triangulation
LPS Project Manager Aerial Triangulation / 321

The Aerial Triangulation dialog, shown in Figure 120, allows for the
input and specification of parameters associated with performing
aerial triangulation on frame camera, digital camera, videography,
and nonmetric camera imagery.
Figure 120: General Tab of the Aerial Triangulation Dialog
Convergence Value The convergence value is used as a threshold to determine the level
and extent of processing during the iterative aerial triangulation
procedure. During the iterative process of determining the unknown
parameters, the amount of change between successive iterations is
determined and compared to the convergence value. If the amount
of change between successive iterations is greater than the
convergence value, the iterative process continues. If the amount of
change between successive iterations is less than the convergence
value, the iterative process of estimating the unknown parameters
ends.
For large scale mapping (for example, 1:2000 photo scale), and
projects requiring high accuracy, a value of 0.0001 meters can be
used. For small scale mapping projects (for example, greater than
1:40000), a value of 0.01 can be used, otherwise the default setting
of 0.001 meters is satisfactory.
For scenarios where the quality of ground control is poor and an
aerial triangulation solution cannot be solved, relaxing the
convergence value (for example, 0.01 meters) may provide a
solution. In this case, the accuracy of the aerial triangulation results
is compromised.
Accuracy Estimates Regardless of the project, computing the accuracy estimates for the
unknown parameters is highly recommended. The accuracy
estimates describe the quality of the estimated parameters. The
accuracy estimates are computed by multiplying the standard
deviation of unit weight by the variance of the individual parameters.
The variance of the computed parameters is determined and
contained within an output covariance matrix. Accuracy estimates
are computed for:
• exterior orientation parameters for each image
LPS Project Manager Aerial Triangulation / 322

• X, Y, and Z coordinates of the tie points
• interior orientation parameters if SCBA is performed
• AP if a functional model is selected
The accuracy estimates are contained with the aerial triangulation

report.
For information about the aerial triangulation report, see “Aerial

Triangulation Report”.
Optimizing Aerial During the bundle block adjustment procedure of aerial

triangulation, LPS Project Manager uses a statistical technique
Triangulation referred to as least squares adjustment to estimate the unknown
Using Statistical parameters associated with the block of imagery. The least squares
Information adjustment procedure minimizes and distributes error throughout a
block. In order to effectively minimize and distribute error, the least
squares adjustment uses the input statistical properties associated
with the input data to determine the extent and nature of error
minimization and distribution.
The statistical properties associated with the input data reflect the
quality (for example, precision) of the data. The quality of the input
data is defined using standard deviation values. For example, if a
survey field crew used a GPS to collect GCPs accurate to 0.05
meters, the statistical property associated with the GCPs would be
0.05 meters. During aerial triangulation, the assigned statistical
weight is used to govern the amount of allowable error which can be
attributed and distributed to the GCPs.
Standard deviations can be associated with the following
observations:
• image/photo-coordinate positions of GCPs, check points, and tie

points
• X, Y, and Z GCPs
• exterior orientation parameters for each image in the block
• interior orientation parameters
• AP
Assigning Statistical Statistical weights can be assigned to the x and y image/photo-

Weights to Image/Photo- coordinates representing the image position quality for GCPs, check
coordinates points, and tie points. The Point tab within the Aerial Triangulation
dialog, shown in Figure 121, is used to define the standard deviations
associated with the image/photo-coordinates.
LPS Project Manager Optimizing Aerial Triangulation Using Statisti-

Figure 121: Point Tab of the Aerial Triangulation Dialog
If the quality of the measured image/photo-coordinates is weak, a

larger value can be used. It is highly recommended that a value less
than 1 pixel be used. During the iterative aerial triangulation
procedure, the image/photo-coordinates fluctuate within the limits
of the standard deviations. Once aerial triangulation has been
completed, the image/photo-coordinate residuals can be examined
to determine if the appropriate statistical weight has been used.
If the x and y image/photo-coordinates have different measurement
accuracies, different statistical weights should be assigned.
Assigning Statistical Statistical weights can be assigned to the X, Y, and Z coordinates

Weights to GCPs representing the ground quality of the GCPs used in the block. The
Point tab within the Aerial Triangulation dialog is used to define the
standard deviations associated with the GCPs. Within the Point tab
of the Aerial Triangulation dialog, several options are provided for
defining the statistical quality of the GCPs. They include:
• Fixed Values. This option assumes that the GCPs are fixed in the
X, Y, and Z direction. Statistical weight is not assigned to the
GCPs. If this option is selected, large standard deviation values
can be anticipated for the estimated exterior orientation
parameters and the X, Y, and Z tie point positions. This can be
attributed to the distribution of error into these parameters, since
error was not allowed to propagate throughout the GCPs.
• Same Weighted Values. This option allows for the specification

of a uniform statistical weight to the X, Y, and Z GCP coordinates.
The statistical weight assigned can be determined as a function
of the quality of the input GCP coordinates.
• Different Weighted Values. This option allows for the

specification of unique statistical weights to the X, Y, and Z GCP
coordinates within the Point Measurement tool. The statistical
weights assigned can be determined as a function of the quality
of the input GCP coordinates. The Viewing Properties dialog must
be used to select the Std. option in order to input the standard
deviation values of the input GCP coordinates.
LPS Project Manager Optimizing Aerial Triangulation Using Sta-

It is advantageous to assign unique statistical weights to different
GCPs when the quality of the individual GCPs varies. Consider the
following example where four GCPs were surveyed using a total
station to an accuracy of 0.1 meters and five additional GCPs were
measured from a topographic map having an accuracy of 10 meters.
Since the quality of the surveyed GCPs is greater, the influence of
these points during aerial triangulation should be increased as
compared to the influence of the remaining five GCPs. Thus, smaller
standard deviation values can assigned to the surveyed GCPs.
Assigning Statistical Statistical weights can be assigned to the exterior orientation

Weights to Exterior parameters representing the position and orientation of the
Orientation camera/sensor exposure station as they existed at the time of
capture. It is highly advantageous to statistically weight the exterior
orientation parameters if they have been imported from an external
source (for example, airborne GPS, and the existing aerial
triangulation results), or if the quality of the initial approximations is
known. Statistically constraining the exterior orientation parameters
ensures that the final estimated parameters do not deviate
drastically from the user input values (assuming they are correct).
The extent of the deviation or fluctuation is controlled by the
specified standard deviation values.
The Exterior tab within the Aerial Triangulation dialog, depicted in
Figure 122, is used to define the standard deviations associated with
exterior orientation.
Figure 122: Exterior Tab of the Aerial Triangulation Dialog
Several options are provided for defining the statistical quality of the
exterior orientation parameters. This includes:
• No Weight. This specification does not assign a statistical weight

to the exterior orientation parameters. A No Weight
specification can be used if initial approximations to exterior
orientation are unknown or of poor quality.
LPS Project Manager Optimizing Aerial Triangulation Using Statisti-

• Same Weighted Values. This option allows for the specification
of a uniform statistical weight to the X, Y, Z, and Omega, Phi,
Kappa parameters. The statistical weight assigned can be
determined as a function of the quality of the initial
approximations to exterior orientation. Consider the use of
airborne GPS and INS data, which has a positional quality of 2
meters and has a rotational quality of 0.1 degrees. This option
should be used if the quality of input exterior orientation
parameters is uniform.
• Different Weighted Values. This option allows for the

specification of unique statistical weights to the X, Y, Z, and
Omega, Phi, Kappa parameters within the Exterior
Information tab of the Frame Editor dialog. The statistical
weights assigned can be determined as a function of the quality
of the input exterior orientation parameters.
It is advantageous to assign unique statistical weights to the

different exterior orientation parameters when the strength of the
geometric network comprising the block of imagery varies.
Consider the example where sixteen images comprise a block having
four horizontal strips with four images per strip. Aerial triangulation
has already been performed on the block and, due to the lack of
redundancy (that is, minimal control on the corner images) on the
four corner images, the quality of the exterior orientation
parameters for these images is less than the remaining images in the
block.
To ensure that the error located within the four corner images does
not negatively impact the quality of the remaining images, larger
standard deviation values can be assigned to the corner images and
smaller standard deviation values can be assigned to the remaining
images. Smaller standard deviation values ensure that the exterior
orientation parameters do not vary drastically as a result of the aerial
triangulation procedure attempting to distribute and minimize error.
If the initial approximations for the exterior orientation parameters
were imported from an external source and the accuracy of the
values known, different statistical weights can be defined for exterior
orientation parameters.
To increase the quality of the four corner images, additional GCPs
can be measured.
SCBA SCBA estimates the interior orientation parameters and AP

associated with a camera/sensor. The interior orientation
parameters that can be recovered include:
• focal length
• principal point in the x direction
• principal point in the y direction
LPS Project Manager SCBA / 326

SCBA is most commonly used in the following scenarios:
• When the interior parameters associated with a camera or sensor

are unknown. This is commonly the case when using a nonmetric
camera (for example, 35 mm amateur camera, and medium to
large format cameras such as Hasselblad), digital camera, and
videography using a CCD or film. Since these cameras were not
designed for photogrammetric processing, camera calibration
information is unknown.
• When the camera calibration parameters associated with a frame

camera are outdated and incorrect.
Using SCBA, LPS Project Manager accounts for the geometric errors
associated with using noncalibrated cameras for photogrammetric
processing (for example, orthorectification, stereopair generation,
and stereo feature collection).
The Interior tab of the Aerial Triangulation dialog, shown in Figure
123, is used to define whether or not the interior orientation
parameters are estimated using the SCBA.
Figure 123: Interior Tab of the Aerial Triangulation Dialog
In order to perform SCBA within LPS Project Manager, the statistical

weights associated with interior orientation can be assigned.
Several options are provided for defining the statistical properties
associated with the interior orientation parameters. They include
Fixed for All Images, Same Weighted Corrections for All, Different
Weighted Corrections, Same Unweighted Corrections for All, and
Different Unweighted Corrections.
Fixed For All Images The interior orientation parameters are not estimated and are
assumed fixed for each image in the block.

Same Weighted This option allows for the use of the SCBA capabilities to estimate the
Corrections For All interior orientation parameters associated with the camera (for
example, the same camera) used to collect all of the photography or
imagery in the block. Thus, one set of interior orientation parameters
is used in the entire block. Statistical weights are assigned to the
three interior orientation parameters. This option should be selected
if the camera or sensor model was stable between successive
exposure stations and the variation of interior orientation
parameters is minimal. Statistical weights are used to control the
fluctuation of the initial approximations for interior orientation during
aerial triangulation. Use this option if few GCPs are available and the
variation of interior orientation is small between successive exposure
stations.
Different Weighted This option estimates the interior orientation parameters associated
Corrections with each image in the block (for example, different interior
orientation parameters for each exposure station). Thus, each image
has three unique interior orientation parameters associated with it.
This option should be selected if the camera or sensor model was not
stable between successive exposure stations and the variation of
interior orientation parameters is large. If the internal geometry of
the camera varies during successive exposure stations, this option
should be used. Unique statistical weight is assigned to the interior
orientation parameter for each image in the block. The assignment
of unique weight is done internally by LPS Project Manager.
Same Unweighted This option estimates the interior orientation parameters associated
Corrections For All with the camera used to collect all of the photography or imagery in
the block. Thus, one set of interior orientation parameters is used in
the entire block. Statistical weights are not assigned to the three
interior orientation parameters. This option should be selected if the
internal geometry of the camera or sensor model was relatively
stable between successive exposure stations and the variation of
interior orientation parameters is minimal. Use this option if many
GCPs are available. The variation of interior orientation is small
between successive exposure stations, and the precision and
accuracy of the interior orientation parameters are not known.

Different Unweighted This option estimates the interior orientation parameters associated
Corrections with each image in the block. Thus, each image has three unique
interior orientation parameters associated with it. This option should
be selected if the camera or sensor model was not stable between
successive exposure stations and the variation of interior orientation
parameters is large. If the internal geometry of the camera varies
during successive exposure stations, this option should be used.
Statistical weight is not assigned to the interior orientation
parameter for each image in the block.
NOTE: Because of the instability of digital, video, and nonmetric

cameras, the internal geometry of the cameras is not stable during
the collection of imagery. For example, the CCD contained within a
digital camera tends to move within the camera body during
collection. Thus, unique interior orientation parameters can be
associated with each camera station. In this scenario, LPS Project
Manager recovers the interior orientation parameters for each
camera station. This is also applicable when using an amateur
camera.
Optimizing the SCBA In order to evaluate the results of the SCBA, review the estimated
interior orientation values and their corresponding accuracy values.
If the accuracy value for the principal point is larger than the
principal point values, the confidence with which the parameter can
be accurately estimated is low. Similarly, if the new focal length
estimate varies drastically from the initial input value (for example,
several millimeters), recheck the initial input value and reexamine
the SCBA.
The following tips can be used to optimize the results of the SCBA:
• Ensure that at least six Full GCPs are used in the overlap area of
two images in the block.
• Rather than process each image in a block, apply the SCBA to

several images containing an adequate number of GCPs. This
minimizes the influence of weak geometry between many
images.
• If results are inadequate, increase the number of GCPs in the

overlapping areas of the images in the block.
• Since both the interior and exterior orientation parameters are

being estimated in one solution, correlation exists between the
interior and exterior orientation parameters. In other words, the
reliability of estimating interior orientation is negatively impacted
by the estimation of exterior orientation. To minimize the
correlation between interior and exterior orientation, several
options can be used. These include:

- Use oblique imagery or photography. Oblique imagery
minimizes the correlation between interior and exterior
orientation because the optical axis of the camera is
intentionally inclined away from the vertical direction of
exterior orientation. Utilizing highly convergent (for example,
80% overlap or greater) imagery also achieves this effect.
- Use GCPs having a large amount of variation in the Z
direction. If performing SCBA with imagery exposed over flat
areas, the correlation between interior and exterior
orientation negatively impacts the results. Introducing
variable GCPs in the Z direction minimizes the correlation
between interior and exterior orientation.
• If initial approximations to either interior or exterior orientation

are known, assign statistical weights to the corresponding values
indicating their quality. By not statistically constraining the
unknown parameters, the quality of the SCBA can decrease.
• At least six tie points are common to the overlap areas of each
image in the block. The more tie points that are used, the better
the output SCBA results.
Estimating AP for SCBA Due to systematic errors associated with the camera or sensor model
and atmospheric refraction, the quality of the aerial triangulation is
negatively impacted. The systematic errors can be partly or even
largely eliminated by using the SCBA with AP. Under favorable
conditions, improved triangulation results can be obtained if AP is
used. The favorable conditions include:
• Strong geometry between the images in a block. A block can be

geometrically strengthened by using adjacent images containing
at least 60% overlap and 60% sidelap. Utilizing cross-strips also
improves the geometry of a block.
• Evenly distributed GCPs and tie points. Since additional unknown

parameters are being estimated, the number of GCPs used in the
block should also increase to maintain sufficient statistical
redundancy. At least six GCPs in the overlap area of two frames
should be used.
• Minimum correlation between the AP and the remaining unknown

parameters associated with the block which may include exterior
orientation, interior orientation, and tie point coordinates.
• The use of many evenly distributed tie points throughout the

block.
The four AP models provided within LPS Project Manager allow for
the modeling of various systematic error. Select the Advanced
Options tab within the Aerial Triangulation dialog, shown in Figure
124, in order to select the AP models.

Figure 124: Advanced Options Tab of the Aerial Triangulation
Dialog
Bauer’s Simple Model (3)

This model has three AP that come from the research results of Dr.
H. Bauer. Two parameters mainly determine the extent of affine
deformation and one parameter estimates symmetric lens distortion.
Affine deformation is caused by the nonorthogonality of the
image/photo-coordinate axis (for example, the x and y axis are not
perpendicular, or 90°). This model also accounts for scale differential
between x and y pixel size. The mathematical form is as follows:
2 2
∆x = a 1 x ( r – r 0 ) + a 2 x
2 2
∆y = a 1 y ( r – r 0 ) – a 2 y + a 3 x
Jacobsen’s Simple Model (4)

This model has four AP that are simplified from the research results
of Dr. K. Jacobsen. The four parameters compensate for the first and
second order distortions associated with affine deformation and lens
distortion.
2 2
∆x = a 1 x ( r – r 0 ) + a 2 x + a 3 y
2 2 2
∆y = a 1 y ( r – r 0 ) – a 2 y + a 3 x + a 4 x

Ebner’s Orthogonal Model (12)
This model has twelve AP that are derived from the research of Dr.
H. Ebner. The twelve parameters compensate for various types of
systematic error including lens distortion, scanner error, affine
deformation, and film deformation. Since a greater number of
parameters are being estimated, an increased number of GCPs and
tie points is required. The AP are orthogonal to the one another and
to the exterior orientation parameters under circumstances where
the ground surface is flat, and nine tie points are distributed evenly
throughout the images in a block. In the following equations, b is the
average image base line.
2 2 2
∆x = a 1 x + a 2 y – a 3  2x – 4b -------- + a 4 xy + a 5  y – 2b -------- + a 7 x  y – 2b
--------
2 2 2
 3   3   3 
2 2 2
+ a 9 y  x – 2b
-------- + a 11  x – 2b
--------  y – 2b
--------
2 2 2
3 3 3
2 2 2
2 4b 2 2b 2 2b
∆y = – a 1 y + a 2 x + a 3 xy – a 4  2y – -------- + a 6  x – -------- + a 8 y  x – --------
 3   3   3 
2 2 2
2b 2b 2b
+ a 10 x  y – -------- + a 12  x – --------  y – --------
2 2 2
 3   3  3 
Brown’s Physical Model (14)

This model has fourteen AP that are simplified from the research of
Dr. D. C. Brown. The AP compensate for most of the linear and
nonlinear forms of film and lens distortion. The AP are chosen
according to the possible sources of physical errors such as film
deformation, film plate flatness, lens distortion, etc.
2 2 2 2 2
∆x = a 1 x + a 2 y + a 3 xy + a 4 y + a 5 x y + a 6 xy + a 7 x y
x 2 2 2 2
+ a 13 --- x y + a 14 x ( x + y )
f
2 2 2 2 2
∆x = a 1 x + a 2 y + a 3 xy + a 4 y + a 5 x y + a 6 xy + a 7 x y
x 2 2 2 2
+ a 13 --- x y + a 14 x ( x + y )
f
If the Ebner or Brown AP model is selected, it is highly recommended

that an increased number of control points and tie points be used in
the solution.

Statistical constraints can be assigned to the estimated AP. LPS
Project Manager automatically assigns statistical weights to the AP
by selecting the Use Additional Parameters As Weighted
Variables radio button. It is highly recommended to assign
statistical weights to the AP in scenarios where minimal or poor
geometry exists between images and the number of GCPs.
Lens Distortion Model (2)

The lens distortion model is designed to self-calibrate the lens
distortion parameters automatically. This is especially effective for
applications with amateur digital cameras to reduce total RMSE as
well as ground RMSE.
Prior to LPS 9.0, this is the equation used:
2 2 2 2 2
∆x = k 1 x ( r – r 0 ) + k 2 x ( r – r 0 )
2 2 2 2 2
∆y = k 1 y ( r – r 0 ) + k 2 y ( r – r 0 )
Beginning with LPS 9.0, this is the equation used:
2 4
∆x = k 1 xr + k 2 xr
2 4
∆y = k 1 yr + k 2 yr
Starting with LPS 9.0, the r0 parameter has been removed since LPS
9.0 so that k1and k2 can be directly used in the camera editor or
elsewhere without additional computation.
Automated Gross LPS Project Manager provides two error or blunder checking models
which identify and remove errors from the photogrammetric network
Error Checking
of observations. The input observations including the measured
image/photo coordinates are analyzed to determine the erroneous
input data contributing to the overall instability of output aerial
triangulation results.
LPS Project Manager provides two blunder checking models:
• Time Saving Robust Checking. This option uses a robust

iteration with selective weight functions to detect gross error in
the input observations. This option does not cause a significant
increase in the aerial triangulation processing time since the
individual redundancy of each observation is not computed.
• Advanced Robust Checking. This option uses a robust iteration

solution with selective weight functions based on the redundancy
of each observation. The weight functions used in this option
meet the requirements of a rigorous robust estimation function.
Using this option with large blocks could cause a significant
increase in processing time because of the computation of
redundancy for each observation.
LPS Project Manager Automated Gross Error Checking / 333

After each iteration of processing, the weight of each observation
(that is, image coordinate measurements) is predicted for the next
iteration of processing. The new weight is computed based on a
weight function. The weight functions are models which compute a
weight for an observation based on the observation residuals. During
successive iterations, the weight for a bad observation decreases
until it approaches 0. At this point, observations containing gross
errors can be detected.
If blunders or errors have been identified, those observations are
extracted from further aerial triangulation processing during the
iterative least squares solution. Input observations containing error
are listed within the output aerial triangulation report. Therefore,
when the first least squares adjustment is completed, gross errors
are identified and removed. The block triangulation is then repeated
to derive the final solution.
Understanding the Aerial Once the aerial triangulation has been performed, a summary dialog
Triangulation Report and report are provided listing all of the aerial triangulation results.
The information contained within the summary and the report can be
used to determine the quality of the overall solution.
The aerial triangulation summary displays the following information:
• Total RMS error of the solution. The standard deviation of unit

weight is a global indicator of the quality of the aerial
triangulation solution. The value is based on the photo-
coordinate residuals and the ground coordinate residuals. A
general rule of thumb stipulates that the standard deviation of
unit weight should be less than the pixel size of the original
imagery. A smaller value indicates that the residuals within the
network of observations have been minimized.
• RMS errors of the GCPs in the X, Y, and Z direction. These

values reflect the amount of change between the original GCP
coordinates and newly estimated values computed using the
estimated unknown parameters. Large values indicate that the
estimated unknown parameters do not conform with the original
GCPs.
• RMS error of the GCP photo-coordinates. These values

reflect the amount of change between the measured
image/photo-coordinates of the GCPs and the newly estimated
photo-coordinate values computed using the estimated unknown
parameters.
• RMS error of the check point coordinates. These values

reflect the amount of change between the original check point
coordinates and the computed values derived by using the
estimated unknown parameters (for example, exterior
orientation) and the original measured image/photo-
coordinates). The check point RMS values provide an
independent check on the accuracy of the aerial triangulation
results.
LPS Project Manager Automated Gross Error Checking / 334

• RMS error of the check point photo-coordinates. These
values reflect the amount of change between the measured
image/photo-coordinates of the check points and the newly
estimated photo-coordinate values computed using the
estimated unknown parameters. The photo-coordinate residuals
provide an indicator of the quality of the derived exterior
orientation values.
Update Results The Update option updates the exterior orientation parameters
computed by LPS Project Manager. If the exterior orientation
parameters were not known and triangulation was performed, the
Update option updates all of the exterior orientation parameters and
uses these values as initial approximations when a new aerial
triangulation solution is solved.
The Update button should only be selected if the existing exterior
orientation parameters are not satisfactory for use as initial
approximations for performing aerial triangulation. The quality of the
initial approximations for exterior orientation assists in providing
better overall results for aerial triangulation.
Once Update has been selected, the corresponding exterior
orientation parameters are used as the initial approximations for
aerial triangulation. Selecting Update overwrites all of the existing
exterior orientation values.
Accept Results Block triangulation results should be accepted once the results
associated with aerial triangulation have been accurately estimated.
Once the Accept button has been selected, the computed exterior
orientation parameters are used for orthorectification. Additionally,
the X, Y, and Z ground coordinates associated with the tie points and
GCPs are accepted and used.
Aerial The aerial triangulation report lists all of the input and output data
used during the aerial triangulation process. The report can be
Triangulation
divided into several categories including:
Report
• triangulation report unit definition
• image coordinates and interior orientation results
• aerial triangulation results
• automated error checking results
• exterior orientation parameter results
• SCBA results
• control point residuals
• check point residuals
LPS Project Manager Aerial Triangulation Report / 335

• control point, check point, and tie point coordinates, and
accuracy estimates
• image coordinate residuals
The following explanations are provided to better understand the

contents of the aerial triangulation report.
Triangulation Report Unit The units for the image coordinates, exterior orientation rotation
Definition angles, and GCPs are defined. The positional elements of exterior
orientation use the same units as the GCPs. Image coordinate
residuals are displayed in the units similar to input image
coordinates. GCPs, tie points, and check points are displayed in
ground units. The units listed are applicable to output with no specific
unit specification.
The Triangulation Report With IMAGINE LPS Project Manager:
The output image x, y units: pixels
The output angle unit: degrees
The output ground X, Y, Z meters

units:
If a Geographic Lat/Lon reference coordinate system is being

used, the computed exterior orientation values are displayed in
a topocentric coordinate system. The origin of the topocentric
coordinate system can be internally defined by LPS Project
Manager or user-specified.
Image Coordinates and The image coordinates representing the image positions of GCPs,
Interior Orientation check points, and tie points are displayed for each image in the
Results block. The Image ID as specified in the LPS Project Manager
CellArray is used to represent the individual images.
The Input Image Coordinates:
image ID = 90
Point ID x y
1002 952.625 819.625
1003 1857.875 639.125
1005 1769.450 1508.430
1006 1787.875 2079.625
2001 915.020 2095.710
2003 846.530 208.330

...
..
Six affine transformation parameters are displayed for each image.

These coefficients are derived using a 2D affine transformation
during interior orientation. The six coefficients represent the
relationship between the file or pixel coordinate system of the image
and the film or image space coordinate system. The file coordinate
system has its origin in the upper left corner of the image (for
example, 0, 0). The origin of the image space coordinate system for
each image is the principal point. The intersection of opposite fiducial
mark positions is used to define the principal point location.
The six transformation coefficients are calculated once interior
orientation has been performed. The six transformation parameters
define the scale and rotation differences between two coordinate
systems.
Once the image position of a ground point has been measured
automatically or manually, the six coefficients are used to transform
the pixel coordinates of the GCP to image (or film) coordinates:
Affine coefficients from file (pixels) to film (millimeters)
A0 A1 A2 B0 B1 B2
-114.3590 0.100015 -0.001114 116.5502 -0.001117 -0.100023
Thus, the image coordinates and the six affine transformation

coefficients are displayed for each image in the block:
image ID = 91
Point ID x y
1002 165.875 846.625
1003 1064.875 646.375
1005 1007.250 1518.170
1006 1023.625 2091.390
2001 160.900 2127.840
2002 2032.030 2186.530
1004 1839.520 1457.430
2003 49.303 237.343
...
..

.
Aerial Triangulation Aerial triangulation is performed using a bundle block adjustment.

Results This approach utilizes an iterative least squares solution. The
unknown parameters are either estimated or adjusted. These
estimated or adjusted parameters include:
• exterior orientation parameters (X, Y, Z, Omega, Phi, Kappa) for

each camera exposure station
• X, Y, and Z coordinates of the tie points
• interior orientation parameters (focal length, principal point xo,

and principal point yo)
• AP
The corresponding accuracy estimates for each set of estimated or

adjusted parameters are also provided if the Compute Accuracy
For Unknowns radio button within the Aerial Triangulation dialog is
selected.
Input parameters are adjusted if initial approximations have been
provided and statistically weighted. For example, if initial
approximations for exterior orientation are input and statistically
weighted, a new set of adjusted values is computed after aerial
triangulation has been performed.
Input parameters are estimated if they are unknown prior to
executing the aerial triangulation. For example, tie point coordinates
are commonly unknown prior to aerial triangulation. Their X, Y, and
Z coordinates are estimated using the bundle block adjustment.
Least Squares Iterative Results

A global indicator of quality is computed for each iteration of
processing. This is referred to as the standard error (also known as
the standard deviation of image unit weight). This value is computed
based on summation of image coordinate residuals and ground
coordinate residuals for that particular iteration of processing.
The units for the standard error are defined within the General tab
of the Aerial Triangulation dialog. For the first iteration of processing,
the global standard error is larger since the input observations have
not been adjusted (for example, GCPs, photo-coordinates, etc.).
After each iteration of processing, LPS Project Manager estimates the
exterior orientation parameters of each camera/sensor station and
X, Y, and Z tie point coordinates. The newly estimated exterior
orientation parameters are then used along with the GCP and tie
point coordinates to compute new x and y image coordinate values.
The newly computed image coordinate values are then subtracted
from the original image coordinate values. The differences are
referred to as the x and y image coordinate residuals.

If the exterior orientation parameters are incorrect, then the newly
computed image coordinate values are also incorrect. Incorrect
estimates for exterior orientation may be attributed to erroneous
GCPs, data entry blunders, or mismeasured image positions of GCPs
or tie points. Any error in the photogrammetric network of
observations is reflected in the image coordinate residuals.
The computed standard error for each iteration accumulates the
effect of each image coordinate residual to provide a global indicator
of quality. The lower the standard error, the better the solution.
NOTE: The number of iterations using the least squares adjustment

continues until the corrections to the control points (i.e., GCPs, tie
points, and check points) are less than the user-specified
convergence value (for example, 0.001 default). After each iteration
of processing, a new set of X, Y, and Z coordinates are computed for
the GCPs, tie points, and check points. The new set of coordinates is
differenced from the previous set of coordinates (that is, previous
iteration). The differences between the coordinates are also referred
to as corrections to the unknowns. If the differences are greater than
the convergence value, the iterations continue.
Automated Error Checking Results

LPS Project Manager provides two blunder checking models that
automatically identify and remove erroneous image measurements
from the block. The blunder checking models can be specified by
selecting the appropriate model within the blunder checking model
dropdown list contained in the Advanced Options tab of the Aerial
Triangulation dialog.
The results of the blunder checking model are displayed as follows:
The residuals of blunder points:
Point Image Vx Vy
1005 90 0.4224 -0.5949 x wrong y wrong
1005 91 0.7458 -0.6913 x wrong y wrong
1005 92 0.9588 -0.6326 x wrong y wrong
Point 1005 is excluded in the further adjustment:
The x and y image coordinate residuals of the blunder points are

displayed. LPS Project Manager notifies you if a point is excluded
from the aerial triangulation solution. Vx and Vy represent the x and
y image/photo-coordinate residuals, respectively.
The OUTPUT of SCBA:

the no. of iteration the standard error =
=1 0.1438
the maximal correction of the object

points = 40.30844

=2 0.1447

points = 0.74843

=3 0.1447

points = 0.00089
Exterior Orientation Parameters

The six exterior orientation parameters for each camera station are
listed:
The exterior orientation parameters:
image ID Xs Ys Zs OMEGA PHI KAPPA
90 666724.3686 115906.5230 8790.3882 0.1140 0.0272 90.3910
91 666726.8962 119351.8150 8790.0182 0.2470 0.1874 89.0475
92 666786.3168 122846.5488 8787.5680 0.0923 0.1232 88.6543
A corresponding accuracy estimate is provided for each exterior

orientation parameter. The accuracy estimates are computed from
the covariance matrix of the final solution. The accuracy estimates
reflect the statistical accuracy of each parameter.
The accuracy of the exterior orientation parameters:
image ID mXs mYs mZs mOMEGA mPHI mKAPPA
90 2.7512 3.4383 1.8624 0.0266 0.0207 0.0112
91 2.7014 3.1999 1.5232 0.0252 0.0209 0.0109
92 2.7940 3.3340 2.4975 0.0263 0.0204 0.0115

Interior Orientation Parameters
The interior orientation parameters associated with each camera
station in the block are listed. Since SCBA has not been performed,
the interior orientation parameters for each camera station are the
same.
The interior orientation parameters of photos:
image ID f(mm) xo(mm) yo(mm)
90 153.1240 -0.0020 0.0020
91 153.1240 -0.0020 0.0020
92 153.1240 -0.0020 0.0020
SCBA Results
If SCBA is performed, the focal length and principal point values are
estimated. The output appears as follows:
90 153.1220 -0.0097 -0.0039
91 153.1220 -0.0097 -0.0039
92 153.1220 -0.0097 -0.0039
The accuracy of the interior orientation parameters:
image ID mf(mm) mxo(mm) myo(mm)
all 0.0586 0.0664 0.0650
In this case, it was assumed that the interior orientation parameters

were common for each image in the block. For this reason, the
interior orientation values are common for each image. Additionally,
one set of accuracy estimates is computed.
If each camera station has a unique set of interior orientation
parameters estimated, the output appears as follows:
90 153.1164 -0.0190 -0.0156
91 153.1230 -0.0135 0.0003

92 153.1288 -0.0018 0.0038
The accuracy of the interior orientation parameters:
image ID mf(mm) mxo(mm) myo(mm)
90 0.0946 0.1020 0.0953
91 0.0936 0.0995 0.0954
92 0.0985 0.1031 0.0985
In this scenario, accuracy estimates are computed for each camera

station.
Control Point Residuals

Once the bundle block adjustment is complete, new values for the
control point coordinates are computed. The new control point
coordinates are computed based on the estimated exterior
orientation parameters and measured image coordinate values.
The control point residuals reflect the difference between the original
control point coordinates and newly estimated control point
coordinates. Relatively large residual values are indicative of error in
the photogrammetric network of observations. Large error can be
attributed to mismeasured control points, data entry error, and poor
quality of control points. In the example below, the Z coordinate for
control point 1004 is relatively larger than the remaining residuals,
thus inferring a possible error.
The residuals of the control points:
Point ID rX rY rZ
1002 1.4390 5.6596 6.9511
1003 -3.0263 -0.5553 -2.2517
1004 3.0679 2.0052 -11.1615
1005 2.9266 -4.0629 -2.3434
1006 -2.0842 2.5022 2.6007
aX aY aZ
0.4646 1.1098 -1.2410
mX mY mZ
2.5904 3.4388 6.1680
The aX, aY, and aZ values reflect the average residual values for the
X, Y, and Z control point coordinates, respectively. The mX, mY, and
mZ values reflect the root mean square residual values for the X, Y,
and Z control point coordinates, respectively.

Check Point Residuals
Check points are used to independently verify the quality of the
bundle block adjustment. Once the exterior orientation parameters
have been solved, the image coordinate values of the check points
are used to compute the X, Y, and Z coordinates. The computed
coordinates are subtracted from the original input coordinates to
compute the check point residuals. Check points serve as the best
source for determining the accuracy of the bundle block adjustment.
The residuals of the check points:
Point ID rX rY rZ
2001 -4.0786 0.0865 -1.9679
2002 1.6091 -3.0149 3.5757
aX aY aZ
-1.2348 -1.4642 0.8039
mX mY mZ
3.1003 2.1328 2.8860
The aX, aY, and aZ values reflect the average residual values for the
X, Y, and Z check point coordinates, respectively. The mX, mY, and
mZ values reflect the root mean square residual values for the X, Y,
and Z check point coordinates, respectively.
Control, Check, and Tie Point Coordinates; and Accuracy Estimates

Once the bundle block adjustment is complete, new GCP, check
point, and tie point coordinates are computed based on the
estimated or adjusted exterior orientation parameters. The
computation of X, Y, and Z coordinates for tie points is referred to as
ground point determination. If the tie points are acceptable, they can
be converted to control points within the Point Measurement tool.
This process is referred to as control point extension.
NOTE: If the Update or Accept buttons have been selected, the tie
point coordinates are populated within the Point Measurement tool.
The coordinates of object points:
Point ID X Y Z Overlap
1002 665230.007 115015.735 1947.0091 2

8 6
1003 664452.521 119050.097 1990.0849 3

7 6
1004 668152.513 122406.101 1971.3625 2

9 3

1005 668340.390 118681.554 1885.8520 3
6 1
1006 670840.050 118698.603 2014.9514 3

9 4
2001 670966.371 114815.316 1889.9201 2

4 5
2002 671410.339 123163.505 1987.3377 2

1 1
2003 662482.955 114550.158 1927.2971 2

6 0
2004 662662.352 116234.813 2064.6330 2

9 4
...
..
2041 671068.573 123961.878 1971.4592 2

3 8
The total object points = 46
The Overlap column specifies the number of images on which the

point has been measured. This is also an indication for redundancy.
The accuracy of each control point, check point, and tie point is
computed. The accuracy estimates are computed based on the
respective diagonal elements of the covariance matrix for the final
solution. The values reflect statistical accuracy.
The accuracy of object points:
Point ID mX mY mZ mP Overlap
1002 1.0294 1.0488 1.2382 1.9217 2
1003 0.8887 0.8731 1.1739 1.7117 3
1004 0.9693 0.9593 1.2219 1.8311 2
1005 0.7181 0.7063 0.9397 1.3775 3
1006 0.9534 0.9119 1.1841 1.7727 3
2001 1.8123 1.5641 3.1611 3.9653 2
2002 1.9436 1.5091 2.8482 3.7639 2
2003 1.9684 1.7646 3.0069 4.0037 2
2004 1.7427 1.3758 2.6308 3.4426 2
...
..

.
2041 1.9419 1.6884 3.0368 3.9804 2
amX amY amZ
1.2681 1.1773 2.1932
The amX, amY, and amZ values represent the average accuracy
estimates for the X, Y, and Z control, check, and tie point
coordinates.
The Overlap column specifies the number of images on which the
point has been measured.
Image Coordinate Residuals

Once the bundle block adjustment is complete, image coordinate
residuals are computed. The residuals are computed based on the
fixed, estimated, adjusted exterior orientation parameters, GCP,
check point, tie point coordinates, and their respective image
measurements. During the iterative least squares adjustment, the
values of the new image coordinates are dependent on the estimated
or adjusted parameters of the bundle block adjustment. Therefore,
errors in the fixed, estimated, or adjusted parameters are reflected
in the image coordinate residuals.
LPS Project Manager computes the image coordinate residuals for
each image measurement in the block.
The residuals of image points:
Point Image Vx Vy
1002 90 -0.176 -0.040
1002 91 -0.001 -0.016
Point Image Vx Vy
1003 90 0.053 -0.001
1003 91 0.017 0.149
1003 92 0.045 0.050
Point Image Vx Vy
1004 91 0.103 -0.094
1004 92 -0.182 -0.010

...
..
Point Image Vx Vy
2001 90 -0.000 -0.016
2001 91 0.000 0.016
Point Image Vx Vy
2002 91 0.000 0.017
2002 92 0.000 -0.017
Point Image Vx Vy
2003 90 -0.000 -0.094
2003 91 0.002 0.095
Point Image Vx Vy
2004 90 0.000 0.074
2004 91 -0.002 -0.074
Optimizing the Aerial The output results of aerial triangulation can be improved in the
Triangulation Results following manner:
• Increase the number and quality of GCPs within the block of

images.
• Evenly distribute GCPs throughout the block.
• Place at least one full GCP on every third photo if processing 20

or more images. Ensure that the edges and corners of the block
contain sufficient ground control (see Figure 125).

Figure 125: A GCP Configuration for a Large Block of Images
• Increase the number of tie points on the overlapping areas of the

images contained within a block. Studies have indicated that a
greater number of tie points (approximately 200 per image) per
overlap area drastically increases the quality of the aerial
triangulation solution. This can be attributed to the increase in
data redundancy, thus allowing for the minimization and
distribution of error throughout the photogrammetric network of
observations.
• Statistically constrain the exterior orientation parameters and

GCPs if their precision and accuracy are known.
Graphically Analyzing By selecting either the Project Graphic Status option within the
Aerial Triangulation Process menu, a graphical representation of the information
Results pertaining to the block displays. An example of this is presented in
Figure 126.

Figure 126: Project Graphic Status Window
The following information is graphically represented:
• image footprints of each image used in the block
• spatial location and distribution of GCPs, tie points, and check

points
• image IDs for each image in the block
• point IDs for GCPs, tie points, and check points
• residual error vectors for the GCPs and check points
Two display modes are provided including:

• Map space. This display mode displays the observations and
data pertaining to the entire block. This includes image footprints
and all the measured GCPs, tie points, and check points. Ground
coordinate residual error vectors are also displayed.
• Image Space. This display mode displays only one image at a

time, and the photo-coordinate position of the measured GCPs,
check points, and tie points. Photo-coordinate residual error
vectors are also displayed. An image dropdown list is provided for
selecting the image to be displayed.
Residual Error Scaling

The residual error vectors display the difference between the original
GCP or check point values and the estimated positions determined
by the aerial triangulation process. Based on the display, the nature
and characteristics associated with systematic error in the block can
be determined.
Residual error vectors with a consistent direction and magnitude
infer systematic errors that can be attributed to inaccurate interior
orientation information, film deformation, scanner error, camera
instability, etc. Relatively large ground coordinate error vectors
indicate poor GCP quality. Similarly, relatively large image/photo-
coordinate error vectors indicate poor image/photo-coordinate
quality.
By default, the residual error vectors for the GCPs, tie points, and
check points are displayed at a 1:1 scale. The display scale is relative
to the image footprints. In order to increase the magnitude of the
display, select a Residual Scaling % within the provided list. By
selecting a 1000% display scale, the residual error vectors are scaled
1000 times greater than the original value. This option is strictly
used as a visualization tool.
Using LPS for LPS is a digital photogrammetric system. It is not camera calibration
software although it can be used in an indirect way for camera
Camera
calibration. In our triangulation module for frame camera, we have
Calibration five groups of additional parameters for compensating systematic
errors. One group consists of two lens distortion parameters. It can
compensate the lens systematic errors greatly. But, normally, it will
not be able to give the identical parameters as from the calibration
report because of different number of parameters, different accuracy
levels, etc.
For example, there are different ways to compute lens distortion
parameters from the measured distortion values. The common and
simple way is to compute the radial lens distortion parameters k0,
k1, and k2 using the following equation as used in LPS:
LPS Project Manager Using LPS for Camera Calibration / 349

2 4
∆x = k 0 x + k 1 xr + k 2 xr
2 4
∆y = k 0 y + k 1 yr + k 2 yr
Where x and y are image coordinates from principal point and r is the
radial distance from the principal point.
The following lens distortion model may also be used:
2 2 4 4 6 6
∆x = k 1 x ( r – r 0 ) + k 2 x ( r – r 0 ) + k 3 x ( r – r 0 )
2 2 4 4 6 6
∆y = k 1 y ( r – r 0 ) + k 2 y ( r – r 0 ) + k 3 y ( r – r 0 )
Where r0 is a constant and normally equal to half the length of
maximum radial distance.
Therefore, depending upon which equation is used, different
coefficients will be obtained.
Calibration Certificate When using LPS to process images for photogrammetric purposes,
the analyst usually has a camera calibration certificate from the
manufacturer. Normally a calibration report includes the calibrated
values of focal length and principal point.
Some reports also include lens distortion values. The distortion
values are normally represented as corresponding to different field
angles or radial distance.
In the LPS camera editor, once you input the measured lens
distortion values from the calibration report, the software computes
the lens calibration parameters k0, k1, and k2. If you compute the
coefficients using the equation above as used in LPS, you can enter
the values for k0, k1, and k2 directly instead of entering the distortion
values.
If you use the coefficients calculated from third-party software,

you must pay attention to the equation used as well as the sign
of the coefficients.
In LPS triangulation adjustments you can choose an additional

parameter group to compensate the systematic errors inherited in
the image coordinates. One of these groups contains two lens
distortion parameters k1 and k2. The algorithm employs the
following equation:
2 4
∆x = k 1 xr + k 2 xr
2 4
∆y = k 1 yr + k 2 yr

The reason that we consider only k1 and k2 is because k0 has the
same effect as focal length, so can not be self-calibrated with focal
length simultaneously. Therefore k1and k2 represent the most
significant portion of lens distortion. Also, you would not get the
exact values for k1and k2 as from the manufacturer’s calibration
certificate. How accurately the software can determine k1 and k2 is
heavily dependent on the number and accuracy of GCPs.
No Calibration Certificate Without precise laboratory calibration of the lens, many very
accurate ground control points must be used to compute the
coefficients k1 and k2 accurately. The accuracy for your ground
controls should be better than 0.2 pixels when scaled to image
space. For example, suppose your standard deviation of ground X,
Y, and Z is 5 cm, your image scale is 1: 1000, your pixel size is 20
µm, then your ground X, Y, and Z accuracy in the image space is
about 5 * 10 * 1000 / 1000 / 20 = 2.5 pixels. This is unacceptable.
To be used for camera calibration, the standard deviation of your
ground X, Y, and Z in this example must be 5 mm or less.
Also you must ensure that there are no blunders in the coordinates
of your image points or ground control points and that your image
points accuracy is as high as 0.2 pixels. If you have not adjusted the
focus of the camera during your flight for multiple images, you can
define one camera and solve for k1and k2 using multiple images. But
if you have changed focus during the flight (i.e. the interior
orientation is changed) you must compute k1and k2 for each image
separately. For computation of k1and k2 for lens distortion purposes,
the more accurate the GCPs, the better. As a rule of thumb, you
should use at least 50 points of ground control.
The parameters k1 and k2 computed through self-calibration in
triangulation are not automatically fed back into the camera
definition. That is, they do not go back into the camera editor
database, which is wholly separate from the triangulation process.
Locating k1 and k2 in the The values for k1 and k2 are found in the section of the Triangulation
Triangulation Report Report titled “THE OUTPUT OF SELF-CALIBRATING BUNDLE BLOCK
ADJUSTMENT“. From the example below, k1 is -1.4536E-008 and k2
is 2.1057E-013.
Also, from this section the values for xmax (Mx) and ymax (My) are
gathered for the computation of r0, if necessary, as shown in the
equation below.

You must select Lens distortion model (2) for Additional
Parameter Model in the Advanced Options of the Triangulation
Properties for these parameters to be displayed in the
Triangulation Report.
Using Lens Distortion There are two cases in which you may use the lens distortion
Parameters parameters obtained from the Triangulation Report.
If your camera calibration certificate does not provide lens distortion
parameters or if you do not have a camera calibration certificate, you
can use the default values of zero and run triangulation.
Once you get the accurate k1and k2 from the triangulation report for
your camera, simply input these values into the corresponding fields
of the camera editor interface and input zero for k0.
You can use these two parameters for all images from the same
camera used in the similar situation (i.e. same focal length, similar
temperature and humility, etc.) in LPS and even in third-party
software where you can input lens distortion parameters.
If you wish to improve the lens distortion parameters from your
camera calibration certificate, you can enter the values provided in
the certificate into the camera editor and run triangulation.
When you run triangulation you get another set of k1and k2 which
we will call k’1 and k’2. Now add k1 and k’1 to obtain a new k”1; add
k2 and k’2 to obtain a new k”2. Input these derived k”1 and k”2 into
the corresponding fields of the camera editor interface retaining the
original k0 from the camera calibration certificate.
If your camera focal length and principal point are not accurate, you
can calibrate them in triangulation when you have enough accurate
GCPs. After you get the values of focal length and principal point, you
can input them in the camera editor and use them in other projects,
too.
You can test if LPS handles this lens distortion issue correctly by
putting back k1 and k2 into the camera editor then run triangulation
again without selecting additional parameters and keeping all the
other options the same as you did in a previous self-calibration
triangulation. You should get the same triangulation results (same
exterior orientation, same ground X, Y, and Z, and same residuals
up to computation accuracy). The non-calibration report scenario
has been tested with LPS 9.0, and found to yield the same
triangulation results.
There is a small discrepancy encountered by putting back k1and k2
from the triangulation report when using LPS 8.7.2 because of a non-
zero r0 used internally in the self-calibration parameters. In this
case, you have to manually compute a k0 from the k1and k2 with
non-zero r0. The following equation is used.

2 2
x max + y max
r 0 = --------------------------------
-
2
The values for xmax and ymax are found in the triangulation report as
described above along with k1and k2. Starting with LPS 9.0, the r0
parameter has been removed so that k1and k2 can be directly used
in the camera editor or elsewhere without additional computation.
Triangulation of Parameters governing the operation of triangulation for SPOT, IRS-

1, and generic pushbroom sensor imagery can be defined to optimize
SPOT, IRS-1C, and
the results of the estimated parameters (e.g., XYZ tie point
Generic coordinates and exterior orientation information).
Pushbroom The Triangulation dialog, shown in Figure 127, allows for the input
Imagery and specification of parameters associated with performing
triangulation on SPOT, IRS-1C, and generic pushbroom imagery.
Figure 127: General Tab of the Triangulation Dialog
In the SPOT model, only full GCPs or GCPs that are measured on
two or more images are used in triangulation. Horizontal and
vertical GCPs are not used in triangulation.
The General tab within the Triangulation dialog defines the

necessary information concerning the iterative least squares
approach for estimating the unknown parameters of the solution.
The Maximum Normal Iterations option defines the maximum
number of iterations to be used during the least squares adjustment
with constrained GCPs. The normal iterative solution utilizes the
normal weights for the exterior orientation parameters. The normal
weights are determined automatically.
LPS Project Manager Triangulation of SPOT, IRS-1C, and Generic

The Iterations With Relaxation option allows the use of a free-
weighted iterative adjustment for determining the position and
orientation associated with a pushbroom sensor. In this case, very
small weights are used for the coefficients associated with exterior
orientation. If a value of 0 is specified, a free-weighted adjustment
is not used. It may be advantageous to use a free-weighted
adjustment in scenarios where the satellite sensor has complicated
geometry.
Assigning Statistical To optimize the quality of the triangulation solution, GCPs can be
Weights to GCPs assigned statistical weights defining the quality of the GCPs. The
standard deviations associated with GCPs can be assigned within the
Point tab of the Triangulation dialog, depicted in Figure 128.
Figure 128: Point Tab of the Triangulation Dialog
The options provided are similar to those outlined for aerial

triangulation. The standard deviations should reflect the quality of
the GCPs. If small standard deviation values are entered, the quality
of the estimated exterior orientation parameters and X, Y, Z tie point
coordinates suffer.
As a test, it is common to set the standard deviation values to the
ground resolution of the imagery being processed. For example, if
SPOT imagery is being used, a standard deviation of 10 meters can
be used as a test to determine the unknown parameters. Based on
the output results, the standard deviation value can be varied until
the residuals to the GCP and image coordinates are at a minimum
while increasing the accuracy of the estimated parameters (i.e.,
exterior orientation and X, Y, Z tie point coordinates).
Advanced Options In order to optimize the triangulation results, several advanced

options are provided within the Advanced Options tab, shown in
Figure 129.
LPS Project Manager Triangulation of SPOT, IRS-1C, and Ge-

Figure 129: Advanced Options Tab of the Triangulation Dialog
A Simple Gross Error Check model is provided to identify and remove

the erroneous observations (for example, image coordinate
measurements of GCPs) from the triangulation solution. The
procedure multiplies the standard error (or standard deviation of unit
weight) by a user-specified value (for example, times of unit
weight). The resulting value is used as a threshold and compared to
the residuals of the image coordinates. Image coordinates having
residuals larger than the threshold value are discarded from the
triangulation solution.
The remaining options are similar to those used within the Aerial
For more information, see “Aerial Triangulation”.
Triangulation The triangulation report lists all of the input and output data used
during the triangulation process. The report can be divided into
Report
several categories including:
• triangulation report unit definition
• automated error checking model
• iterative triangulation results
• triangulation using a free-weighted adjustment
• exterior orientation results
• GCP residuals
• image coordinate information
LPS Project Manager Triangulation Report / 355

The following explanations are provided to better understand the
contents of the aerial triangulation report.
Triangulation Report Unit The units for the image coordinates, exterior orientation rotation
Definition angles, and GCPs are defined. The positional elements of exterior
orientation use the same units as the GCPs. Image coordinate
residuals are displayed in the units similar to input image
coordinates.
The triangulation report with IMAGINE LPS Project Manager:
The output image x, y units: pixels
The output angle unit: degrees
The output ground X, Y, Z meters

units:
If a Geographic Lat/Lon reference coordinate system is being

used, the computed exterior orientation values display in a
topocentric coordinate system. The origin of the topocentric
coordinate system is internally defined by LPS Project Manager
and can be modified by you.
Automated Error LPS Project Manager provides an error checking model that
Checking Model automatically identifies and removes erroneous image
measurements from the block. The error checking model can be
specified by selecting the Simple Gross Error Check Using options
within the Advanced Options tab of the Triangulation dialog. Once
the radio button has been selected, the times of unit multiplier can
be specified. This value is multiplied by the standard deviation of unit
weight. If an image coordinate residual value is larger than the
multiplied value, the image point is excluded from the triangulation.
The results of the gross error checking model are displayed as
follows:
Points excluded with gross errors:
image pid image_x image_y residual_ residual_

x y
1 4 869.5420 2487.996 -1.8265 0.2271

0
1 8 2890.880 1258.852 1.1212 0.4837

0 0
1 9 1978.138 2919.004 2.1869 0.1647

0 0

The x and y image coordinate residuals of the erroneous points are
displayed. LPS Project Manager notifies you if a point is excluded
from the triangulation solution. The pid designation defines the point
id of a GCP.
Iterative Triangulation The results for each iteration of processing are provided once the
Results triangulation has been performed. A global indicator of quality is
computed for each iteration of processing. This is referred to as the
standard error (also known as the standard deviation of image unit
weight). This value is computed based on the image coordinate
residuals for that particular iteration of processing. The units for the
standard error are defined within the General tab of the
After each iteration of processing, LPS Project Manager estimates the
position and orientation parameters of the satellite sensor and X, Y,
and Z tie point coordinates. The newly estimated parameters are
then used along with the GCP and tie point coordinates to compute
new x and y image coordinate values. The newly computed image
coordinate values are then subtracted from the original image
coordinate values. The differences are referred to as the x and y
image coordinate residuals.
If the position and orientation information associated with a satellite
is incorrect, then the newly computed image coordinate values are
also incorrect. Incorrect estimates for the unknown parameters may
be attributed to erroneous GCPs, not enough GCPs, data entry
blunders, or mismeasured image positions of GCPs or tie points. Any
error in the input observations is reflected in the image coordinate
residuals.
The computed standard error for each iteration accumulates the
effect of each image coordinate residual to provide a global indicator
of quality. The lower the standard error, the better the solution.
LPS Project Manager performs the first portion of the triangulation
using the weighted iterative approach. In this scenario, the normal
statistical weights associated with the exterior orientation
coefficients are used. The solution continues until the corrections to
the unknown parameters are less than the specified convergence
value, or the specified number of normal iterations has been
reached. The convergence value is specified within the General tab
of the Triangulation dialog. The results of the normal-weighted
iterative solution may appear as follows:
Normal-weighted iterative adjustment:
No. Total_RMSE Max_Residua at image pid

l
1 0.973941 4.1854 2 21
2 0.951367 4.0954 2 21
3 0.929783 4.0077 2 21
4 0.909040 3.9213 2 21

5 0.889105 3.8372 2 21
The standard error associated with each iteration is provided. The

units of the standard error are the same as the image coordinate
units. Additionally, the maximum image coordinate residual
associated with a point is provided for each iteration of processing.
Information pertaining to the point id and the image it is located on
is also provided.
It is highly recommended that the number of maximum normal

iterations be set to 5. A lower number may produce inadequate
results.
Triangulation Using a Free-weighted Adjustment

Once the weight-restrained iterative triangulation has been
performed, LPS Project Manager also has the ability to process the
triangulation using a free-weighted adjustment. In this case, very
small weights are assigned to the coefficients of exterior orientation
parameters. This can be referred to as iterations with relaxation.
If the Iterations With Relaxation option is set to a value greater
than 0, a free-weighted least squares adjustment is used. The
iterative solution continues until the corrections to the unknown
parameters are less than the convergence value, or the specified
number of iterations has been reached.
This approach may be advantageous when the sensor geometry is
complicated. The results appear as follows:
Iterative adjustment with weight relaxation:
No. Total_RMSE Max_Residua at image pid

l
4 0.200501 0.7890 1 11
The results for the free-weighted triangulation are displayed after

the results of the normal-weighted triangulation.
Exterior Orientation Once the triangulation solution has converged, the resulting
Results coefficients associated with the exterior orientation parameters are
displayed along with their corresponding precision estimates. The
results are displayed for each image as follows:
Image parameter value and precision:
image id 1:
x: 7.85788145e+0 1.01160973e+0 -9.41131523e-

05 00 006
1.23371172e+0 5.48444936e- 2.94370828e-

03 001 006

y: 3.69353383e+0 2.21320881e+0 5.47762346e-
06 00 006
1.13621691e+0 5.85348349e- 3.22204830e-

03 001 006
z: 8.18549949e+0 -2.73735010e- -6.57266270e-

05 001 005
7.94892316e+0 3.56703998e- 9.53403929e-

02 001 006
Omega: 7.04151443e- 9.23492069e-

002 006
1.39654734e- 7.20947218e-
003 007
Phi: 2.94805754e- -1.31834309e-

001 006
1.64134729e- 7.29915374e-
003 007
Kappa: -1.60676667e- 1.39612089e-

001 007
8.63131836e- 3.89509598e-
005 008
In the above example, the polynomial order specified for X, Y, and Z

is two. Three coefficients were computed including a0, a1, and a2.
Just below each coefficient value is the associated quality. For the
same example, the polynomial order specified for Omega, Phi, and
Kappa is one. Thus, two coefficients were computed including a0 and
a1. The polynomial coefficients can be used to compute the exterior
orientation parameters associated with each scan line.
GCP Results Once the triangulation solution has converged, ground point values
for GCPs, tie points, and check points are computed. If you select the
option Compute Accuracy for Unknowns in the Triangulation dialog,
then the point values display with their corresponding accuracy. The
results appear as follows:
Ground point value and precision in parenthesis:
point id 566190.7372 ( 0.2989) 3773588.399 ( 0.2982) 996.6927 ( 0.3002)

1: 7

point id 555691.3534 ( 0.2977) 3728387.013 ( 0.2972) 228.0382 ( 0.3000)
2: 8
point id 501918.8209 ( 0.3004) 3732593.175 ( 0.3000) 483.9667 ( 0.3007)

3: 1
...
..
The accuracy of each GCP displays in brackets. The GCP information

displays as Point ID, Image Number, X (accuracy), Y (accuracy), and
Z (accuracy). Incorrect points commonly have less accuracy (that is,
larger accuracy value). A relative comparison of accuracy values can
be used to identify suspect points.
Image Coordinate Once the triangulation is complete, image coordinate residuals are
Information computed. The residuals are computed based on the estimated
exterior orientation parameters, GCP, check point, and tie point
coordinates, and their respective image measurements. During the
iterative least squares adjustment, the results from the previous
iteration are compared to results of the most recent iteration. During
this comparison, image coordinate residuals reflecting the extent of
change between the original image coordinates and the new values
are computed. The values of the new image coordinates are
dependent on the estimated or adjusted parameters of the
triangulation. Therefore, errors in the estimated parameters are
reflected in the image coordinate residuals.
LPS Project Manager computes the image coordinate residuals for
each image measurement in the block. The results appear as
follows:
Image points and their residuals:
image pid image_x image_y residual residual

_x _y
1 1 5239.468 337.3840 -0.2213 0.0647

0
1 2 5191.590 4969.546 -0.7131 0.2838

0 0
1 3 230.9250 5378.823 0.0798 0.2689

0
2 1 2857.270 753.8520 -0.0267 0.0850

0
2 2 3003.782 5387.892 0.4579 0.3762

0 0
2 6 2736.125 3070.227 0.2412 0.7679

0 0

The information for each image coordinate displays as image
number, point ID, image x coordinate, image y coordinate, image x
residual, and image y residual. Relatively large residuals indicate
erroneous points which can be attributed to image mismeasurement,
data entry, and incorrect input data.
Optimizing the The output results of triangulation can be improved by considering

Triangulation Results the following:
• Increase the number and quality of GCPs within the block of

images. Ten or more GCPs are recommended for the overlap area
of two images.
• Evenly distribute GCPs throughout the block.
• Increase the number of tie points on the overlapping areas of the

images contained within the block. Ensure that the tie points are
placed within the GCP configuration (that is, polygon defining the
spatial coverage provided by the GCPs), as shown in Figure 130.
The output quality of tie points outside of the photogrammetric
network of GCPs is less accurate.
Figure 130: Tie Points Contained within a GCP Configuration
Control points
Tie points
• If the quality of the GCPs or sensor information (that is, incidence

angles) is weak, increase the value for the Iterations With
Relaxation option.
Refinement With IKONOS data, a separate report is provided, called the

Refinement Summary report. Like other reports, you access it from
Summary Report
the Process | Report option in the LPS Project Manager. The report
can be divided into several categories including:
• adjustment report unit definition
• calculated point coordinates
• point residuals
• image accuracy
LPS Project Manager Refinement Summary Report / 361

• RMSE for points
Adjustment Report Unit The units for the image coordinates, ground units, and Z units are
Definition defined.
Adjustment Report With LPS Project Manager
Output image units: pixels
Output ground units: degrees
Output z units: meters
Calculated Point All of the points in the block file are listed with their type (GCP,
Coordinates control, tie, check), point ID, and ground x, y, and z coordinates.
Calculated ground x, y and z coordinates: degrees meters
type pid ground_x ground_y ground_z
gcp 1 - 32.8355274 114.818951

117.148842 0 94
36
gcp 2 - 32.8371565 163.122553

117.085939 1 60
53
gcp 3 - 32.7498947 92.3812217

117.163955 0 8
42
tie 4 - 32.7006281 3.64127580

117.180853 3
92
tie 5 - 32.8379731 122.585246

117.166058 6 2
80
...
..
Point Residuals The control point residuals reflect the difference between the original
control point coordinates and the newly estimated control point
coordinates.
Control and check point residuals: degrees meters
type pid residual_x residual_y residual_z

gcp 1 0.00006974 - -
0.00020760 0.07104806
gcp 2 - 0.00010101 -
0.00010593 3.90744640
gcp 3 0.00003648 0.00010660 3.93122178
Image Accuracy LPS Project Manager computes the image coordinate residuals for
each image measurement in the block. The results appear as
follows:
Image accuracy for control and check points for each scene:
image id 1:
pid type image_x image_y residual_ residual_

x y
1 gcp 4404.625 608.8740 5.1079 -2.4929

0
2 gcp 4746.631 2037.897 -2.0527 2.6564

0 0
3 gcp 2006.136 739.3350 -3.0552 -0.1636

0
RMS Errors for 3 GCPs: x: 3.6350
y: 2.1054
total: 4.2007
image id 2:
pid type image_x image_y residual_ residual_

x y
1 gcp 4401.625 609.8740 5.5169 -3.0176

0
2 gcp 4737.140 2038.485 -2.5303 2.5398

0 0
3 gcp 2006.525 739.1730 -2.9866 0.4777

0
RMS Errors for 3 GCPs: x: 3.9055
y: 2.2938
total: 4.5293
Summary RMSE RMSE is reported on a point type basis in both the ground and image
space coordinate system.

Summary RMSE for GCPs and CHKs (number of observations in
parenthesis):
Control Check
Ground X: 0.0001 (3) 0.0000 (0)
Ground Y: 0.0001 (3) 0.0000 (0)
Ground Z: 3.2004 (3) 0.0000 (0)
Image X: 3.7726 (6) 0.0000 (0)
Image Y: 2.2016 (6) 0.0000 (0)

Orthorectification
Introduction The orthorectification (ortho resampling) process removes the

geometric distortion inherent in imagery caused by camera/sensor
orientation, topographic relief displacement, and systematic errors
associated with imagery.
Orthorectified images are planimetrically true images that represent
ground objects in their true, real-world X and Y positions. For these
reasons, orthorectified imagery has become accepted as the ideal
reference image backdrop necessary for the creation and
maintenance of vector data contained within a GIS.
During triangulation, the effects of camera/sensor orientation have
been considered. In using frame cameras, systematic errors caused
by lens distortion have been considered by specifying the radial lens
distortion parameters associated with the camera. If using
nonmetric cameras for image collection, AP models can be used to
account for residual systematic error associated with the lens and
camera instability.
By defining a DEM or constant elevation value (ideal for use in areas
containing minimal relief variation), the effects of topographic relief
displacement can be considered.
Ortho Resampling The final step in the LPS Project Manager workflow is
orthorectification.
By selecting the Orthorectification icon on the LPS Project

Manager toolbar or the Ortho Rectification -> Resampling option
within the Process menu, the Ortho Resampling dialog opens, which
is depicted in Figure 131.
LPS Project Manager Ortho Resampling / 365

Figure 131: Ortho Resampling Dialog—General Tab
General Tab The following parameters can be defined and used for the
orthorectification of each image in a block:
• By defining an Active Area Used percentage, the extent of the

input image can be reduced while used to determine the default
upper left and lower right output corners.
• A DTM Source can be specified and used for each image during
orthorectification. It is highly recommended that the area
coverage in the input DTM corresponds to the coverage provided
by the images in a block. The DTM source could be one of the
following: DEM, TIN, 3D Shape, ASCII, or a Constant value.
• Ground resolution can be defined in the X and Y direction

(Output Cell Sizes).
• Upper left and lower right corners of the output orthoimage can
be set using ULX, ULY, LRX, and LRY.
Adding Images By default, the image in the LPS Project Manager that is currently the
reference image, indicated by the > symbol in the CellArray, is
loaded into the CellArray first. You then have the option of adding a
single or multiple images to be processed.
To ensure that images added to the CellArray have the same

parameters as the image currently displayed, set all parameters
in each tab first, then add images.

In the case of adding a single image, you click the Add button and
are prompted by the dialog depicted in Figure 132.
Figure 132: Add Single Output to Ortho Resampling CellArray
Here, you use a combination of the dropdown list and the File
Selector to give your output orthoimage a name. Using the Use
Current Cell Sizes option ensures that this orthoimage has the
same cell size as the one already listed in the CellArray.
If you need to add multiple images, choose the Add Multiple
button. You are prompted by the dialog shown in Figure 133.
Figure 133: Add Multiple Outputs to Ortho Resampling

CellArray
You can use the CellArray to rapidly scan the settings applied to each
of your output orthoimages. To change any singular image’s
parameters, click in the > column to select the image, then make
changes in the appropriate tab of the Ortho Resampling dialog.
Advanced Tab The Advanced tab, shown in Figure 134, has options for
Resampling Method, Ignore Value, Overlap Threshold, and
Projection.

Figure 134: Ortho Resampling Dialog—Advanced Tab
• Resampling Method includes Nearest Neighbor, Bilinear

Interpolation, and Cubic Convolution.
It is recommended that the DEM Resampling Method within

the LPS preferences be specified as Bilinear Interpolation.
• Overlap Threshold. Any image that has less than the threshold
percentage of overlap with the DTM is not orthorectified. Images
with greater than the threshold percentage of overlap with the
DTM result in orthorectified output for the intersection (overlap)
areas only. By default, the value is 30%, but the threshold can
be set as low as 0.5%.
For example, if the threshold value is 10% and the percentage of

the overlap is 45% between the DTM and the image, the resulting
orthoimage is the intersecting 45% of the original scene. If the
percentage of the overlap is 5%, then orthorectification is not
performed.
• Ignore Value. It is highly recommended to use this option if the

imagery contains areas with 0 values in the background.
• Projection and Units of the output orthoimage can be reset.

Once the settings are accurate, you can proceed to the resampling
process by clicking OK, or by clicking Batch, which can process the
images at a later time.
For more information on Batch, see “Batch Processing”.
Ortho Calibration Ortho calibration is the process of automatically creating an

orthorectified mathematical model that associates the original image
with the Earth’s surface. This process does not create a new image.
Within an ortho-calibrated image, each pixel has orthorectified X and
Y coordinates. This approach is ideal for retaining the original image
quality while preserving disk space.
By selecting the Ortho Rectification -> Calibration option within
the Process menu, the Ortho Calibration dialog opens, as shown in
Figure 135.
Figure 135: Ortho Calibration Dialog
Using ortho calibration techniques is preferred if the available disk

space is low, and/or the spectral quality of the original image is poor.
Otherwise, the Resampling option of orthorectification is
recommended.
LPS Project Manager Ortho Calibration / 369

LPS Project Manager Ortho Calibration / 370
Appendices

Batch Processing
Introduction When you are working with a block file that contains many images
you wish to use in the generation of DTMs, you can use the ERDAS
IMAGINE Batch Wizard to automate the process. The following
sections give you steps to follow in using Batch to create multiple
DTMs.
The DTM Extraction dialog in LPS Automatic Terrain Extraction has a
Batch button. This button is used to place the command in the Batch
queue instead of actually performing the operation. Off-line
processing allows unattended operation, enabling you to log off if
you wish.
On Microsoft Windows NT, you must have administrator

privilege to schedule Batch jobs at a later time.
Set Up/Start the Before you can use the Batch Wizard to schedule jobs to run later,
you must set up and run the Scheduler. This requirement means that
Scheduler
the account that starts the Scheduler must remain logged-in for the
scheduled job to run.
You must log in as an administrator or as a person with administrator
privileges to set up and start the Scheduler. Once started, the
Scheduler is available for use by any other person with
administrative privileges.
1. From the Start menu, select Settings -> Control Panel.
2. On the Control panel, select the Administrative Tools option.
3. Select Services.
The Services dialog opens.
LPS Project Manager Set Up/Start the Scheduler / 373

4. Scroll through the Services window and select Task Scheduler.
5. In the Services dialog, click the Properties icon.
6. Select Automatic as the Startup Type.
7. Click the Log On tab.
8. Click the This Account radio button. Enter your account name and
password, confirm your password, click Apply, and then click OK.
9. If necessary, click the Start Services icon.
NOTE: The ability to run a Batch process at a later time is built using
the Windows Scheduler, which is part of the at command. Refer to
the Windows help to learn more about the use of the at command.
NOTE: (Microsoft Windows NT) If you are submitting jobs for

processing later and you are using mapped network drives, then you
need to ensure that these maps are in place when the Batch job runs.
Typically, a mapped drive is only available to the current user unless
the Reconnect at Logon option was checked on the Map Network
Drive dialog when the drive was mapped.
If this option is not checked, then when the Batch process is run by
the Scheduler, it is not able to find the drive. This is one of the
reasons to make sure that the Scheduler service runs using your
account name. This ensures that remembered network drivemaps
are reestablished when the Batch process runs.
LPS Project Manager Set Up/Start the Scheduler / 374

Execute Multiple You can use the Batch Wizard to set up multiple jobs with varying
parameters. You may want to add a series of jobs to the batch list,
Files/Single
each with different parameters.
Command
NOTE: The following steps assume you have completed setup
through the actual application of automatic DTM extraction.
1. Once you have set all of your parameters in the DTM Extraction and
DTM Extraction Properties dialogs, click the Batch button.
The Batch Wizard opens.
This option is selected by default
1. Notice that the Use commands as they are option is selected by

default.
2. Click the Next button to advance to the next frame.
Select the time The name of the

you want batch Batch job is created
processing to begin automatically, but you
can change it if you wish
3. Click the Start Processing Later At radio button.
LPS Project Manager Execute Multiple Files/Single Command / 375

4. Type or use the increment nudgers to the right of the fields to set the
time at which you want the process to run.
Notice that the Name field shows the prefix atm, followed by a
number string. The atm prefix designates the Batch process as one
from LPS Automatic Terrain Extraction.
5. Click the Next button to advance to the next frame.
Enter your username and password
6. Click in the Enter Username field and type your user name.
7. Click in the Enter Password field and type your password.
8. Type your password again in the Confirm Password field.
9. Confirm that the Show job in Scheduled Tasks folder checkbox

is checked.
10. Click Finish to schedule the batch processing.

The Scheduled Batch Job List dialog opens.
Select the Row corresponding to the Batch job,

then click Modify to make changes to the job
If you decide that you want to alter parameters of the job (for
example, time) listed in the Job Name field, you can do so by
selecting the job, then clicking the Modify button at the bottom of
the Scheduled Batch Job List dialog. Similarly, if you want to delete
a job, select the job, then click the Delete button at the bottom of
the dialog.
If you wish to add other jobs to the scheduler, set the parameters
you desire, then follow the same series of steps. The job is added to
the Scheduled Batch Job List dialog.
LPS Project Manager Execute Multiple Files/Single Command /

Other Batch After you have processed a number of DTMs using Batch, you should
check them for accuracy. Once you have verified the accuracy and
Applications
performed any necessary post-processing, you can set up another
Batch job to use those DTMs as input into the orthoresampling
process.
Like the DTM Extraction dialog, the Ortho Resampling dialog also has
a Batch button. Simply set the parameters for each output
orthoimage, and add the process to the Batch job.
For more information about the Ortho Resampling dialog, see

“Orthorectification”.
You cannot schedule an orthoresampling Batch job that uses a

DTM generated by LPS Automatic Terrain Extraction to
immediately follow the DTM extraction Batch job. Files must be
pre-existing to be used as elevation control in the Ortho
Resampling dialog. Instead, use Batch to process the DTM
extractions, then set-up a separate Batch job to process the
orthoimages.
LPS Project Manager Other Batch Applications / 377

LPS Project Manager Other Batch Applications / 378
References
Introduction References and suggested readings are listed below.
Works Cited
Ackermann 1983
Ackermann, F. 1983. “High precision digital image correlation.”

Paper presented at 39th Photogrammetric Week, Institute of
Photogrammetry, University of Stuttgart, 231-243.
Agouris and Schenk 1996
Agouris, P., and T. Schenk. “Automated Aerotriangulation Using

Multiple Image Multipoint Matching.” Photogrammetric
Engineering and Remote Sensing 62.6 (1996): 703-710.
American Society of Photogrammetry 1980
American Society of Photogrammetry. Photogrammetric

Engineering and Remote Sensing XLVI.10 (1980): 1249.
Bauer and Müller 1972
Bauer, H., and J. Müller. “Height accuracy of blocks and bundle

block adjustment with additional parameters.” Paper
presented at International Society for Photogrammetry and
Remote Sensing (ISPRS) 12th Congress, Ottawa, 1972.
Department of Defense 1990
Department of Defense (DOD). Mapping, Charting and Geodesy

Accuracy. MIL-STD-600001, 1990.
Ebner 1976
Ebner, H. “Self-calibrating block adjustment.” Bildmessung und

Luftbildwesen 4 (1976).
El-Hakim and Ziemann 1984
El-Hakim, S. F., and H. Ziemann. “A Step-by-Step Strategy for

Gross Error Detection.” Photogrammetric Engineering &
Remote Sensing 50.6 (1984): 713-718.
Federal Geographic Data Committee 1997
Federal Geographic Data Committee (FGDC). Content Standards

for Digital Orthoimagery. Federal Geographic Data
Committee, Washington, DC, 1997.
Federation of American Scientists 2000
Federation of American Scientists. 2000. “Digital Point
LPS Project Manager Works Cited / 379

Positioning Data Base (DPPDB).” 2000 Retrieved June 10,
2003, from
<http://www.fas.org/irp/program/core/dppdb.htm>.
Förstner and Gülch 1987
Förstner, W., and E. Gülch. “A fast operator for detection and

precise location of distinct points, corners and centers of
circular features.” Paper presented at the Intercommission
Conference on Fast Processing of Photogrammetric Data,
Interlaken, Switzerland, June 1987, 281-305.
Grün 1978
Grün, A. “Experiences with self calibrating bundle adjustment.”

Paper presented at the American Congress on Surveying and
Mapping/American Society of Photogrammetry (ACSM-ASP)
Convention, Washington, D.C., February/March 1978.
Grün and Baltsavias 1988
Grün, A., and E. P. Baltsavias. “Geometrically constrained

multiphoto matching.” Photogrammetric Engineering and
Remote Sensing 54.5 (1988): 633-641.
Heipke 1996
Heipke, C. “Automation of interior, relative and absolute

orientation.” International Archives of Photogrammetry and
Remote Sensing 31.B3 (1996): 297 - 311.
Helava 1988
Helava, U. V. “Object space least square correlation.”

International Archives of Photogrammetry and Remote
Sensing 27.B3 (1988): 321-331.
Howe 1995
Howe, D., ed. Free On-Line Dictionary of Computing. s.v.

“American Standard Code for Information Interchange.” 1995
Retrieved October 25, 1999, from
http://foldoc.doc.ic.ac.uk/foldoc.
International Earth Rotation and Reference Systems Service 2003
International Earth Rotation and Reference Systems Service

(IERS). “Welcome to the International Earth Rotation and
Reference Systems Service (IERS).” 2003 Retrieved October
1, 2003, from http://www.iers.org/iers/.
International Society for Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing [1999?]
International Society for Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing

(ISPRS). ISPRS—The Society. Retrieved May 29, 2000, from
http://www.isprs.org/society.html.
Jacobsen 1980
Jacobsen, K. “Vorschläge zur Konzeption und zur Bearbeitung

von Bündelblockausgleichungen.” Ph.D. dissertation,
wissenschaftliche Arbeiten der Fachrichtung
Vermessungswesen der Universität Hannover, No. 102, 1980.
Jacobsen 1982
———. “Programmgesteuerte Auswahl der zusätzlicher

Parameter.” Bildmessung und Luftbildwesen. (1982): 213-
217.
Jacobsen 1984
———. “Experiences in blunder detection for Aerial

Triangulation.” Paper presented at International Society for
Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing (ISPRS) 15th
Congress, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, June 1984.
Jacobsen 1994
———. “Combined Block Adjustment with Precise Differential

GPS Data.” International Archives of Photogrammetry and
Remote Sensing 30.B3 (1994): 422.
Jensen 1996
Jensen, J. R. Introductory Digital Image Processing: A Remote

Sensing Perspective. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-
Hall, 1996.
Keating, Wolf, and Scarpace 1975
Keating, T. J., P. R. Wolf, and F. L. Scarpace. “An Improved

Method of Digital Image Correlation.” Photogrammetric
Engineering and Remote Sensing 41.8 (1975): 993.
Konecny 1994
Konecny, G. “New Trends in Technology, and their Application:

Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing—From Analog to
Digital.” Paper presented at the Thirteenth United Nations
Regional Cartographic Conference for Asia and the Pacific,
Beijing, China, May 1994.
Konecny and Lehmann 1984
Konecny, G., and G. Lehmann. Photogrammetrie. Walter de

Gruyter Verlag, Berlin, 1984.
Kraus 1984
Kraus, K. Photogrammetrie. Band II. Dümmler Verlag, Bonn,

1984.
Krzystek 1998
Krzystek, P. “On the use of matching techniques for automatic

aerial triangulation.” Paper presented at meeting of the
International Society for Photogrammetry and Remote
Sensing (ISPRS) Commission III Conference, Columbus, Ohio,

July 1998.
Kubik 1982
Kubik, K. “An error theory for the Danish method.” Paper

presented at International Society for Photogrammetry and
Remote Sensing (ISPRS) Commission III Conference,
Helsinki, Finland, June 1982.
LH Systems 2002
LH Systems. PROCART User’s Guide. 2002.

Li 1983
Li, D. Ein Verfahren zur Aufdeckung grober Fehler mit Hilfe der a
posteriori-Varianzschätzung. Bildmessung und Luftbildwesen
5, 1983.
Li 1985
———. “Theorie und Untersuchung der Trennbarkeit von groben

Paßpunktfehlern und systematischen Bildfehlern bei der
photogrammetrischen punktbestimmung.” Ph.D. dissertation,
Deutsche Geodätische Kommission, Reihe C, No. 324, 1985.
Lü 1988
Lü, Y. “Interest operator and fast implementation.” International

Archives of Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing (IASPRS)
27.B2 (1988).
Mayr 1995
Mayr, W. “Aspects of automatic aerotriangulation.” Paper

presented at the 45th Photogrammetric Week, Wichmann
Verlag, Karlsruhe, September 1995, 225 - 234.
Merriam-Webster n.d.
Merriam-Webster. n.d. Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary.

s.v. “algorithm.” Retrieved February 7, 2001, from
http://www.m-w.com.
Moffit and Mikhail 1980
Moffit, F. H., and E. M. Mikhail. Photogrammetry. New York:

Harper & Row Publishers, 1980.
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration 2001
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA).

“Inertial Navigation System (INS).” 2001 Retrieved August
26, 2001, from http://www.csc.noaa.gov/crs/tcm/ins.html.
Natural Resources Canada 2001a
Natural Resources Canada. Glossary of Cartographic Terms. s.v.

“Cartesian coordinate system.” 2001a Retrieved August 27,
2001, from

http://www.atlas.gc.ca/english/carto/cartglos.html#4.
Natural Resources Canada 2001b
———. Glossary of Cartographic Terms. s.v. “coordinate

system.” 2001b Retrieved August 27, 2001, from
Natural Resources Canada 2001c
———. Glossary of Cartographic Terms. s.v. “GPS, Global

Positioning System.” 2001c Retrieved August 27, 2001, from
Natural Resources Canada 2001d
———. Glossary of Cartographic Terms. s.v. “parallax.” 2001d

Retrieved August 27, 2001 from
Schenk 1997
Schenk, T. “Towards automatic aerial triangulation.”

International Society for Photogrammetry and Remote
Sensing (ISPRS) Journal of Photogrammetry and Remote
Sensing 52.3 (1997): 110-121.
Stojic, Chandler, Ashmore, and Luce 1998
Stojic’ , M., J. Chandler, P. Ashmore, and J. Luce. “The

assessment of sediment transport rates by automated digital
photogrammetry.” Photogrammetric Engineering & Remote
Sensing 64.5 (1998): 387-395.
Tang, Braun, and Debitsch 1997
Tang, L., J. Braun, and R. Debitsch. “Automatic Aerotriangulation

- Concept, Realization and Results.” International Society of
Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing (ISPRS) Journal of
Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing 52.3 (1997): 121-131.
Tsingas 1995
Tsingas, V. “Operational use and empirical results of automatic

aerial triangulation.” Paper presented at the 45th
Photogrammetric Week, Wichmann Verlag, Karlsruhe,
September 1995, 207-214.
Vosselman and Haala 1992
Vosselman, G., and N. Haala. “Erkennung topographischer

Paßpunkte durch relationale Zuordnung.” Zeitschrift für
Photogrammetrie und Fernerkundung 60.6 (1992): 170-176.
Wang, Y. 1988
Wang, Y. “A combined adjustment program system for close

range photogrammetry.” Journal of Wuhan Technical

University of Surveying and Mapping 12.2 (1988).
Wang, Y. 1994
———. “Strukturzuordnung zur automatischen

Oberflächenrekonstruktion.” Ph.D. dissertation,
wissenschaftliche Arbeiten der Fachrichtung
Vermessungswesen der Universität Hannover, No. 207, 1994.
Wang, Y. 1995
———. “A New Method for Automatic Relative Orientation of

Digital Images.” Zeitschrift fuer Photogrammetrie und
Fernerkundung (ZPF) 3 (1995): 122-130.
Wang, Y. 1998
———. “Principles and applications of structural image

matching.” International Society of Photogrammetry and
Remote Sensing (ISPRS) Journal of Photogrammetry and
Remote Sensing 53 (1998): 154-165.
Wang, Z. 1990
Wang, Z. Principles of photogrammetry (with Remote Sensing).

Beijing, China: Press of Wuhan Technical University of
Surveying and Mapping, and Publishing House of Surveying
and Mapping, 1990.
Wolf 1980
Wolf, P. R. “Definitions of Terms and Symbols used in

Photogrammetry.” Manual of Photogrammetry. Ed. C. C.
Slama. Falls Church, Virginia: American Society of
Photogrammetry, 1980.
Wolf 1983
———. Elements of Photogrammetry. New York: McGraw-Hill,

Inc., 1983.
Wolf and Dewitt 2000
Wolf, P. R., and B. A. Dewitt. Elements of Photogrammetry with

Applications in GIS. 3rd ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, Inc.,
2000.
Wong 1980
Wong, K. W. “Chapter 11: Basic Mathematics of

Photogrammetry.” Manual of Photogrammetry. Ed. C. C.
Slama. Falls Church, Virginia: American Society of
Photogrammetry, 1980.
Yang 1997
Yang, X. “Georeferencing CAMS Data: Polynomial Rectification

and Beyond.” Ph. D. dissertation, University of South Carolina,

Columbia, 1997.
Yang and Williams 1997
Yang, X., and D. Williams. “The Effect of DEM Data Uncertainty

on the Quality of Orthoimage Generation.” Paper presented at
Geographic Information Systems/Land Information Systems
(GIS/LIAS) ’97, Cincinnati, Ohio, October 1997, 365-371.

Photogrammetric Glossary
Abbreviations and
Acronyms
A AT. aerial triangulation.
B b/h. eye-base to height ratio.
C CCD. charge-coupled device.

CTS. conventional terrestrial system.
D DEM. digital elevation model.

DPW. digital photogrammetric workstation.
DSM. digital stereo model.
DTM. digital terrain model.
E ECI. earth centered inertial.

ECF. earth centered fixed.
ECR. earth centered rotating.
G GCP. ground control point.

GIS. geographic information system.
GPS. global positioning system.
I IERS. International Earth Rotation Service.

INS. inertial navigation system.
ISPRS. International Society of Photogrammetry and Remote
Sensing.
L Lat/Lon. latitude/longitude.
LRX. lower right X.
LRY. lower right Y.
R RMSE. root mean square error.
S SCBA. self-calibrating bundle adjustment.

SI. image scale.
T TIN. triangulated irregular network.
U ULX. upper left X.
LGGI Template Document Abbreviations and Acronyms / 387

ULY. upper left Y.
File Types *.aoi. An Area of Interest file. Used to hold a point, line, or polygon
that is selected as a training sample or as the image area to be used
in an operation.
*.blk. A block file. A block file can contain only one image. A block
file that contains two or more images with approximately 60%
overlap can be viewed in stereo in other applications such as Stereo
Analyst.
*.cam. An ASCII file with a fixed structure. Provides camera
information such as focal length and principal point.
*.dat. An ASCII file. In LPS Project Manager, exterior orientation
parameters are often contained in a .dat file. Typically, this data
comes from the airborne GPS or INS used during image capture.
See also Airborne GPS
Inertial Navigation System
*.img. An ERDAS IMAGINE image file. Data in the .img format are
tiled data, which can be set to any size. A file containing raster image
data. An .img file contains data such as sensor information, layer
information, statistics, projection, pyramid layers, attribute data,
etc.
*.shp. An ESRI shape file. Shape files are in vector format, and can
store attribute data.
*.txt. An ASCII text file. Frequently used as an input GCP reference
source for 2- and
3-dimensional control point and check point coordinates.
Symbols κ. (Kappa) In a rotation system, Kappa is positive rotation about the

Z-axis.
ω. (Omega) In a rotation system, Omega is positive rotation about
the X-axis.
φ. (Phi) In a rotation system, Phi is positive or negative rotation
about the Y-axis.
See also Phi (-), Omega, Kappa
Phi(+), Omega, Kappa
LGGI Template Document Symbols / 388

Terms
A Additional parameter (AP). In block triangulation, additional

parameters characterize systematic error within the block of images
and observations, such as lens distortion. In LPS Project Manager,
four AP models can be used in the triangulation process, including:
Bauer’s Simple Model, Jacobsen’s Simple Model, Ebner’s Orthogonal
Model, and Brown’s Physical Model.
Adjusted stereopair. An adjusted stereopair is a pair of images
displayed in a workspace that has a map projection associated and
exterior orientation used to facilitate stereo viewing. A set of two
remotely-sensed images that overlap, providing a 3D view of the
terrain in the overlap area.
Aerial photographs. Photographs taken from positions above the
Earth captured by aircraft. Photographs are used for planimetric
mapping projects.
Aerial stereopair. Two photos with a common overlap area.
Aerial triangulation (AT). The process of establishing a
mathematical relationship between images, the camera or sensor
model, and the ground. The information derived is necessary for
orthorectification, DEM generation, and stereopair creation. This
term is used when processing frame camera, digital camera,
videography, and nonmetric camera imagery.
See also Triangulation
Affine transformation. A 2D plane-to-plane transformation that

uses six parameters (coefficients) to account for rotation,
translation, scale, and nonorthogonality in between the planes.
Defines the relationship between two coordinate systems such as a
pixel and image space coordinate system.
Air base. The distance between two image exposure stations.
See also Base-height ratio
Airborne GPS. GPS stands for Global Positioning System. Airborne

GPS is a technique used to provide initial approximations of exterior
orientation, which defines the position and orientation associated
with an image as they existed during image capture. GPS provides
the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the exposure station.
See also Global positioning system
Airborne INS. INS stands for Inertial Navigation System. Airborne

INS data is available for each image, and defines the position and
orientation associated with an image as they existed during image
capture.
See also Inertial navigation system
LGGI Template Document Terms / 389

Algorithm. “A procedure for solving a mathematical problem (as of
finding the greatest common divisor) in a finite number of steps that
frequently involves repetition of an operation” (Merriam-Webster
n.d.).
American standard code for information interchange (ASCII).
A “basis of character sets. . .to convey some control codes, space,
numbers, most basic punctuation, and unaccented letters a-z and A-
Z” (Howe 1995).
Analog photogrammetry. In analog photogrammetry, optical or
mechanical instruments, such as analog plotters, used to reconstruct
3D geometry from two overlapping photographs.
Analytical photogrammetry. The computer replaces some
expensive optical and mechanical components by substituting
analog measurement and calculation with mathematical
computation.
a priori. Already or previously known.
Area of interest (AOI). A point, line, or polygon that is selected as
a training sample or as the image area to be used in an operation.
AOIs can be stored in separate .aoi files.
Auto-correlation. A technique used to identify and measure the
image positions appearing within the overlap area of two adjacent
images in a block file.
Automated interior orientation. Technique based on template
matching used to identify and measure fiducial mark positions.
Automated tie point collection. LPS ATE’s ability to automatically
measure tie points across multiple images.
See also Tie point
Average flying height. The distance between the camera position

at the time of exposure and the average ground elevation. Average
flying height can be determined by multiplying the focal length by
the image scale.
See also Focal length
Image scale
B Base-height ratio (b/h). The ratio between the average flying

height of the camera and the distance between where the two
overlapping images were captured.
Block. A term used to describe and characterize all of the
information associated with a photogrammetric mapping project,
such as: projection, spheroid, and datum; imagery; camera or
sensor model information; GCPs; and geometric relationship
between imagery and the ground. A block file is a binary file.
Block footprint. A graphical representation of the extent of images
in a block file. The images are not presented as raster images.
Rather, they are displayed as vector outlines that depict the amount
of overlap between images in the block file.

Block of photographs. Formed by the combined exposures of a
flight. For example, a traditional frame camera block might consist
of a number of parallel strips with a sidelap of 20-30%, and an
overlap of 60%.
Block triangulation. The process of establishing a mathematical
relationship between images, the camera or sensor model, and the
ground. The information derived is necessary for orthorectification,
DEM generation, and stereopair creation.
Blunder. A blunder is a gross error resulting from incorrect data
entry, incorrect measurement of ground points on imagery, and
faulty identification of GCPs and tie points. In LPS Project Manager,
a blunder model identifies and removes errors from the
photogrammetric network of observations.
Break line. A breakline is a polyline in the terrain model that models
a change in terrain. Hard breaklines are used to model V-shaped
changes in the terrain; soft breaklines are used to model U-shaped
changes in the terrain.
Bundle. The unit of photogrammetric triangulation after each point
measured in an image is connected with the perspective center by a
straight light ray. There is one bundle of light rays for each image.
Bundle attitude. Defined by a spatial rotation matrix consisting of
three angles: Omega (ω), Phi (ϕ), and Kappa (κ).
See also Omega
Phi
Kappa
Bundle block adjustment. A mathematical technique

(triangulation) that determines the position and orientation of each
image as they existed at the time of image capture, determines the
ground coordinates measured on overlap areas of multiple images,
and minimizes the error associated with the imagery, image
measurements, and GCPs. This is essentially a simultaneous
triangulation performed on all observations.
Bundle location. Defined by the perspective center, expressed in
units of the specified map projection.
C Calibration certificate/report. In aerial photography, the

manufacturer of the camera specifies the interior orientation in the
form of a certificate or report. Information includes focal length,
principal point offset, radial lens distortion data, and fiducial mark
coordinates.
Camera coordinate system. A camera coordinate system has its
origin defined at the perspective center. Its x-axis and y-axis are
parallel to the x-axis and y-axis in the regular image plane
coordinate system. The z-axis is the optical axis; therefore the z
value of an image point in the camera coordinate system is usually
equal to -f (focal length). Camera coordinates are used to describe
the positions inside the camera and usually use units in millimeters
or microns. This coordinate system is referenced as camera
coordinates (x, y, and z).

See also Perspective center
Cartesian coordinate system. “A coordinate system consisting of

intersecting straight lines called axes, in which the lines intersect at
a common origin. Usually it is a 2-dimensional surface in which a
“x,y” coordinate defines each point location on the surface. The “x”
coordinate refers to the horizontal distance and the “y” to vertical
distance. Coordinates can be either positive or negative, depending
on their relative position from the origin. In a 3-dimensional space,
the system can also include a “z” coordinate, representing height or
depth. The relative measurement of distance, direction and area are
constant throughout the surface of the system” (Natural Resources
Canada 2001a).
CellArray. In ERDAS IMAGINE, the CellArray is used to maintain and
edit data in a tabular format.
Cell size. The area that one pixel represents, measured in map
units. For example, one cell in the image may represent an area 30′
× 30′ on the ground. Sometimes called pixel size.
Charge-coupled device (CCD). A device in a digital camera that
contains an array of cells which record the intensity associated with
a ground feature or object.
Check point. An additional ground point used to independently
verify the degree of accuracy of a triangulation.
Check point analysis. The act of using check points to
independently verify the degree of accuracy of a triangulation.
Coefficient limit. The limit for the cross-correlation coefficient. This
value ranges from .10 to .99. A larger limit results in fewer points
accepted and less error. A smaller limit results in more correlated
points, but also possibly more errors.
Collinearity. A nonlinear mathematical model that
photogrammetric triangulation is based upon. Collinearity equations
describe the relationship among image coordinates, ground
coordinates, and orientation parameters.
Collinearity condition. The condition that specifies that the
exposure station, ground point, and its corresponding image point
location must all lie along a straight line.
Control point. A point with known coordinates in a coordinate
system, expressed in the units (e.g., meters, feet, pixels, film units)
of the specified coordinate system.
Control point extension. The process of converting tie points to
control points. This technique requires the manual measurement of
ground points on photos of overlapping areas. The ground
coordinates associated with the GCPs are then determined using
photogrammetric techniques.
Convergence value. A threshold to determine the level and extent
of processing during the iterative aerial triangulation procedure.

Coordinate system. “A system, based on mathematical rules, used
to measure horizontal and vertical distance on a surface, in order to
identify the location of points by means of unique sets of numerical
or angular values” (Natural Resources Canada 2001b).
Coplanarity condition. The coplanarity condition is used to
calculate relative orientation. It uses an iterative least squares
adjustment to estimate five parameters (By, Bz, Omega, Phi, and
Kappa). The parameters explain the difference in position and
rotation between two images making up the stereopair.
Correlation. Regions of separate images are matched for the
purposes of tie point or mass point collection.
Correlation area. In LPS Project Manager, the default correlation
area is the total overlap area reduced by the shrink percentage.
Correlation limit. Defines the correlation coefficient threshold used
to determine whether or not two points are to be considered as
possible matches.
Correlation size. Defines the size of the window to be used to
compute the correlation between image points of common ground
points appearing on multiple images.
Correlation threshold. A value used in image matching to
determine whether to accept or discard match points. The threshold
is an absolute value threshold ranging from 0.100 to 1.000.
Correlation windows. Windows that consist of a local
neighborhood of pixels. One example is square neighborhoods (for
example, 3 × 3, 5 × 5, 7 × 7 pixels).
Corresponding GCPs. The GCPs that are located in the same
geographic location as the selected GCPs, but are selected in
different images.
Cross-correlation. A calculation that computes the correlation
coefficient of the gray values between the template window and the
search window.
See also Search windows
Template window

Cross-strips. Strips of image data that run perpendicular to strips
collected along the flight line.
Flight path
of airplane
to collect
cross-strips
Flight Line 3
Flight Line 2
Flight Line 1
Flight path
of airplane
D Data strip. A strip contained within aerial photographs. The strip

commonly provides information such as the type of camera, the
number of the camera, and the approximate focal length of the
camera.
Datum. “A datum is a system of reference for specifying the
horizontal and vertical spatial positions of points” (Wolf and Dewitt
2000).
See also Reference plane
Degrees of freedom. Also known as redundancy. In the bundle

block adjustment process, the number of unknowns is subtracted
from the number of knowns. The resulting number is the
redundancy, or degree of freedom in a solution.
Digital correlation. The process of automatically matching an
image of a ground point to its corresponding (conjugate) image on
another photo using digital correlation techniques. Also referred to
as image matching and stereocorrelation.
Digital elevation model (DEM). Continuous raster layers in which
data file values represent elevation. DEMs are available from the
USGS at 1:24,000 and 1:250,000 scale, and can be produced with
terrain analysis programs such as IMAGINE OrthoMAX™ and LPS
Project Manager.
Digital image matching. Also known as auto-correlation. The
process of matching features common to two or more images for the
purpose of generating a 3D representation of the Earth.
Digital orthoimage/orthophoto. An aerial photo or satellite scene
that has been transformed by the orthogonal projection, yielding a
map that is free of most significant geometric distortions.
Digital photogrammetric workstation (DPW). These include
LPS Project Manager, PCI OrthoEngine, SOCET SET, Intergraph,
Zeiss, and others.

See also Digital photogrammetry
Digital photogrammetry. Photogrammetry as applied to digital

images that are stored and processed on a computer. Digital images
can be scanned from photographs or can be directly captured by
digital cameras.
Digital stereo model (DSM). Stereo models that use imaging
techniques of digital photogrammetry that can be viewed on desktop
applications.
Digital terrain model (DTM). A discrete expression of topography
in a data array, consisting of a group of planimetric coordinates (X,Y)
and the elevations of the ground points and breaklines.
Digitizing. Any process that converts nondigital data into numeric
data, usually to be stored on a computer. In ERDAS IMAGINE,
digitizing refers to the creation of vector data from hardcopy
materials or raster images. The data are traced using a digitizer
keypad on a digitizing tablet, or a mouse on a display device.
Direction of flight. The direction in which the craft is moving (e.g.,
east to west). Images in a strip are captured along the aircraft or
satellite’s direction of flight. Images overlap in the same manner as
the direction of flight.
E Earth centered inertial (ECI) system. The ECI coordinate system

is space fixed with its origin at the Earth’s center of mass. The Z-axis
corresponds to the mean north celestial pole of epoch J2000.0. The
X-axis is based on the mean vernal equinox of epoch J2000.0. The
Y-axis is the cross-product of the Z-axis and the X-axis.
Earth centered rotating (ECR) system. The ECR or ECF (Earth
centered fixed) coordinate system is Earth fixed with its origin at the
center of mass of the Earth. It corresponds to the conventional
terrestrial system (CTS) defined by the International Earth Rotation
Service (IERS), which is the same as the U.S. Department of Defense
World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS84) geocentric reference system.
See also Geodetic coordinate system
Elements of exterior orientation. Variables that define the

position and orientation of a sensor as it obtained an image. It is the
position of the perspective center with respect to the ground space
coordinate system.
Ephemeris. Data contained in the header of the data file of an
image, provides information about the recording of the data and the
satellite orbit.
Epipolar line. The line traced on each image representing the
intersection of the epipolar plane with the image plane.
Epipolar plane. The plane, in space, containing a ground point and
both exposure stations.

Epipolar-resampled imagery. Two images resampled (rectified or
warped) such that clear stereo viewing is possible. Each line of the
images is an epipolar line in which changes of height are effected by
moving along the line (x-parallax); anomalies in stereo viewing
represent displacement of images between lines (y-parallax).
Epipolar stereopair. A stereopair in which Y-parallax has been
removed.
Exclusion AOI. An AOI purposely excluded from processing. The
exclusion can be due to poor registration, or interest in some other
feature. Exclusion AOIs are collected in the same manner as
inclusion AOIs. LPS Automatic Terrain Extraction makes use of
exclusion AOIs for DTM extraction.
Exposure station. During image acquisition, each point in the flight
path at which the camera exposes the film. The exposure station has
elements that define its position and rotation: X, Y, Z, Omega, Phi,
and Kappa.
See also Omega, Phi, Kappa
Exterior orientation. External sensor model information that

describes the exact position and orientation of each image as they
existed when the imagery was collected. The image’s position is
defined as having 3D coordinates, and the orientation is defined as
having three rotations that include Omega, Phi, and Kappa.
Exterior orientation parameters. The perspective center’s
ground coordinates in a specified map projection and three rotation
angles around the coordinate axes.
Eye-base to height ratio. The eye-base is the distance between a
person’s eyes. The height is the distance between the eyes and the
image datum. When two images of a stereopair are adjusted in the
X and Y direction, the eye-base to height ratio is also changed.
Change the X and Y positions to compensate for parallax in the
images.
F Fiducial. Four or eight reference markers fixed on the frame of an

aerial metric camera and visible in each exposure. Fiducials are used
to compute the transformation from pixel coordinates to image
coordinates.
Fiducial center. The center of an aerial photo; the intersection
point of lines constructed to connect opposite fiducials.
Fiducial orientation. Defines the relationship between the
image/photo-coordinate system of a frame and the actual image
orientation as it appears in a view.
Focal length. The distance between the optical center of the lens
and where the optical axis intersects the image plane. Focal length
of each camera is determined in a laboratory environment.
Focal plane. The plane of the film or scanner used in obtaining an
aerial photo.

Free-weighted iterative adjustment. In LPS Project Manager, a
free-weighted iterative adjustment does not assign statistical
weights to the bundled adjustment used during aerial triangulation.
See also Aerial Triangulation
Full GCP. A GCP with X, Y, and Z coordinates.

See also Ground Control Point
Functional model. The mathematical form of photogrammetric

equations consisting of unknown and observed parameters which are
to be incorporated in a least squares adjustment approach.
G Geodetic coordinate system. The geodetic coordinate system is

based on the WGS84 reference frame with coordinates expressed in
latitude, longitude, and height above the reference Earth ellipsoid.
No ellipsoid is required by the definition of the ECR coordinate
system, but the geodetic coordinate system depends on the selection
of an Earth ellipsoid. Latitude and longitude are defined as the angle
between the ellipsoid normal and its projection onto the equator and
the angle between the local meridian and the Greenwich meridian,
respectively.
Geographic information system (GIS). A unique system
designed for a particular application that stores, enhances,
combines, and analyzes layers of geographic data to produce
interpretable information. A GIS may include computer images,
hardcopy maps, statistical data, and any other data needed for a
study, as well as computer software and human knowledge. GISs are
used for solving complex geographic planning and management
problems. A GIS consists of spatial data stored in a relational
database with associated ancillary information.
Global positioning system (GPS). “A surveying method that uses
a set of 24 satellites in geostationary position high above the Earth.
Specially designed GPS receivers, when positioned at a point on
Earth, can measure the distance from that point to three or more
orbiting satellites. The coordinates of the point are determined
through the geometric calculations of triangulation. GPS provides
accurate geodetic data for any point on the Earth” (Natural
Resources Canada 2001c).
Ground control point (GCP). An easily identifiable point for which
the ground coordinates of the map coordinate system are known.
H Horizontal control. A set of points with defined planimetric

positions in a map coordinate system.
I Image. A picture or representation of an object or scene on paper,

or a display screen. Remotely sensed images are digital
representations of the Earth.
Image center. The center of the aerial photo or satellite scene.
Image coordinate space. A 2D space where measurements are
recorded in pixels.

Image coordinate system. A 2D coordinate system defined in the
photographic plane. The axes are constructed by the intersection of
opposing fiducials.
Image scale (SI). Expresses the ratio between a distance in the
image and the same distance on the ground.
Image space coordinate system. A coordinate system composed
of the image coordinate system with the addition of a Z axis defined
along the focal axis.
Incidence angles. Angles specifying the position of sensors
onboard a satellite. Also called inclination angles.
Inclination. The angle between a vertical on the ground at the
center of the scene and a light ray from the exposure station, which
defines the degree of off-nadir viewing when the scene was
recorded.
Inclusion AOI. An AOI purposely included in processing, as in DTM
extraction.
See also Exclusion AOI
Inertial navigation system (INS). A technique that provides

initial approximations to exterior orientation. This data is provided by
a device or instrument. The instrument collects data about the
attitude of the airplane in which it is located. The information it
collects includes pitch (tilting forward and backward), roll (tilting
sideways), and heading (the direction of flight) (National Oceanic
and Atmospheric Administration 2001).
See also Omega, Phi, Kappa
Interior orientation. Describes the internal geometry of a camera

such as the focal length, principal point, lens distortion, and fiducial
mark coordinates for aerial photographs.
International Earth Rotation and Reference Systems Service
(IERS). The IERS provides celestial and terrestrial reference
systems and frames that help “the astronomical, geodetic and
geophysical communities” (International Earth Rotation and
Reference Systems Service 2003). For more information, see the
IERS web site at www.iers.org.
International Society of Photogrammetry and Remote
Sensing (ISPRS). An organization “devoted to the development of
international cooperation for the advancement of photogrammetry
and remote sensing and their application.” For more information,
visit the web site at http://www.isprs.org (International Society for
Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing [1999?]).
Iterations with relaxation. During a free-weighted adjustment,
each iteration of processing does not use the statistical weights
associated with the GCPs in the block file.
K Kappa. (κ) In a rotation system, Kappa is positive rotation around

the Z-axis.

Konrady coefficients. Coefficients that define radial lens
distortion. Expressed as K0, K1, and K2.
See also Radial lens distortion
L Latitude/longitude (lat/lon). The coordinate components of a

spherical map coordinate system.
Least squares adjustment. A technique by which the most
probable values are computed for a measured or indirectly
determined quantity based upon a set of observations. It is based on
the mathematical laws of probability and provides a systematic
method for computing unique values of coordinates and other
elements in photogrammetry based on a large number of
redundance measurements of different kinds and weights.
Least squares correlation. Uses the least squares estimation to
derive parameters that best fit a search window to a reference
window.
Least squares regression. The method used to calculate the
transformation matrix from the GCPs. This method is discussed in
statistics textbooks.
Lens distortion. Caused by the instability of the camera lens at the
time of data capture. Lens distortion makes the positional accuracy
of the image points less reliable.
Lower right X (LRX). The X map or file coordinate of the lower right
pixel in the file.
Lower right Y (LRY). The Y map or file coordinate of the lower right
pixel in the file.
M Map coordinates. A system of expressing locations on the Earth’s

surface using a particular map projection, such as UTM, State Plane,
or Polyconic.
Map coordinate system. A map coordinate system that expresses
location on the Earth’s surface using a particular map projection such
as Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM), State Plane, or Polyconic.
Mass points. Points whose 3D coordinates are known (X, Y, and Z),
which are used in creating a DEM or DTM.
See also Digital elevation model
Digital terrain model
Metric photogrammetry. The process of measuring information

from photography and satellite imagery.
Multiple points. Multiple points can be collected from a DSM to
create a TIN or DEM. Like a single point, multiple points have X, Y,
and Z coordinate values.
See also Triangulated irregular network
Digital elevation model
N Nadir. The area on the ground directly beneath a scanner’s

detectors.

Nadir line. The average of the left and right edge lines of a
pushbroom image.
Nadir point. The intersection of the focal axis and the image plane.
Near vertical aerial photographs. Photographs taken from
vertical or near vertical positions above the Earth captured by
aircraft. Photographs are used for planimetric mapping projects.
Nonmetric camera. A camera that has not been calibrated in a
laboratory to determine its internal geometry.
See also Focal length
Principal point
Lens distortion
Fiducial
Nonorthogonality. The deviation from perpendicularity between

orthogonally defined axes.
O Object space. “. . .the three-dimensional region that encompasses

the physical features imaged in photographs” (Wolf and Dewitt
2000).
Off-nadir. Any point that is not directly beneath a scanner’s
detectors, but off to an angle. The SPOT scanner allows off-nadir
viewing.
Omega. (ω) In a rotation system, Omega is rotation around the X-
axis.
Omega, Phi, Kappa. A rotation system that defines the orientation
of a camera/sensor as it acquired an image. Omega, Phi, Kappa is
used most commonly, where Omega is positive rotation around the
X-axis, Phi is a positive rotation around the Y-axis, and Kappa is a
positive rotation around the Z-axis. This rotation system follows the
right-hand rule.
See also Phi(+), Omega, Kappa
Phi(-), Omega, Kappa
Right-hand rule
Optical axis. “. . .The line joining the centers of curvature of the

spherical surfaces of the lens” (Wolf and Dewitt 2000).
Orbital coordinate system. The orbital coordinate system is
centered on the satellite and its orientation is based on the satellite
position in inertial space. The origin is the satellite center of mass
with the Z-axis pointing from the satellite center of mass to the Earth
center of mass. The Y-axis is the normalized cross-product of the Z-
axis and the instantaneous (inertial) velocity vector. It corresponds
to the direction of the negative of the instantaneous angular
momentum vector direction. the X-axis is the cross-product of the Y-
axis and Z-axis.
Orientation. The position of the camera or satellite as it captured
the image. Usually represented by six coordinates: X, Y, Z, Omega,
Phi, and Kappa.

Orientation angle. The angle between a perpendicular to the
center scan line and the North direction in a satellite scene.
Orientation matrix. A three-by-three matrix defining the
relationship between two coordinate systems (that is, image space
coordinate system and ground space coordinate system).
LPS Project Manager block file. An LPS Project Manager block file
has the .blk extension. LPS Project Manager block files contain at
least one stereopair that is in a coordinate system. An LPS Project
Manager block file may also contain two or more sets of stereo
images used for feature extraction and viewing.
Orthogonal axes. Axes that intersect traditional frame camera
images at right angles.
Orthorectification. Also called ortho resampling. The process of
removing geometric errors inherent within photography and imagery
caused by relief displacement, lens distortion, and the like.
Overlap. In a traditional frame camera, when two images overlap,
they share a common area. For example, in a block or strip of
photographs, adjacent images typically overlap by 60%.
60% overlap
P Parallax. “The apparent angular displacement of an object as seen

in an aerial photograph with respect to a point of reference or
coordinate system. Parallax is caused by a difference in altitude or
point of observation” (Natural Resources Canada 2001d).
Perspective center. The optical center of a camera lens. (1) A point
in the image coordinate system defined by the x and y coordinates
of the principal point and the focal length of the sensor. (2) After
triangulation, a point in the ground coordinate system that defines
the sensor’s position relative to the ground.
Phi. (ϕ) In a rotation system, Phi is rotation around the Y-axis.
Phi(-), Omega, Kappa. A rotation system in which Phi is a negative
rotation about the
Y-axis, Omega is a positive rotation about the X-axis, and Kappa is
a positive rotation about the Z-axis. Y is the primary axis.
Phi(+), Omega, Kappa. A rotation system in which Phi is a positive
rotation about the Y-axis, Omega is a positive rotation about the X-
axis, and Kappa is a positive rotation about the Z-axis. Y is the
primary axis. This system is most commonly used in Germany.
Photo direction. The direction of the optical axis looking down; Z.
In close range photography, it is Y.

Photogrammetric quality scanners. Special devices capable of
high image quality and excellent positional accuracy. Use of this type
of scanner results in geometric accuracy similar to traditional analog
and analytical photogrammetric instruments.
Photogrammetry. The “art, science and technology of obtaining
reliable information about physical objects and the environment
through the process of recording, measuring, and interpreting
photographic images and patterns of electromagnetic radiant
imagery and other phenomena” (American Society of
Photogrammetry 1980).
Pixel coordinate system. The file coordinates of a digital image are
defined in a pixel coordinate system. A pixel coordinate system is
usually a coordinate system with its origin in the upper-left corner of
the image—the x-axis pointing to the right, the y-axis pointing
downward, and the units in pixels. These file coordinates (c, r) can
also be thought of as the pixel column and row number. This
coordinate system is referenced as pixel coordinates (c, r).
Plane table photogrammetry. Prior to the invention of the
airplane, photographs taken on the ground were used to extract the
geometric relationships between objects.
Principal point. The point in the image plane onto which the
perspective center is projected.
Principal point of autocollimation. Part of the definition of
principal point, the image position where the optical axis intersects
the image plane. The principal point of autocollimation is near the
principal point (Wolf 1983).
Principal point of symmetry. Part of the definition of principal
point, the principal point of symmetry can best compensate for lens
distortion. “The point about which [distortions] are symmetrical”
(Wolf 1983).
Principal point xo. A parameter used to define the location of the
principal point in the x direction, which is relative to the origin of the
image or photo-coordinate system. The location in the x direction
where the optical axis of the camera intersects the image or
photographic plane.
Principal point yo. A parameter used to define the location of the
principal point in the y direction, which is relative to the origin of the
image or photo-coordinate system. The location in the y direction
where the optical axis of the camera intersects the image or
photographic plane.
R Radial lens distortion. Imaged points are distorted along radial

lines from the principal point. Also referred to as symmetric lens
distortion.
Rational functions. Rational two-dimensional polynomials formed
to handle the mapping of ground coordinates to an image space
coordinate system after triangulation is complete.
line = (g (X, Y, Z)) / (g’ (X, Y, Z))
sample = (f (X, Y, Z)) / (f’ (X, Y, Z))

Redundancy. In a block of data, the amount of data that is
duplicated, thus providing strong geometric fidelity.
See also Degrees of freedom
Reference plane. In a topocentric coordinate system, the

tangential plane at the center of the image on the Earth ellipsoid, on
which the three perpendicular coordinate axes are defined.
Regular block of photos. A rectangular block in which the number
of photos in each strip is the same; this includes a single strip or a
single stereopair.
Residual. “The difference between any measured quantity and the
most probable value for that quantity” (Wolf and Dewitt 2000).
Right-hand rule. A convention in 3D coordinate systems (X, Y, Z)
that determines the location of the positive Z-axis. If you place your
right hand fingers on the positive X-axis and curl your fingers toward
the positive Y-axis, the direction your thumb is pointing is the
positive Z-axis direction (ERDAS 1999).
Root mean square error (RMSE). Used to measure how well a
specific calculated solution fits the original data. For each
observation of a phenomena, a variation can be computed between
the actual observation and a calculated value. (The method of
obtaining a calculated value is application-specific.) Each variation is
then squared. The sum of these squared values is divided by the
number of observations and then the square root is taken. This is the
RMSE value.
Rotation matrix. A 3 × 3 matrix used in the aerial triangulation
functional model. Determines the relationship between the image
space coordinate system and the ground space coordinate system.
m 11 m 12 m 13
M = m 21 m 22 m 23
m 31 m 32 m 33
S Satellite body coordinate system. A body coordinate system is

fixed to the satellite with its origin at the satellite center of mass. The
coordinate axes are defined by the satellite attitude control system.
It is the orientation of this coordinate system relative to the orbital
coordinate system that is captured in the attitude data.
See also Orbital coordinate system
Search size. The window size (in pixels) to search for corresponding
points in two images during correlation.
Search windows. Candidate windows on the second image of an
image pair that are evaluated relative to the reference window in the
first image.

Self-calibrating bundle adjustment (SCBA). Bundle adjustment
which also estimates the interior orientation parameters associated
with a camera or sensor model.
Self-calibration. A technique used in block bundle adjustment to
determine internal sensor model information.
Shrink percentage. In LPS Automatic Terrain Extraction, the
percentage by which the output DTM is shrunk versus the original
scale. The shrink percentage is applied to each side of the output
DTM.
Original output DTM
Output DTM reduced by 5%

(2.5% on each side)
Side fiducial. Fiducials that are located at the sides of an image,

rather than at the corners of an image.
See also Fiducial
Side incidence angle. The angle between the vertical position of

the satellite and the side viewing direction of the satellite when the
sensor is scanning along the side. For example, SPOT imagery side
incidence angles can range from +27 to -27 degrees. The scanning
direction is perpendicular to the direction of flight.
Sidelap. In a block of photographs consisting of a number of parallel
strips, the sidelap (measured vertically) is usually 20-30% in
traditional frame camera photos. Tie points are typically measured
in the sidelap.
Softcopy photogrammetry.
See Digital photogrammetry
Space forward intersection. A technique used to determine the

ground coordinates X, Y, and Z of points that appear in the
overlapping areas of two or more images based on known interior
orientation and exterior orientation parameters.
Space intersection. A technique used to determine the ground
coordinates X, Y, and Z of points that appear in the overlapping areas
of two images, based on the collinearity condition.
Space resection. A technique used to determine the exterior
orientation parameters associated with one image or many images,
based on the collinearity condition.
Spatial resolution. A measure of the smallest object that can be
resolved by the sensor, or the area on the ground represented by
each pixel.
Standard deviation of unit weight.
See Root mean square error

Stereopair. A set of two remotely-sensed images that overlap,
providing a 3D view of the terrain in the overlap area.
Strategy. In LPS Automatic Terrain Extraction, a strategy is a set of
correlation parameters defined for a specific area in a stereopair for
the purpose of DTM extraction. An appropriate strategy can improve
the likelihood of obtaining reliable image matching results.
Strip of photographs. In traditional frame camera photography,
consists of images captured along a flight-line, normally with an
overlap of 60% for stereo coverage. All photos in the strip are
assumed to be taken at approximately the same flying height and
with a constant distance between exposure stations. Camera tilt
relative to the vertical is assumed to be minimal.
See also Cross-strips
T Tangential lens distortion. Distortion that occurs at right angles

to the radial lines from the principal point.
Template window. A small subset of an image that you want to try
to locate in another image based on specific matching criteria. A
template usually remains fixed in one image during the matching
process.
Terrestrial photographs. Ground-based photographs and images
taken with a camera stationed on or near the Earth’s surface.
Photographs are usually used for archeology, geomorphology, and
civil engineering.
Tie point. A point; its ground coordinates are not known, but can be
recognized visually in the overlap or sidelap area between two
images.
Topocentric coordinate system. A coordinate system that has its
origin at the center of the image on the Earth ellipsoid. The three
perpendicular coordinate axes are defined on a tangential plane at
this center point. The x-axis is oriented eastward, the y-axis
northward, and the z-axis is vertical to the reference plane (up).
Transformation matrix. A set of coefficients that is computed from
GCPs, and used in polynomial equations to convert coordinates from
one system to another. The size of the matrix depends upon the
order of the transformation.
Triangulated irregular network (TIN). A specific representation
of DTMs in which elevation points can occur at irregular intervals
forming triangles.
Triangulation. Process of establishing the geometry of the camera
or sensor relative to objects on the Earth’s surface.
See also Aerial triangulation
U Upper left X (ULX). The X map or file coordinate of the upper left
pixel in the file.
Upper left Y (ULY). The Y map or file coordinate of the upper left
pixel in the file.

X X-parallax. The difference in position of a common ground point
appearing on two overlapping images, which is a function of
elevation. X-parallax is measured horizontally.
Y Y-parallax. The difference in position of a common ground point

appearing on two overlapping images, which is caused by differences
in camera position and rotation between two images. Y-parallax is
measured vertically.
Z Z. The vertical (height) component of a point, floating cursor, or

feature in a given coordinate system.
Z-axis. In the image space coordinate system, the Z-axis is the
optical axis. The image space coordinate system directs the z-axis
toward the imaged object. In object space, the Z axis is orthogonal
to the X and Y axes and is directed out of the Earth’s surface.

Index Attach 142
Attach Options tab 142
Attaching multiple images 273
Auto Locate 86
Symbols Auto Tie Properties icon 150
.blk file 72, 136, 171 Automated gross error checking 333
.cam file 146, 275 Automatic (x, y) Drive icon 99, 186
.dat file 139, 259 Automatic block configuration 309
.rrd file 270 Automatic tie point
collection 5, 50, 109–113, 148–152,
Numerics 207–209, 309
2D affine transformation 30 alternative solutions 311
color imagery 317
A correlation limit 316
Activate automatic x, y drive 98, 186 correlation size 315
Active status 155 feature point density 316
Add Frame icon 76, 174, 200
Add images 267
initial accuracy 316
to a block file 75–78, 141–143, 174–175, least squares size 315
200 minimum input requirements
to the LPS Project Manager 76 310
Add rows optimizing 310
to file CellArray 95, 98 search size 315
to reference CellArray 92, 96, 99
Additional Parameters (AP) 321
trouble shooting tips 318
modeling 64 extraction 309
generation options 109
Advanced Options tab 154, 211
Automatic Tie Point Collection Properties icon
Aerial photographs 15
109, 207
Aerial triangulation 18, 40, 113–119, 287,
Automatic Tie Point Generation Properties di-
321, 346
alog 110, 151, 309
accuracy estimates 322
Automatic Z Value icon 198
convergence value 322
Average flying height 256
options 113
report 334, 335
unit definition 336 B
results 338 Background Transparent option
statistical weights 323 apply to ortho resampled images 125
using statistical information 323 Bauer’s Simple Model 331
Aerial Triangulation dialog 113, 153, 154 Bilinear interpolation 270
Advanced Options tab 154 Block 245
Exterior tab 154 files
General tab 153 attach 142
Point tab 113 of images 49
Airborne GPS 6, 7, 40, 138 Block property setup 264
All Images Without Pyramids 201 Block Property Setup dialog 74, 138, 252
Analog photogrammetry 14 Set Frame-Specific Information 74, 138
Analytical photogrammetry 14 Set Reference System 74
AP 64 Block triangulation 5, 18, 40, 321
Area based matching 52 Blunder checking models 333
Arrange layers of the block file 166, 219, 220 Brown’s Physical Model 332
ASCII 139 Bundle block adjustment 5, 19, 40, 321
ASCII File (*.dat) 139
AT 40
LPS Project Manager Index / 407

C Correlation windows 52
Calibration report 6, 276 Create block
Camera file (*.cam) 146 coordinate system 246
Camera Information dialog 80, 145, 274 exterior orientation 246
General tab 80, 145 imagery 246
Camera Parameter File Name dialog 146 project name 246
Cartesian coordinate system 28 rotation system 246
CCD 6, 56 sensor model 246
CellArray 267, 272, 276, 285, 288, 289 units 246
Change active status of a point 155 Create New Block File dialog 71, 135, 171
Change control point color 91 Create new camera model 144
Change images in Left View 97, 149 Create orthoimages 213
Change images in Right View 97, 149 Create Point icon 183, 186, 204
Charge coupled device (CCD) 6 Creating pyramid layers 270
Check orthoimages 162–166, 216–220 Cross-correlation 52
Check points 104 Cross-strips 246
measuring 297 Cubic convolution 270
Check tie point accuracy 111, 152–153, 209–
210 D
Choose tie point properties 207 Data Scaling dialog 284
Choose triangulation parameters 210 Data strip 282
Classical aerial triangulation 19 Datum 32
Clear Display option Define
apply to ortho resampled images 125 block properties 72–75, 136–138
Close a block file 127, 167 camera model 79–90, 144–148, 271
Coefficients 31 frame-specific information 254
Collect ground control and tie points 90–109, geometric model 248
181–191 LPS project 247
Collect ground control points by entering coor- or edit camera information 273
dinates 203–207 sensor model 175–177, 201–202, 271
Collinearity condition 37 Degrees of freedom 43
Collinearity equations 42, 63 DEM 4, 197
Color Desktop scanners 22
control points 91 Detail View 150, 178, 279, 284, 298
fiducial marks 82 Dialog
Compute pyramid layers 78, 143–144 Aerial Triangulation 113, 153, 154
Compute Pyramid Layers dialog 79, 143, Automatic Tie Point Generation Properties
175, 201 110, 151
All Images Without Pyramids option 201 Block Property Setup 74, 138
Compute Pyramid Layers option 270 Camera Information 80, 145
Contrast Adjust dialog 284 Camera Parameter File Name 146
Control point color 91 Compute Pyramid Layers 79, 143, 175,
Control point extension 5, 7, 19, 301, 343 201
Control points Create New Block File 71, 135, 171
change active status of 155 Formula 199
getting information about 158 Frame Editor 80, 82, 83, 85, 87, 88, 142,
locating in Point Measurement tool 203 146, 147, 148, 201
Convergence value 45 Frame Editor dialog 89
Coordinate system 25 GCP Reference Source 179
ground space 25 Image File Name 77, 142
image space 25 Import ASCII File Name 139
Coordinates Import Options 140
update automatically 99, 186 Import Parameters 139
Correlation calculations 52

Model Setup 72, 136, 172 perspective center values 88
Ortho Resampling 120 rotation angles 88
Point Data 158 Exterior orientation 32
Point Measurement 90, 98, 109, 112, parameters 5
150, 152, 178, 180, 182, 185, SPOT 59
194, 195, 203, 209 Exterior orientation parameters 19
Projection Chooser 73, 137 Exterior Orientation tab 148
Select Layer To Add 218 Exterior tab 154
Sensor Information 177
SPOT Pushbroom Frame Editor 176 F
Triangulation 113, 210, 211 Feature
Triangulation Report 155 based matching 54
Triangulation Summary 114, 154, 211 point matching 54
Vertical Reference Source 198 Fiducial marks 29, 275, 277
Viewer Swipe 166, 219 change color 82
Different weighted values 324 deleting a measurement 286
Digital enter in Camera Information dialog 81
camera 249, 286 importing 276
elevation model (DEM) 4 importing measurements 283
elevation model as reference 197 remeasure 87
orthophoto 65 residuals 285
photogrammetric systems 16 side fiducials 86
photogrammetric workflow 266 Fiducial orientation 280
photogrammetry 14 Fiducial Orientation icon 82
Direction of flight 20 Field Definition tab 140
Display footprints 156, 157 File CellArray 150, 180, 185, 194
Display Mode 156 Check Points 109
Point IDs 156 Control Points 98, 104
DLL 267 Tie Points 112
File coordinates 182
E Fixed values 324
Ebner’s Orthogonal Model 332 Flight path 20
Elements of exterior orientation 32 Focal length 29
Elevation information 197 Focal plane 29
Enter exterior orientation information 87–88, Footprints 156, 157
147–148 Formula dialog 199
Enter fiducial coordinates 81 Frame camera 249, 279
Enter interior orientation information 81–87, Frame Camera Model results (Viewer) 125,
146–147 126
Enter Reference Control Points 95, 98, 100, Frame Camera Model steps 69–128
102, 104, 106, 108 Frame Editor dialog 80, 82, 83, 85, 87, 88,
Enter specific camera information 79–81, 89, 142, 146, 147, 148, 201, 271
144–145 Exterior Information tab 88
Ephemeris data 60 Exterior Orientation tab 148
Epipolar 395 Interior Orientation tab 82, 147
Error reporting 212 Interior Orientation tab (fiducial collection)
Exposure station 20, 57 83, 85, 87
Exterior information for multiple images moving between images 88
editing 288 Sensor tab 80, 89, 142, 146, 201
importing 289 Frame Editor icon 79, 201
Exterior information of an image Frame Properties icon 144
defining of 286 Full GCP 47
Exterior Information tab 88, 272, 287 Functional model 44

G Fiducial Orientation 82
GCP Reference Source dialog 179 Frame Editor 79, 201
GCPs 47, 297 Frame Properties 144
configuration 49 Horizontal Reference Source 178, 192
defining 300 Lock 85
full 300 LPS 70, 134, 226
horizontal 300 Measurement 84, 90, 149, 177, 202
horizontal reference 303, 304 Open 124, 198
multiple images 306 Ortho Resampling 119, 213
multiple strips 307 Select 87
requirements 48 Select Point 182, 183, 186
statistical quality of 303 Update Z Values 198
statistical weights 324 Vertical Reference Source 197
usage 300 Viewer 82, 163
vertical 300 Viewing Properties 91, 181
vertical reference 305 Zoom In 125, 164, 218
General Contrast options 284 IKONOS RPC 251
General tab 80, 113, 145, 153, 177 Image coordinate system 25
Generate multiple orthoimages 121 Image enhancement 283
Generate pyramid layers 175, 200–201 Image File Name dialog 77, 142
Generate tie points 207 Attach Options tab 142
Geocentric coordinate system 27 Raster Options tab 77
Geometric model 172 Image Layer 179
GPS 45 Image matching 51
Gray values 65 Image pyramid 55
Gross error detection 309 Image scale (SI) 21, 66
Gross errors 46 Image space 25, 29, 159
Ground control points (GCPs) Image space coordinate system 26
measuring 297 Images
Ground coordinate system 26 selecting in Point Measurement tool 97
Ground coordinates 301 Import ASCII file 139
exporting 302 Import ASCII File Name dialog 139
importing 301 Import Exterior Orientation parameters 138–
Ground point determination 343 141
Ground space 25 Import Options dialog 140
Ground-based photographs 16 Field Definition tab 140
Input Preview tab 140
Import Parameters dialog 139, 260
H
Importing exterior orientation parameters
Header file 60
258
High Resolution Visible sensors (HRV) 56
Incidence angles 60
Horizontal GCP 47
Inclination 60, 61
Horizontal Reference Source icon 178, 192
Inclination angles 60
HRV 56
Inertial Navigation System (INS) 7
Information about control points 158
I Input check points 104
Icon Input Preview tab 140
Add Frame 76, 174, 200 INS 7, 40, 45, 138
Auto Tie Properties 150 Interior orientation 28, 271, 278
Automatic (x, y) Drive 99, 186 SPOT 58
Automatic Tie Point Collection Properties Interior Orientation (fiducial collection) 83,
109, 207 85, 87
Automatic Z Value 198 Interior Orientation CellArray 283
Create Point 183, 186, 204 Interior Orientation tab 82, 147, 272, 283

Interior Orientation tab (fiducial collection) Normal random errors 46
83, 85, 87 Number of tie points per image
Internal sensor modeling 271 choosing 110
Interpretative photogrammetry 15
O
J Oblique imagery 330
Jacobsen’s Simple Model 331 Oblique photographs 16
Observation equations 42
K Off-nadir 61
Kappa 33, 255 Omega 33, 255
Keep All Points option 309 Open icon 124, 198
Keyboard shortcuts 10 Options for orthorectification 213
Orbital pushbroom 251
Orientation 33
L Orientation angle 62
Least squares Ortho calibration 269, 369
adjustment 40, 43, 323 Ortho resampling 365
condition 44 Ortho Resampling dialog 120
correlation 53 Ortho Resampling icon 119, 213
matching techniques 315 Ortho resampling options 119
results 338 Orthoimage generation 213
size 314 Orthoimages (Viewer results) 164, 165, 218,
Left View 149, 150 219
Lens distortion 31 Orthorectification 64, 365
Link Cursor Orthorectify imagery 119–122, 159–162,
moving in a Viewer 186 213–216
Lock icon 85 OverView 150, 178, 279, 284, 298
LPS icon 70, 134, 226
LPS Project Manager toolbar 264
P
Perform aerial triangulation 153–159, 210–
M 213
Magnify orthoimage 218–220 Perspective Center 88
Main View 150, 178, 279, 284, 298 Phi 33, 255
Mass points 5 Photogrammetric configuration 41
Measurement icon 84, 90, 149, 177, 202 Photogrammetric scanners 22
Metric photogrammetry 15 Photogrammetry 13
Microns 153 Photographic direction 255
Model Parameters tab 292 Pixel coordinate system 25, 29
Model Setup dialog 72, 136, 172 Pixel size in x 147
Select a geometric model 172 Pixel size in y 147
Moving between images in the Frame Editor Plane table photogrammetry 13
88 Point Data dialog 158
Point IDs in image space 158
N Point Measurement CellArray 308
Nadir 61 Point Measurement tool 90, 98, 109, 112,
Nearest neighbor 270 150, 152, 178, 180, 182, 185, 194, 195,
Negative inclination 60 203, 209
New LPS project 247 File CellArray 90
New sensor Check Points 109
defining information 80 Control Points 98
NITF RPC 251
Tie Points 112
Non-metric cameras 249, 250, 286
File CellArray (Tie Points) 152, 209
Nonorthogonality 30
Opening 202

Reference CellArray 90, 92 Reference CellArray (Control Points) 95, 98,
Check Points 109 100
Control Points 98 Reference Control Points 95, 98, 100, 102,
104, 106, 108
Tie Points 112
Reference coordinate system 252
Reference CellArray (Control Points) 95,
Reference coordinates 182, 192
98, 100
Reference image 192
Reference CellArray (Tie Points) 152, 209
Reference plane 27
Point Measurement Tool Palette 90, 178
Reference window 52
Point Measurement views 298
Relation based matching 55
Point tab 113
Remeasure fiducial marks 87
Point transfer 309
Report
Points per image 151
Triangulation Report 212
Positive inclination 60
Triangulation Summary report 114
Prepare a block file 70–72, 134–136, 170–
Report coordinates 153
174
Resolution 23
Principal point 29
Right hand rule 27
Principal point of autocollimation 29
Right View 149, 150
Principal point of symmetry 29
Right View dropdown list 97
Processing a strip of images 48
Right-hand rule 255
Processing one image 48
RMSE 22, 30
Project Graphic Status window 156, 157, 159
RMSE solution 86, 211
Project name 246
Root Mean Square Error (RMSE) 22, 30
Project setup
Rotation
generic pushbroom sensor models 264
angles 88
IRS-1C 264
matrix 33
SPOT 264
system 255
Projection Chooser dialog 73, 137, 252
RPC 251
Pushbroom sensors
IKONOS 251
generic pushbroom 250
NITF 251
IRS-1C pushbroom 250
QuickBird 251
Orbital pushbroom 251
SPOT pushbroom 250
Pyramid layers 78, 143, 175 S
Same weighted values 324
Satellite photogrammetry 56
Q
Satellite scene 58
QuickBird RPC 251
Save a block file 127, 167
Save camera information 145–146
R Save the block file 200
Radial lens distortion 31 Scan line 56
Definition 277 Scanning resolutions 23, 24
Radial Lens Distortion tab 277 SCBA 64
Raster Options tab 77, 218 estimating AP 330
Reference CellArray 92, 93, 96, 99, 101, optimizing 329
103, 105, 106, 150, 180, 185, 194, 198, statistical weights 327
200 Scene 57
Check Points 109 Search window 52
Control Points 98, 104 Select a geometric model 72, 136
Tie Points 112 Select check points 104
Type 93, 96, 99, 101, 103, 105, 106, Select Geometric Model 172
200 Select icon 87
Usage 93, 96, 99, 101, 103, 105, 106, Select Layer To Add dialog 218
200 Raster Options tab 218
Z Reference 198

Select Point icon 182, 183, 186 Sensor tab 201
Self-calibrating bundle adjustment (SCBA) Tangential lens distortion 31
64, 326 Terrestrial photography 16, 27
Sensor Information dialog 177 Tie point
General tab 177 accuracy 111
Sensor tab 80, 89, 142, 146, 176, 201, 271 Tie points 5, 19, 50, 152
Set Data Scaling dialog 299 as mass points 5
Set Frame-Specific Information 74, 138 distribution 50
Set horizontal reference 192–193 measuring 297
Set Projection option 252 number per image 151
Set Reference System 74 selection 309
Set Resampling Method dialog 298 Topocentric coordinate system 27
Set Type 199–200 Total Image Unit-Weight RMSE 154
Set Usage 199–200 Total station 325
Set vertical reference source 197–199 Triangulation 321, 353
SI 66 unit definition 356
Side fiducials 86 Triangulation dialog 113, 210, 211
Signal based matching 52 Advanced Options tab 211
Simple Gross Error check 211 General tab 113, 210
Single frame orthorectification 18, 245 Triangulation report 154, 212, 355
Softcopy photogrammetry 14 error checking model 356
Solve RMSE 86 exterior orientation 358
Space forward intersection 39 GCP results 359
Space resection 18, 38 image coordinate information 360
SPOT exterior orientation 59 iterative results 357
SPOT interior orientation 58 optimizing results 361
SPOT Pushbroom Frame Editor dialog 176 Triangulation Report dialog 155
176 Triangulation reporting 211
Sensor tab 176 Triangulation Summary dialog 114, 154, 211
SPOT Pushbroom model steps 169–221 Type 199
Standard error 338, 357 update with Formula dialog 199
Stereo measurement 14 Type of point 93, 96, 99, 101, 103, 105, 106
Strip of imagery 245
Sub-pixel accuracy 280 U
Symmetric lens distortion 31 Units in microns 153
Update Z Values icon 198
T Usage 199
Tab check points 104
Advanced Options 154, 211 update with Formula dialog 199
Attach Options 142 Usage of point 93, 96, 99, 101, 103, 105,
Exterior 154 106
Exterior Information 88 Use the Point Measurement tool 177–181,
Exterior Orientation 148 202–203
Field Definition 140 Use the Swipe tool 165–166, 219–220
General 80, 113, 145, 153, 177, 210
Input Preview 140 V
Interior Orientation 82 V residual matrix 45
Interior Orientation (fiducial collection) Velocity vector 62
83, 85, 87 Vertical GCP 47
Interior Orientation tab 147 Vertical Reference Source dialog 198
Point 113 DEM option 198
Raster Options 77, 218 Vertical Reference Source icon 197
Sensor 80, 89, 142, 146, 176 Video camera (videography) 249, 286

Viewer icon 82, 163, 279
Viewer Swipe dialog 166, 219
Viewers 279, 284
Viewing Properties dialog 303
Viewing Properties icon 91, 181
W
Weight function 334
X
X coordinates
update automatically 99, 186
X matrix 44
X pixel size 147
X Reference coordinates 95, 98, 100, 102,
104, 106, 108
Y
Y coordinates
update automatically 99, 186
Y pixel size 147
Y Reference coordinates 95, 98, 100, 102,
104, 106, 108
Z
Z value
automatic update 198
source 197
updating 198
Zoom In icon 125, 164, 218

Leica Photogrammetry Suite Project Manager

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Leica Photogrammetry Suite Project Manager

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Leica Photogrammetry Suite Project Manager

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Leica Photogrammetry

All rights reserved.

Printed in the United States of America.

Manager, Technical Documentation

Leica Geosystems Geospatial Imaging, LLC.

5051 Peachtree Corners Circle

Norcross, GA 30092-2500 USA.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

SOCET SET is a registered trademark of BAE Systems Mission Solutions.

Introduction to LPS Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Photogrammetric Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / iii

LPS Project Manager Tour Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Frame Camera Tour Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / iv

Digital Camera Tour Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / v

SPOT Pushbroom Sensor Tour Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / vi

Stereo Point Measurement Tool Tour Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / vii

Practical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Getting Started with LPS Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . .245

Adding Images to the Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

Defining the Camera or Sensor Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / viii

Measuring GCPs, Check Points, and Tie Points . . . . . . . . . . 297

Automatic Tie Point Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Block Triangulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / ix

Batch Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373

LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / x

Photogrammetric Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

LPS Project Manager Table of Contents / xi

LPS Project Manager / xiii

LPS Project Manager / xiv

LPS Project Manager / xv

Table 1: LPS Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

LPS Project Manager / xvii

Documentation This manual is part of a suite of on-line documentation that you

• click — designates clicking with the left mouse button.

• double-click — designates clicking twice with the left mouse

LPS Project Manager Conventions Used in This Book / xix

• middle-click — designates clicking with the middle mouse button.

• right-click — designates clicking with the right mouse button.

• hold — designates holding down the left (or right, as noted)

• drag — designates dragging the mouse while holding down the

These paragraphs contain strong warnings or important tips.

These paragraphs give you software-specific information.

These paragraphs provide information about Leica Geosystems

These paragraphs lead you to other areas of this book or other

NOTE: Notes give additional instruction.

LPS Project Manager Conventions Used in This Book / xx

LPS Project Manager /1

Introduction Welcome to LPS Project Manager, which is the primary component of

• Collecting ground control points (GCPs) in the field or office.

• Measuring GCPs and tie points on multiple images.

• Performing quality control in order to verify the overall accuracy

• Accommodating photography and satellite imagery from various

• Integrating data from airborne global positioning system (GPS)